Home

PARTNER MAIL VS Voice Messaging System

1. Make as many copies as you need Use template and or checklist Automatic System Answer 111 6 ASA m For additional instructions see pages 9 through 14 Direct Extension Dial 113 DXD SAMPLE Night Service 503 NightSve S T l l i Aap ae nnen f Outgoing Call Restriction 114 1 OCR O e If desired write in line number pool access code dial code feature or auto dial number 04 A EA ree hae Wake Up Service 115 Wake lt m e If desired write in Line Ringing Imm Del or No from Form B2 DEL 5 e If desired write in Line Access Restriction or Pool Access Restrictiont gt IN Call Screening F 25 SCREEN Out In or No from Form B2 Caller ID Call Log F 23 6 Calls D t Available with ACS R2 0 or later only Caller ID Inspect F 17 ID fspect o Caller ID Name Display F 16 ID Name c Do Not Disturb F 01 DND 3 7 o o o Privacy F 07 Priv a Record a Call F 247 RAC O O VMS Cover F 15 VMSCover Voice Interrupt on Busy Talk Back F 18 VIOB O O O o a O Account Code Entry F 12 2 ACE Background Music F 19 2 Music O O O O O Call Coverage F 20 XX XX 246 Cover XX XX Call Forwarding Call Follow Me F 11 XX XX 24 CF XX XX 0O O O O UO O Call Park I XX 3 Park E
2. If PARTNER MAILVS 4 5 j 5 2 port Is Installed In Slot Systems then Assign These 22 23 28 29 34 35 40 41 Exts To Hunt Group 7 If PARTNER MAIL VS gt 4 P 4 port Is Installed In Slot Systems Then Assign These 20 21 126 27 1 32 33 138 39 Exts To Hunt Group 7 22 23 28 29 34 35 40 41 Figure D 3 Dial Plan for PARTNER Endeavor Release 1 0 and PARTNER Advanced Communications System Release 1 0 1 1 2 0 or Later 2 Slot Carrier ACS Processor Module Line Jacks Extension Jacks 7 If PARTNER MAIL VS 2 2 port Is Installed In Slot Systems Then Assign These 22 23 Exts To Hunt Group 7 If PARTNER MAIL VS 2 4 port Is Installed In Slot Systems Then Assign These 20 21 Exts To Hunt Group 7 22 23 Figure D 4 Dial Plan for PARTNER Endeavor Release 1 0 and PARTNER Advanced Communications System Release 1 0 1 1 2 0 or Later Dial Plans D 6 PARTNER Plus Control Unit or PARTNER II PARTNER II Primary Carrier Expansion Carrier DS
3. ACS Processor Module 308 308 mm lA Line 1 ii Jacks OE 4 70 a 5 8 6 9 Em moa we c 18 26 a 19 27 i 20 28 j E 21 29H EJ j E 22 308 ka ld 23 31 a E 24 320 a aps 33g a i mi HT Extension Jacks If PARTNER MAIL VS 4 5 2 port Is Installed In Slot Systems Then Assign These 38 39 44 45 Exts To Hunt Group 7 If PARTNER MAIL VS 4 5 4 port Is Installed In Slot Systems Then Assign These 36 37 42 43 Exts To Hunt Group 7 38 39 44 45 Figure D 1 Dial Plan for PARTNER Advanced Communications System Release 2 0 or Later 5 Slot Carrier ACS Processor Module Line Jacks Extension Jacks lf PARTNER MAIL VS 2 port Is Installed In Slot Systems Then Assign These Exts To Hunt Group 7 lf PARTNER MAIL VS 4 port Is Installed In Slot Systems Then Assign These 28 Exts To Hunt Group 7 30 Figure D 2 Dial Plan for PARTNER Advanced Communications System Release 2 0 or Later Dial Plans 5 Slot Carrier ACS Processor Module
4. G Glossary GL 1 IN 1 L Menu Map and System Programming Reference viii Figures ey 1 1 Voice Messaging Service 1 5 ee 2 Installation 2 1 Voice Messaging System Extensions for PARTNER Advanced Communications System Release 2 0 or later with 308 and PARTNER MAIL Voice Messaging System Modules 2 3 2 2 Installing the PC Card 2 4 SSS 3 Understanding Programming 3 1 Programming Menus 3 10 N 5 System Management 5 1 Language Menu 5 10 5 2 Automated Attendant Service Menu 5 18 5 3 Modifying Mailboxes 5 40 5 4 Line Ownership 5 61 D Dial Plans D 1 Dial Plan for PARTNER Advanced Communications System Release 2 0 or Later D 2 D 2 Dial Plan for PARTNER Advanced Communications System Release 2 0 or Later D 3 D 3 Dial Plan for PARTNER Endeavor Release 1 0 and PARTNER Advanced Communications System Release 1 0 1 1 2 0 or Later D 4 Dial Plan for PARTNER Endeavor Release 1 0 and PARTNER Advanced Communications System Release 1 0 1 1 2 0 or Later Figures D 5 Voice Messaging System Extensions for PARTNER Plus and PARTNER II Communications Systems D 6 Dial Plan for Systems with Fax Tone Detect and a Voice Messaging System Module D 7 Dial Plan for Systems with Fax Tone Detect and a Voice Messaging System Module About This Document Purpose This guide provides instructions for installing upgrading prog and ma
5. Line de i Jacks na 6 1 7 26 8 18 ws 19 24 i 20 25 iM 211 26 221 27k i 23 belli 30 31 ii hi Extension Jacks lf PARTNER MAIL VS 2 port Is Installed In Slot Systems Then Assign These Exts To Hunt Group 7 lf PARTNER MAIL VS 4 4 port Is Installed In Slot Systems Then Assign These 34 35 Exts To Hunt Group 7 36 37 Figure D 6 Dial Plan for Systems with Fax Tone Detect and a Voice Messaging System Module 5 Slot Carrier ACS Processor Module 206 308 Vim m 308 PMVS comet arg Line 3 Ait Jacks oO a ee 9 7 A E 2 8 10 8 Em ap J 18 a e 19 ba B2 20 25 a i 33 aI 26 34 22 27 HN 2 i 35f 23 ba Ea lial Be boi a b7 300 a 38 31 a 39 TI HT i Extension Jacks If PARTNER MAIL VS 2 port Is Installed In Slot Systems Then Assign These Exts To Hunt Group 7 If PARTNER MAIL VS 4 port Is Installed In Slot Systems Then Assign These Exts To Hunt Group 7 Figure D 7 Dial Plan for Systems with Fax Tone Detect and a Voice Messaging System Module Case Studies Purpose This appendix contains two case studies based on actual customer requirements Each case study defines the call handling requirements of the business and ex
6. as De Touch Tone Enable F 08 TEN amp ae Specify Automatic Line Selection Zl Voice Mail Messages I 777 VMMsgs 777 I reft Intercom Identify extensions programmed as shown 10 V Voice Mailbox Transfer F 14 VMBox XX Extension Form C1 PARTNER 34D Phone Check Desired Button Features write in extension or group number Lucent Technologies Bell Labs Innovations Make as many copies as you need Use template and or checklist Automatic System Answer 111 6 ASA m For additional instructions see pages 9 through 14 Direct Extension Dial 113 DXD SAMPLE Night Service 503 NightSve S Template Instructions Outgoing Call Restriction 114 1 OCR O e If desired write in line number pool access code dial code feature or auto dial number 04 gong A all EA ree hae Wake Up Service 115 Wake lt m e If desired write in Line Ringing Imm Del or No from Form B2 DEL 5 e If desired write in Line Access Restriction or Pool Access Restrictiont gt IN Call Screening F 25 SCREEN Out In or No from Form B2 C
7. 2 Installation Address 1111 Tijuana Plaza Juarez NoM Yes CO If yes call local telephone company MF Mode and FCC AS5 USA 21312 MF E 3 Contact Name Vera Gonzalez Phone 52 599 1239 7 Features customer is most interested in most important first 4 Person to be Trained Phone Alternate Trainee s Name Vera Gonzalez C a Phone 29 5 Sold by A Lucent Technologies Sales Force Salesperson s Name Colleen Rivera Dealer 8 System Lines Hybrid Mode Line Write the Telephone Only AA DXD VMS Jack Numbers in order customer desires list personal and dedicated lines last 555 1234 i AA 607 205 206 Only one of these types per system Write auxiliary pool 881 882 883 or No Pool 207 PARTNER MAIL VS Phone 52 555 6812 Line Coverage Y ou can select one per line Write Ext No for Call Cover 208 Write User s Name for Check Personal or Owned Line if or Identify Equipment for Caller Dedicated Line ID Service Identify other Local Telephone Company Subscription Services e g Repeat Call Group write no 555 1235 555 1236 555 1237 1 Check if desired Also see Form B1 AA Extension 607 column 2 Check if desired Also see Form A Item 10 DXD and Form C Direct Extension Dial Button 113
8. To program the Day Menu press 1 For the Night Menu press 2 4 Press C for the Day Menu The system plays To play the menu press 2 to modify the menu press 6 If finished press 5 Press The system plays To play the menu prompt press 1 To play the Menu Definition press 2 If finished press Automated Attendant Service 6 Press to play the Menu Definition The system plays the current Menu Definition If an Announcement is recorded the system plays the Selector Code number and associated Announcement number 7 Either Press if you do not want to listen to the Announcement and go to the next Selector Code If the system is operating in Monolingual Mode press to play the recorded Announcement assigned to the Selector Code If the system is operating in Bilingual Mode press to play the Primary Language Announcement assigned to the Selector Code If the system is operating in Bilingual Mode press 2 to play the Secondary Language Announcement assigned to the Selector Code The system plays the recorded Announcement and goes to the next Selector Code 8 Press to return to the Programming Main Menu or hang up to quit Playing the Day or Night Menu Prompt To listen to the current Day or Night Menu Prompt 1 Access the Programming Main Menu Th a b C d e system plays the system programming options Press or the programmed Voice Mail Auto Di
9. Until subscribers record a personal greeting for their mailbox outside callers hear this factory set message in either the System Language Monolingual Mode or the Primary Language Bilingual Mode Extension XX is not available To leave a message wait for the tone After recording hang up or press 1 for more options Communications System Features Affecting Call Answer Service Call Answer Service works with the following communications system features VMS Extension Coverage Do Not Disturb VMS Line Coverage Extension Voice Mailbox Transfer Each of these features is explained further in this section For more information on these communications system features see the Programming and Use guide for your communications system 1 11 Overview VMS Extension Coverage VMS Extension Coverage may be either automatic or manual a Automatic VMS Coverage When the communications system s Automatic VMS Cover feature 310 is Assigned for an extension intercom and transferred callers can leave messages or transfer to another extension when the called person does not answer by the fourth ring or by the number of rings specified with the communications system s VMS Cover Rings feature 321 on PARTNER ACS Release 3 0 or later 117 on all other communications systems The system greets the caller with the subscriber s personal greeting or with the system greeting if a personal greeting is not recorded If the system is
10. ies to the message that callers can leave in the subscriber s mailbox the message that the subscriber can create and send and to the comment that a subscriber can add to a forwarded message 1 If necessary access the Programming Main Menu If you are already at the Programming Main Menu skip to Step 2 a Press or the programmed Voice Mail Auto Dial button b Press OQA c Enter the password and press d Press The system plays the system programming options 2 Press for Mailboxes The system tells you how many mailboxes exist and how many are allowed then Pleas nter the mailbox number follo press for the next mailbox wed by or 3 Enter the number of a mailbox whose message length and size is to change as indicated on Form 2 followed by The system plays Mailbox XX exists To administer the message length and mailbox size press 2 To reinitializ press 3 To reinitialize the mailbox e the password press 4 To administer Outcalling press 5 To program the Mailbox Language press 6 To administer Reco he To delete the mailbox press 3 this mailbox press or for the ne rd a Call press If finished with xt mailbox press Modifying Mailboxes Press 2 for Administer Message Length and Mailbox Size The system plays the message length and mailbox size Press to confirm that you want to change the message length
11. 2 Enter the System Password if required 3 Press AA0 4 Atthe Group prompt press Z 5 Atthe Line prompt enter the first VMS AA line to be programmed as specified in the Line Coverage column of Form A Page 1 6 Press until the display reads 1 Assigned Be careful not to choose 3 VMS Line Cover because you will assign VMS Line Coverage rather than Automated Attendant Service to the line 7 To program another line press Next item or Prev item until the appropriate line number displays 8 Press until the display reads 1 Assigned 9 Repeat Steps 7 and 8 for each VMS AA line 10 Press eature Q to exit programming 2 In some countries the procedure code for Group Call Distribution is 205 Check the Programming and Use guide for the communications system 5 35 System Management VMS Hunt Delay PARTNER ACS Release 3 0 or later Use this communications system procedure to specify either immediate or delayed call handling You can change this setting for each line assigned to the Automated Attendants You can also specify a different VMS Hunt Delay setting for Day and Night Service gt NOTE See VMS Hunt Delay on Page 2 of Form A be sure that the appropriate number of rings is specified The default setting is 2 but you can change this value for more immediate call handling If you do not subscribe to Caller ID service from your local telephone company you can specify 0 rings
12. If you notify Lucent Technologies or its Authorized Dealer within one year of the Warranty Date that your system is not in good working order Lucent Technologies will without charge to you repair or replace at its option the system components that are not in good working order Repair or replacement parts may be new or refurbished and will be provided on an exchange basis If Lucent Technologies determines that your system cannot be repaired or replaced Lucent Technologies will remove the system and at your option refund the purchase price of your system or apply the purchase price towards the purchase of another Lucent Technologies system If you purchased your system directly from Lucent Technologies Lucent Technologies will perform warranty repair in accordance with the terms and conditions of the specific type of Lucent Technologies maintenance coverage you selected A written explanation of Lucent Technologies types of maintenance coverage may be obtained from Lucent Technologies by calling 1 800 247 7000 in the continental U S only If you purchased your system from a Lucent Technologies Authorized Dealer contact your reseller for the details of the maintenance plan applicable to your system This Lucent Technologies limited warranty covers damage to the system caused by power surges Unless otherwise expressly agreed to in a written agreement signed by Lucent Technologies Lucent Technologies will not be responsible
13. Update Form 6 for the voice messaging system to show modifications to line ownership then use the updated form while performing the following procedure To change line ownership Access the Programming Main Menu a Press or the programmed Voice Mail Auto Dial button b Press QOQA c Enter the password and press d Press The system plays the system programming options Press for line ownership The system plays To scan line ownership press 2 to assign line ownership press 4 to modify line ownership press 6 To delete line ownership press D The system plays Pleas nter the CO line number followed by If finished press Enter the number of the outside line whose ownership you want to modify followed by The system tells you if the line does not have an owner Otherwise the system plays CO line X owner is mailbox YY Enter the mailbox number of the new line owner followed by If finished press Enter the new mailbox number followed by The system plays CO Line X owner is mailbox YY If the mailbox does not exist you are told so See Creating a Mailbox earlier in this chapter for instructions on creating mailboxes Repeat Steps 4 and 5 to modify the line ownership for any other lines Press to return to the Programming Main Menu or hang up to quit Line Coverage Deleting Line Ownership Update Form 6 for the voic
14. 5 Press to confirm that you want to restore the system Do not hang up until you hear the restore confirmation prompt When the system is restored the system prompts Restore Successful The system restarts automatically and the new configuration takes effect gt NOTE If the system prompts that the restore has failed call the Technical Service Center at 1 800 628 2888 or call your Lucent Technologies Representative or local Authorized Dealer and report the error code that accompanied the failure prompt i Troubleshooting When You Need Help If you have a problem with your system you may be able to solve it yourself by following the appropriate troubleshooting procedures described in this chapter If not you can call for help contact the Lucent Technologies Technical Service Center at 1 800 628 2888 or call your Lucent Technologies Representative or local Authorized Dealer The following sections describe various difficulties that might occur possible causes for the difficulty and procedures you can follow to try to solve the problem 6 1 Troubleshooting Automated Attendant Service Outside Callers Hear Ringing but System Does Not Answer 6 2 Possible Cause 1 This is normal when the PARTNER MAIL VS extensions are busy What to do There are a number of ways to reduce the amount of time a PARTNER MAIL VS extension is busy For example you can recommend that users access the Tuto
15. callers trying to obtain sensi in placing outside or long di number umbers nes are busy the phone company Ask for a ive information or asking for assistance stance calls Ask for a callback increases in internal reques s for assistance in making outside calls particularly international calls or requests for dial tone Make users with Outcalling privileges aware of the potential risks and their responsibilities Never distribute the office telephone directory to anyone outside the company Collect old office telephone directories and shred them Never discuss your telephone system s numbering plan with anyone outside your company Any time a call appears to be suspicious call the Technical Service Center at 1 800 628 2888 in the U S 1 17 Overview System Manager Activities Checklist For each new PARTNER MAIL VS system perform the following activities Complete the communications system and voice messaging system planning forms see Chapter 3 a Install the voice messaging system see Chapter 2 a Change the factory set password for the System Manager s login 99 in the voice messaging system see Chapter 5 a Change the System Administration Programming Language if necessary see Chapter 4 Complete the appropriate communications system and voice messaging system programming see the Initial Programming Checklist in Chapter 4 a Verify system operation
16. General I nformation m Factory defaults are identified by the Y symbol m This Menu Definition applies to both the Day and Night Menu prompts m The Lines Assigned area is reserved for you to specify the lines assigned to this Automated Attendant m The Selector Code is the first digit dialed by the caller in response to menu prompts m In Direct Extension Transfer Selector Codes 1 5 and 7 represent the first digit for a range of extensions see table These Selector Codes let callers dial extension numbers directly m In Selector Code Transfer Selector Codes 1 9 represent a specific extension Group Calling number if available Hunt Group number Centrex number or guest mailbox number that you specify to which the caller is transferred See the range of extensions table Selector Code Transfer lets callers dial a single digit to reach a single extension or group such as the VP of Sales at extension 37 or the order processing operators assigned to Hunt Group 774 Selector N umber R ange C ode Action of N umbers Mailbox 10 Dial 0 T imeout E xtension ____ Specify the extension to which calls are transferred if the caller dials 0 or does not enter a Selector Code If you use the Centrex Transfer option all lines assigned to this Automated Attendant must be Centrex lines If you use the Mailbox Transfer option Selector Codes 1 9 represent a mailbox number that you specify to w
17. 3 Check if desired Also see Form A Item 10 VMS AA and Form B1 PARTNER MAIL PARTNER MAIL VS or PARTNER Voice Messaging column For PARTNER MAIL VS 5 0 or PARTNER MAIL 3 0 specify which of the multiple Automated Attendants should be used For previous releases which support only one Automated Attendant just check the box 4 Check if desired Also see Form A Item 10 ASA and Form C Automatic System Answer Button 111 5 Write group number 1 6 covering this line Also see Form B2 Hunt Group Extensions 505 1 6 6 Check desired line for 206 Also see Form B1 PARTNER MAIL PARTNER MAIL VS or PARTNER Voice Messaging PC CARD column 7 Write extension number of line owner eligible for Line Coverage could include VMS coverage Also write line owner s name in next column Available with PARTNER ACS R2 0 or later only Lucent Technologies Bell Labs Innovations Form A System Configuration Required for PARTNER Advanced Communications System For additional instructions see pages 3 and 4 PAGE 2of3 9 System Settings Write response on line for each item Receptionist answers calls during business hours Write Yes or No No Number of Lines 104 By default 3 lines per PARTNER ACS processor module or 308EC module 2 lines per 206 module and 4 lines per 400 module are assigned to each extension or to pool 880 in Hybrid mode Write number if different from default Transfer Retur
18. Menu Definition and Day Menu Prompt Jas appropriate for Monolingual or Bilingual Mode in Chapter 4 to reprogram the Menu Definition a f outside calls are transferred to the correct extension or group go to Possible Cause 3 Possible Cause 3 The line is too noisy What to do Call your local telephone company Unanswered Transferred Calls Ring Continually Possible Cause In some countries the telephone company does not always provide a far end disconnect signal This causes the line to remain open even after the caller hangs up What to do Assign voice mail coverage to all extensions in the system this is especially important for extension 10 Also make sure voice mail coverage is on at extension 10 at night when no one is around to manually disconnect calls The voice messaging system will disconnect any call to an extension that has voice mail coverage after 15 seconds of silence Call Answer Service Call Answer Service Call Answer Service Takes Too Long to Answer Calls Possible Cause VMS Cover Ring 117 is factory set to ring four times at a subscriber s extension to give the subscriber a chance to answer the call On PARTNER Advanced Communications Systems Release 3 0 or later this feature 321 is factory set at 3 rings but it allows you to specify up to 9 rings on a per line basis What to do Recommend that subscribers program a Do Not Disturb button on their system phones They should turn
19. Other countries 180 264 VAC 50 60 Hz fused at 10 Amps Outlet must not be controlled by an on off switch Grounding to comply with Underwriters Laboratories UL 1459 A An insulated grounding conductor that is not smaller in size and equivalent in insulation material and thickness to the grounded and ungrounded branch circuit supply conductors except that it is green with or without one or more yellow stripes is to be installed as part of the circuit that supplies the product or system B The grounding conductor mentioned in item A is to be connected to ground at the service equipment C The attachment plug receptacles in the vicinity of the product or system are all to be of a grounding type and the grounding conductors serving these receptacles are to be connected to earth ground at the service equipment Safety Requirements U S Meets UL 1459 Issue 2 and Class 2 UL 1012 UL 1310 UL 1585 Canada Meets CSA C22 2 225 Government Approvals and Local Phone Company Information U S FCC Part 68 FCC Registration Number ASS5USA 61630 KF E FCC Part 15 Class A REN outside line jack 0 9A per line jack Jack type RJ11C Loop start lines Canada IC CP01 Issue 7 IC Registration Number Canada 230 3756A IC CS03 Issues 6 amp 7 Load Number 7 Loop start lines FCC Information Federal Communications Commission FCC Interference Information This equipment has been tested and found to co
20. Press 2 Yes Bilingual No Mode Play Primary Play System Language Language Pressf1 2 Press 2 Play Secondary Modify Sys Language Languag Press 2 2 Press 6 Modify Primary Language Press 1 6 Modify Second Language Press 2 6 or AYol re M EELEE Intercom 71717 Enter Login Press QQE Select Programming Main Menu Press Automated Attendant Press 3 Day Menu Press 1 Play Primary Day Prompt Press Definition amp Annc Press 2 2 Modify Menu Definition and or Bilingual No Mode Play Day Prompt Press 2 1 Play Menu Definition amp Annc Press 2 2 1 Modify Menu Definition and or Day Prompt Press 6 Primary Day Promp Press 6 Yes Play Primary Night Prompt Press 1 Modify Primary Night Prompt Press 6 1 Modify Secon Night Prom Press 6 2 Automated Attendant Lines Press 6 Yes Review Assigned Lines Press 1 Delete Assigned Lines Press 3 Bilingual Assigned No Mode Play Night Prompt Press 2 7 Modify Night Prompt Press 6 Lines No Add Lines Press 2 Spec
21. 6 to program Line Ownership TO SCAN LINE OWNERSHIP PRESS 2 to scan ENTER the line number and or PRESS to scan the first line number that has an owner LISTEN to the line owner s name and mailbox number PRESS to scan the next line TO ASSIGN LINE OWNERSHIP PRESS 3 to assign ENTER the line number and ENTER the mailbox number and TO MODIFY LINE OWNERSHIP PRESS 6 to modify ENTER the line number and ENTER the new owner s mailbox number and TO DELETE LINE OWNERSHIP PRESS to delete ENTER the line number and PRESS 9 to confirm PARTNER MAIL VS System Programming Reference To Program the Communications System for PARTNER MAIL VS Place the Programming Overlay on the dial pad of the system display phone at extension 10 TO START SYSTEM PROGRAMMING PRESS o 0 PRESS System Program PRESS System Program ENTER System Password if required TO END SYSTEM PROGRAMMING PRESS HUNT GROUP EXTENSIONS DIAL 505 PRESS for the VMS Hunt Group DIAL the extension number DIAL 1 Assigned to group 2 Not assigned to group PRESS to program the next extension TRANSFER RETURN EXTENSION DIAL 306t DIAL the extension number DIAL 10 the receptionist s extension PRESS to program the next extension y Factory Setting Button with Lights Required TO USE A SPECIFIC PROCEDURE DIAL and three digit procedure code Example for Hunt Group Extensions TO CYCL
22. Access the Programming Main Menu a Press intercom 7 7 Z or the programmed Voice Mail Auto Dial button b Press QOQA c Enter the password and press d Press The system plays the system programming options 5 61 System Management Press for line ownership The system plays To scan line ownership press 2 to assign line ownership press 4 to modify line ownership press 6 To delete line ownership press D Press 2 The system plays Pleas nter the CO line number followed by or press for the next line owner Enter a specific outside line number followed by or press for the first outside line number that has been assigned an owner The system responds as follows lf you entered a line number followed by the system tells you whether or not an owner is assigned lf you entered the system tells you the mailbox number of the owner of the first outside line that has an owner Press to hear the mailbox number for the next outside line that has an owner Press to return to the Programming Main Menu or hang up to quit Assigning Line Ownership 5 62 Update Form 6 for the voice messaging system to show the line number that requires coverage and the line owner s extension number then use the updated form while performing the following procedure Make sure you also use ll Distribution 206 later in this section to assign coverage to lines
23. Contact Closure Group 612 Answering Machine Call Waiting 316 External Hotline 31 1 4 NNN 34 12 Button Display 2 PARTNER MAIL PARTNER MAIL VS Doorphone 1 604 8 Alert Extensions 606 Doorphone 2 605 8 Alert Extensions 606 for Doorphone 2 AA Extension 607 9 12 Button 2 Cordless Wireless Standard 3 Alert Extension for Hotline PassageWay for Doorphone 1 Extra Alert Vera Gonzalez Jose Ramirez J t uan SA l I rogrammer rogrammer 3 rogrammer 4 18 Felipe CS Rep 19 Rosa Bookkeeper zS S D2 sjala BR o r o gt o N NN 22 Waiting Room i Y i 23 Waiting Room V 24 25 N 29 i IMPORTANT A system display phone is required for programming at extension 10 or 11 Extension 10 typically is the receptionist s extension Extension 11 is recommended as a second programming extension typically the System Manager s extension WARNING Customers should keep extension 10 11 or the first two extensions of any 308EC or 206 module available for power failure use 1 If checked see Form B1 Page 3 of 4 6 Also write Transfer Return Ext No 306 in the last column on this form usually extension 10 2 Ifthere is a mix of PARTNER model and MLS model phones write P for PAR
24. D2 ojoj Najan gt N o Po N 20 21 22 VMS vA 23 VMS M DO DY POT RO PY P IMPORTANT A system display phone is required for programming at extension 10 or 11 Extension 10 typically is the receptionist s extension Extension 11 is recommended as a second programming extension typically the System Manager s extension WARNING Customers should keep extension 10 11 or the first two extensions of any 308EC or 206 module available for power failure use 1 If checked see Form B1 Page 3 of 4 2 Ifthere is a mix of PARTNER model and MLS model phones write P for PARTNER and M for MLS 3 Write T for touch tone or R for rotary 4 Must be standard phone If immediate dialing is required use a dedicated line Do not assign restrictions that prevent dialing the outside number Forced Account Code Entry 307 or groups Also see Form D External Hotline 311 5 Standard phone is recommended Write extension number of corresponding alert extension or 70 for loudspeaker paging system in next column 6 Also write Transfer Return Ext No 306 in the last column on this form usually extension 10 Also see Form B2 Identify Group Assignments VMS Only 7 To prevent other extensions from interrupting calls assign Automatic Extension Privacy 304 on Form B2 outside lines see Li
25. De lo contrario espere y deje un mensaje con la operadora gt NOTE When the system is installed initially Automated Attendant Service has this factory set Day Menu Prompt Hello welcome to PARTNER MAIL VS Pleas nter th extension number of the person you wish to reach or press 0 to reach the receptionist Note that if a caller chooses to dial 0 to reach an operator or if the caller fails to make any selection the call can be routed automatically to extension 10 default If you wish you may program a Selector Code to transfer a caller directly to another specified mailbox The Selector Code is the first digit dialed by the caller in response to the menu prompts A corresponding Selector Code Action can be assigned to each of the Selector Codes allowing callers to transfer to another extension or group a preprogrammed mailbox or Centrex number or to an Announcement Overview In addition Automated Attendant Service has this factory set Night Menu Prompt Good Evening Welcome to PARTNER MAIL VS Please enter the extension number of the person you wish to reach or press 9 to leave a message with the receptionist Automated Attendant Service is useful for many businesses such as car dealerships insurance agencies and stores For example a car dealership can use Automated Attendant Service to allow its customers to reach the customer service department directly even if that department
26. Enter the password and press d Press The system plays the system programming options Press 3 for Automated Attendant The system prompts you to specify the Automated Attendant Enter the Automated Attendant number from 1 to 4 Press for line assignment Press 2 to add lines Enter the line number and press Repeat this step until you have assigned all appropriate line numbers to this Automated Attendant When you are assigning lines at Automated Attendant 2 3 or 4 the system indicates that the line is assigned to Automated Attendant 1 The system prompts Do you want to change the line assignment press 9 to confirm or 6 to cancel Voice Messaging System Programming 7 Press to confirm that you want to modify the line assignment from its default setting at Automated Attendant 1 The system plays the line number and its reassignment to the Automated Attendant you specified in Step 3 8 Press to return to the Programming Main Menu 9 Repeat Steps 2 through 8 for each additional Automated Attendant or continue with Menu Definition Day Menu Prompt and Announcements Menu Definition Day Menu Prompt and Announcements Refer to Form 3 to define the Automated Attendant Service menu for Automated Attendant 1 to Form 4 and Form 4A for systems operating in Bilingual Mode to record the Day Menu Prompt and to Form 3A and Form 3B for systems operating in Bilingual Mode to record the
27. Press to confirm your selection To modify the other language press and repeat Steps 5 through 8 Otherwise skip this step Press to return to the Programming Main Menu Continue with the section Automated Attendant Service 4 9 Initial Programming Automated Attendant Service Before you begin locate the following voice messaging system forms Forms 1 2 3 3A 4 and 5 make a copy for each Automated Attendant If the system is set for Bilingual Mode also locate Forms 3B 4A and 5A If Automated Attendant Service is not to be used skip to Voice Mail Service Assigning Lines 4 10 When the voice messaging system is first installed all lines are assigned to Automated Attendant 1 You must identify the lines that will be assigned to other Automated Attendants as specified on Form 3 Each line can be assigned to one Automated Attendant only If you are using only one Automated Attendant the system automatically assigns them to Automated Attendant 1 therefore you may skip the following procedure gt NOTE If you plan to specify a Centrex number for Centrex Transfer in the Automated Attendant Menu Definition all lines assigned to that Automated Attendant must be Centrex lines OOM 205 Oo If necessary access the Programming Main Menu If you are already at the Programming Main Menu skip to Step 2 a Press or the programmed Voice Mail Auto Dial button b Press Q c
28. Press Q to review assigned lines The system plays the lines assigned to this Automated Attendant 6 Press k Z to return to the Programming Main Menu 7 Repeat Steps 2 through 5 for each additional Automated Attendant or continue with Modifying Assigned Lines or Deleting Assigned Lines 5 23 System Management Modifying Assigned Lines 5 24 To modify the lines assigned to a specific Automated Attendant 1 If necessary access the Programming Main Menu If you are already at the Programming Main Menu skip to Step 2 a Press or the programmed Voice Mail Auto Dial button b Press QQA c Enter the password and press d Press The system plays the system programming options Press for Automated Attendant The system prompts you to specify the Automated Attendant Enter the Automated Attendant number from 1 to 4 Press for line assignment The system plays To review line assignments press 1 To adda line press 2 To delete a line press 3 If finished press Press to modify a line assignment The system prompts Enter line number followed by To quit press Enter the line number you want to modify If you are using multiple Automated Attendants and the line is already assigned the system indicates that the line is assigned to another Automated Attendant The system prompts Do you want to change the line assignment p
29. The system will have four outside lines and 12 extensions Jose Juan and Vera will have PARTNER 34D phones the other employees will have PARTNER 18D phones In addition two standard phones will be installed in the waiting room so customers can make local calls Jose prefers that Vera help with various office tasks so all lines will ring delayed at extension 10 and the PARTNER MAIL VS system will answer them Vera will act as backup she will answer calls from customers who press 0 or stay on the line for assistance as well as transfer returned calls Also Vera will be responsible for checking the messages in the mailbox at extension 10 and forwarding them to the appropriate people Calls will go to the Automated Attendant Service of the PARTNER MAIL VS system during the day and at night The majority of Software Mexico s callers have questions about their software or inquiries about bills Therefore callers who receive Automated Attendant Service and want to speak to the customer service representative or the bookkeeper can do so easily by pressing a single digit as explained in the Automated Attendant Service prompt Since the majority of Software Mexico s customers speak Spanish the system should answer outside calls and play messages and prompts in Spanish Callers will have the option of listening to the prompts and messages in English Each employee will have a mailbox and Automatic VMS Cover assigned to his or her ex
30. To associate an outside line with a specific subscriber s mailbox Access the Programming Main Menu a Press or the programmed Voice Mail Auto Dial button b Press Q c Enter the password and press d Press The system plays the system programming options Press for line ownership The system plays To scan line ownership press 2 to assign line ownership press 4 to modify line ownership press 6 To delete line ownership press D Line Coverage Press 4 The system plays Pleas nter the CO line number followed by If finished press Enter the number of the outside line that you want to associate with a specific subscriber s mailbox followed by If the line already has an owner the system announces the mailbox number of that owner Otherwise the system plays CO line X has no owner Enter the mailbox number of the new line owner followed by If finished press Enter the mailbox number followed by The system plays CO Line X owner is mailbox YY The system tells you if the mailbox does not exist See Creating al Maibox ailbox jearlier in this chapter for instructions on creating mailboxes Repeat Steps 4 and 5 until you assign line ownership for all of the appropriate lines Press to return to the Programming Main Menu or hang up to quit 5 63 System Management Modifying Line Ownership 5 64 Press
31. Voice Mailbox Transfer allows the subscriber to transfer callers directly to other subscribers voice mailboxes Voice Mail Auto Dial allows the subscriber to access the voice messaging system for message retrieval with the touch of a button Station Lock allows subscribers to secure their telephone when they leave their desk for an extended period of time Record a Call allows the subscriber to record a call in progress You must also assign the subscriber permission to use this feature See Administering Record a Call for a Mailbox earlier in this chapter Call Screening allows subscribers to listen while a caller is leaving a message in their mailbox The procedures in this section use Centralized Telephone Programming VMS Cover F15 To give a subscriber the ability to turn voice mail coverage on and off you can program a VMS Cover button on the subscriber s system phone To program a VMS Cover button Ti Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program Central Tel Program 2 Enter the number of the extension to be programmed 3 Press a programmable button with lights 4 5 Press Caud QO Program another button for this extension or press eature 0 to exit programming mode Label the button at the user s extension ve In some countries the feature code for VMS Cover is Check the Programming and Use guide for the communications system 5 68 Telephone Butt
32. if the system is configured for Bilingual Mode Announcements are often used to answer frequently asked questions such as business hours and location emergency service special offers etc Each Announcement can be up to four minutes in length Callers can choose to listen to these Announcements so your staff has more time to answer other calls and perform other tasks or each Automated Attendant you can customize the menu prompt for use uring normal business hours called the Day Menu Prompt and for use after ormal business hours called the Night Menu Prompt For example you can set p Automated Attendant Service so that callers hear the following prompt during he day if the system is set for Monolingual Mode and the System Language is U S English SD OT Thank you for calling the ANY Travel Agency We re open Monday through Saturday from 9 to 5 If you know the extension you want dial it now For getaway package information press 3 For airline or hotel reservations press 4 For other assistance press 0 or remain on the line To replay this message press 4 Note that callers who want general information regarding the current discount travel package or agency location can choose to listen to an Announcement For example when callers press they hear the following Announcement Are you tired of battling the ice snow and after Christmas sale crowds Take advantage of our January sunny escape package 3 d
33. in this column indicates that Record A Call privileges are assigned to Sally F Message Length The storage space in minutes in this column indicates that the mailbox size has been increased for Sally who has Record A Call privileges G Mailbox Size The message length in minutes in this column indicates that the mailbox size has been increased for Sally VMS Form 3 for Automated Attendant 1 E 6 Lines assigned The lines assigned to Automated Attendant 1 are indicated in this area Description In this column Direct Extension Transfer for Selector Code 1 indicates that when callers get the Automated Attendant Service they can transfer to any extension 10 to 19 by entering the extension number Shop in the Description column and 771 in the Number Range of Numbers column for Selector Code 4 indicate that when callers get the Automated Attendant Service they can press 4 to transfer to Hunt Group 1 which is defined on CS Form B2 as extensions 16 and 17 in the shop Case Study 1 a Announcement in the Description column 3 in the Selector Code Action column and the numbers 1 and 2 in the Number Range of Numbers column indicate that when callers get the Automated Attendant Service they can choose to hear one of two Announcements a Transfer to Sally s mailbox in the Description column for Selector Code 9 indicates when callers get the Automated Attendant Service they can p
34. or force the module If it does not insert easily remove the module clear any obstruction and reinsert it Installing the PARTNER MAIL VS Module 3 Refer to Figure 2 1 or to the figures in Appendix D which illustrate the most common configurations and dial plans to determine the dial plan for your system Then record the extensions associated with the PARTNER MAIL VS module on Form B1 of the System Planner for the communications system Note that the communications system recognizes the voice messaging system module as a 6 extension module such as a 200 206 or 400 module Therefore Figure 2 1 depicts the voice messaging system module as a shaded 6 extension module which is how it appears to the communications system even though the voice messaging system module has no physical line jacks 5 Slot Carrier ACS Processor Module 308 308 p 308 i I j Extension Jacks Line Jacks a GRE ae eee If PARTNER MAIL VS 5 2 port Is Installed In Slot Systems Then Assign These _ 46 47 Exts To Hunt Group 7 If PARTNER MAIL VS 4 port Is Installed In Slot 5 Systems Then Assign These 44 45 Exts To Hunt Group 7 46 47 Figure 2 1 Voice Messaging System Extensions for PARTNER Advanced Communications System Release
35. otherwise skip to the next section gt NOTE If the PARTNER MAIL VS extensions were restricted to Inside Only using Outgoing Call Restriction 401 Outcalling will not work unless an Allowed Phone Number List is created and assigned Outcalls can be made only to the numbers included in the list To create a list of Allowed Phone Numbers 1 Press AAOM At the List Number prompt enter the list number 1 4 At the Entry prompt select a list entry 01 10 At the Data prompt enter the first number To save the number in memory you must press Enter OO oe GW At this point To change the number you just entered press and repeat Steps 4 and 5 To delete the number you just entered press Remove To enter other numbers in this list press and repeat Steps 4 and 5 Assigning the Allowed Phone Number List The Allowed Phone Number List that was created for Outcalling should be assigned to all voice messaging system extensions To assign the Allowed Phone Number List to the extensions 1 Press MMOS Enter the number of the extension to be programmed Enter the list number 1 4 To assign the list press until the display reads 1 Assigned a A W N To program another extension press Next Procedure Prev Procedure and repeat from Step 2 4 27 Initial Programming Call Answer Service Before you begin locate Forms A and B2 of the System Planner for the communicatio
36. should ring at the extension before they are sent to the subscriber s mailbox Note that the VMS Cover Rings can be specified for each station on a PARTNER ACS Release 3 0 or later Update Form A Page 2 of the System Planner for the communications system before you begin To change the number of times calls ring before they are sent to the voice messaging system 1 Press eature 0 0 System Program System Program Enter the System Password if required Press HOOO Enter the number of the first extension for which VMS Cover Rings is to be specified Press until the appropriate value displays 6 To program another extension press Next item or Prev item until the extension number shows on the display Then repeat Step 3 7 Press Feature O to exit programming mode 8 Continue with the next section Teleohone Button Programming gt O DN gi VMS Cover Rings All Other PARTNER Systems Check Form A Page 2 to see if VMS Cover Rings 11 7 is different from the factory setting of 3 If it is follow the procedure below beginning with Step 1 to specify the VMS Cover Rings for the system If not skip to Step 3 of the procedure below To change the number of times calls ring before they are sent to the voice messaging system as indicated on Form A Page 2 VMS Cover Rings 1 Press eature 0 0 System Program System Program Enter the System Password if require
37. 2 5S 5 8 la Se 2e e 8 9 Se gt 5 23 22 55 55 8 5 8 J S e 2 8Fle eels sls s see hie SSIS E SE aoal oalOaglelsu la zl sj g l zsz S S 385 No Restriction Sele 2 e2 25 8 5 52 e oO Oo a oe e an R 2 gt 3 58 82 S 3 sa 3 S S 55 62 62 z2 2 5 8525 lje K LISEl Salool l Selsclcel al al BQ mF x A WS Jee e OLS 9 20 JOJO a immediate sayeq NO Ring Lines Pools Outgoing Incoming No Access NRV 1 4 1 4 1 4 1 411 617 ay EV NAY Ar NAY A NAY NAY P 204 3 NAY V lines yea jy pools Not Assigned only only NAY 10 4 K ALL 11 F4 i 12 s 4 3 Z l 14 Z 4 5 vA l 4 6 1 17 I 18 4 9 l 20 21 l 22 23 A 24 l 25 l 26 27 I 28 29 l 30 WARNING Do not connect to extension 10 11 or the first two extensions of any 206 or 308EC module Assignments 1 Write S for Spanish or F for French 7 Write list number 1 4 Also see Form D Disallowed Phone Number Lists 404 vY Default 2 In Hybrid mode only write K for Key extension Extension 10 always operates as a Key extension 8 Write list number 1 4 Also see Form D Allowed Phone Number Lists 407 A Assigned or Active 3 Specify number of rings 1 9 desired before an incoming call is sent to the covering extension 9 Write group number 1 4 E English The default setting is 2 rings For PARTNER ACS Release 3 0 or later this can be specified on an 10 Write group number 1 4 If a loudspeaker is connecte
38. 315 l lt es elo laa g eli 2 Line Ringing options Pool Access Restriction 315 CRJE e EDA a aclt los s 2 53 S s le s 35 3 38 25 2 32 8 65 65 35 RJS sjoRg e ssSjlo lola 2 S S D 2 zar ESISE DEf aoa DaIOQIE Su ila z SES BZlERlS S F 389 No Restriction Sslae2 s2l25l ES5leni5 2e iE n x 5 lees S s3ls s8 sa g S 2 5S GJ CEES CEMRE os Q Q gt mo oO x i wi jolea le rojo zo Sol S5 S S 2 immediate Delayed NO Ring Lines Pools Outgoing Incoming No Access NRY bee Vee Re Tay Ev nav Av NAv Jav Nav NAW Pul av av Nav wines 9Y pools Not Assigned only only is NAY 10 y K ALL l T Z I 12 7 13 S l i4 Z 15 S l 16 A 17 FA l 18 l 19 FA l 20 21 l 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 l al v iv WARNING Do not connect to extension 10 11 or the first two extensions of any 206 or 308EC module Assignments 1 Write S for Spanish or F for French 7 Write list number 1 4 Also see Form D Disallowed Phone Number Lists 404 Y Default 2 In Hybrid mode only write K for Key extension Extension 10 always operates as a Key extension 8 Write list number 1 4 Also see Form D Allowed Phone Number Lists 407 A Assigned or Active 3 Specify number of rings 1 9 desired before an incoming call is sent to the covering extension 9 Write group number 1 4 E English The default setti
39. 321 Transfer Return Exten sion 306 Complete CS Form B2 B1 3 3 Understanding Programming Using System Programming System Programming requires a system display phone at extension 10 or 11 if available with a programming overlay placed over the phone s dialpad System Programming procedures are identified by and a 3 digit code for example the procedure code for System Date is 101 You can program the system in one of two ways Direct Method You access a programming procedure directly by dialing the code for that procedure This method works best when you are using only a few procedures during the programming session and you know the codes For example press AQQ to change the system date Cycle Method You cycle through a sequence of procedures in numerical order by pressing Next Procedure or Prev Procedure You should use this method when programming the communications system for the first time or when you are changing a series of related settings However procedures 399 609 and 728 are skipped when you cycle through procedures gt NOTE You can talk on the telephone while you program This is useful if you need to call for support while programming However you must place the call before you enter programming mode and you must use the handset not the speakerphone to talk The Programming Overlays 3 4 During System Programming the normal functions of several bu
40. Authorized Dealer and report the error code that accompanied the failure prompt 5 77 System Management Performing a System Restore 5 78 You can restore the settings that is programming and recorded prompts that you have saved to a PC Card after system backup The PARTNER MAIL VS system must be idle when you perform a restore operation Any calls being handled by PARTNER MAIL VS will be disconnected when the restore procedure begins PARTNER MAIL VS will not answer calls while the system restore is being performed For most systems the system restore can be performed in three minutes or less If your voice messaging system uses multiple Automated Attendants with all Announcements recorded at up to four minutes the system restore can take approximately 20 minutes to complete To restore the system 1 Be sure the PC Card is installed see the area labeled Slot for PC Card in 2 If necessary access the Programming Main Menu If you are already at the Programming Main Menu skip to Step 3 a Press or the programmed Voice Mail Auto Dial button b Press Q9 Q c Enter the password and press d Press The system plays the system programming options 3 Press 8 for Reports and Backup Restore 4 Press Q to restore the system The system plays the backup date saved in the PC Card and prompts Warning This may erase current settings Do you want to continue Press 9 to confirm or 6 to cancel
41. Backup later in this chapter and remove the PC Card see Chapter 2 Initial Programming You can either follow the step by step instructions or use the Programming Quick Reference at the end of this manual as a quick guide If you use the step by step instructions note that Step 1 of each procedure for the voice messaging system is logging in However if you are already logged in you can skip Step 1 Finally some features and procedures in this chapter may not be ava ilable on your communications system If you are not sure check the Programming and Use guide for that system Voice Mail System Configurations The PARTNER Mail VS supports the following configurations m 2 voice channels ports 48 mailboxes a 4 ports 48 mailboxes Figure 2 1 in Chapter 2 and the figures in Appendix D show the pos extension numbers for the most common configurations Upgrading Your Voice Mail System from a 2 Port to a 4 Port Configuration 4 2 If you are upgrading your voice mail system to a 4 port configuration sible when you return power to the system the previously existing programming including existing mailbox assignment information personal greetings and passwords is saved You do not need to reprogram the system however you should add two extensions to the VMS Hunt Group Extension Hunt Group 7 These additional extensions correspond to the middle two extensions on the module For example if you a
42. C 1 Press Feature 0 System Program System Program Central Tel Program Enter the number of the extension to be programmed Press a programmable button with lights Press Fear QG At this point do one of the following ao k oO DN Go to Step 3 of the next procedure to program another button for this extension Press and go to Step 2 of any button programming procedure in this section to program a button for a different extension Press eature to exit 4 31 Initial Programming Do Not Disturb F01 Used in conjunction with either automatic VMS cover or manual VMS cover this button lets a subscriber send callers immediately to his or her mailbox instead of ringing the extension first To program a Do Not Disturb DND button as specified on Form C 1 Press Feature 0 System Program System Program Central Tel Program 2 Enter the number of the extension to be programmed 3 Press a programmable button with lights 4 Press Fearg QG 5 At this point do one of the following Go to Step 3 of the next procedure to program another button for this extension Press and go to Step 2 of any button programming procedure in this section to program a button for a different extension Press eature to exit Voice Mailbox Transfer F14 This button lets any system user transfer calls directly to a subscriber s mailbox includin
43. Center at 1 800 628 2888 or call your Lucent Technologies Representative or local Authorized Dealer for instructions on how to reset the Password To change the Password for login 99 1 Press or the programmed Voice Mail Auto Dial button 2 Press DOM 3 Enter the existing password for example 1234 and press 4 Press 6 to change the password The prompt asks you to enter your new password 5 Enter up to four digits for the new password and press The prompt asks you to re enter your new password 6 Enter your new password again followed by The new password is now active 7 Hang up to quit General Information Changing the System Administration Prompt Language The System Administration Prompt Language is the language in which programming prompts are played The default setting is the System Language form systems operating in Monolingual Mode or the Primary Language for systems operating in Bilingual Mode You have the option to specify another language for the programming prompts Even if the System or Primary Language changes the language that you specify for the System Administration Prompt Language will remain the same To change the default System Administration Prompt Language 1 Press or the programmed Voice Mail Auto Dial button Press DO Enter the existing password for example 1234 and press Press to change the System Administration Prompt Language afr O Se
44. Check Form C for extension 10 If a Night Service button is specified follow the procedure below To program Night Service on a button with lights at extension 10 as specified on Form C 1 Press HOG 2 At this point do one of the following If you want to assign Night Service to the first available button on the system phone press until the display reads Night Service 1 Assigned Ext10 Go to Step 3 lf you want to assign Night Service to a specific button press The display reads Night Service 3 Select Button Press the desired programmable button with lights to assign Night Service to that button 3 Label the Night Service button at extension 10 4 Continue with the next section Music On Hold 5 Select button option 3 is not available on all systems Check the Programming and Use guide for the communications system 4 25 Initial Programming Music On Hold If desired program Music On Hold See the Programming and Use guide for the communications system for instructions Continue with the next section Disallowed Phone Numbers Disallowed Phone Numbers 4 26 If Outcalling is permitted a Disallowed Phone Number List 404 can be created to restrict calls Creating a Disallowed Phone Number List Check communications system Planning Form D to see if a Disallowed Phone Number List is needed for Outcalling If so continue with the procedures in this section othe
45. Direct Extension Dial 113 6 DXD Night Service 503 NightSvc Outgoing Call Restriction 114 1 OCR 04 DEL Wake Up Service 115 Wake Call Screening F 25 7 SCREEN luo OL 1X9 Out In or No from Form B2 t Available with ACS R2 0 or later only a O L ri L ail a O L L L O O O 0O o VMS 7 0 O pnp Ano Dek MBa E O O O 0O IMM IMM IMM IMM zgr E ma Oo H Intercom g Intercom g Ext gt IN Caller ID Call Log F 23 Calls Caller ID Inspect F 17 ID Inspect PARTNER 18D only In Hybrid mode only if pool 880 is assigned these two buttons are associated with this pool ACS R2 0 or later only Specify Automatic Line Selection Identify extensions programmed as shown 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 Caller ID Name Display F 16 ID Name Do Not Disturb F 01 DND Privacy F 07 Priv Record a Call F 24 7 RAC VMS Cover F 15 VMSCover Voice Interrupt on Busy Talk Back F 18 VIOB Account Code Entry F 12 2 ACE Background Music F 19 2 Music Call Coverage F 20 XX XX 2 4 6 Cover XX XX Call Forwarding Call Follow Me F 11 XX XX 24 CF XXXX Call Park XX 3 Park
46. H og E O Last Number Redial F 05 LNR or later only Loudspeaker Paging I 70 Loudspk 7 Ayala e with ACS R3 0 Intercom Intercom Manual Signaling F 13 XX or F 13 XX 2 MS XX O H Ext Message Light Off F 10 XX 5 MsgOff XX g O01 Message Light On F 09 XX 5 MsgOn XX Recall F 03 Recall Save Number Redial F 04 SNR Simultaneous Paging I 70 SPage Station Lock F 21 2 Lock In Hybrid mode only if pool 880 is assigned these two buttons are associated with this pool ACS R2 0 or later only F Feature button as De Touch Tone Enable F 08 TEN amp ae Specify Automatic Line Selection Zl Voice Mail Messages I 777 VMMsgs 777 I reft Intercom Identify extensions programmed as shown 11 12 V Voice Mailbox Transfer F 14 VMBox XX Extension Lucent Technologies Bell Labs Innovations Make as many copies as you need Use template and or checklist For additional instructions see pages 9 through 14 Template Instructions e If desired write in line number pool access code dial code feature or auto dial number e If desired write in Line Ringing Imm Del or No from Form B2 e If desired write in Line Access Restriction or Pool Access Restrictiont Form C3 PARTNER 18 18D Phone PAGE 3 of 8 Check Desired Button Features write in extension or group number SAMPLE Automatic System Answer 111 6 ASA
47. H unt Schedule is set to N ight Only or Always Ee General I nformation m The Night Menu Prompt plays to callers when the VMS Hunt If Selector Code 9 is left as the default the prompt should Schedule is set to Always or Night Only and Night Service is on instruct callers to press 9 to leave a message with the The Night Menu Prompt and the Day Menu Prompt use the same receptionist Menu Definition m The Night Menu Prompt should contain a welcome and a list of Completing this F orm menu options Write the message that you want callers to hear when they call after m The welcome should introduce the company For example normal business hours including instructions to the caller for You have reached the Any Travel Agency Our hours are 9 AM to selecting menu options 5 PM Monday through Friday 3 y Suggested options include m f the system is set for Bilingual Mode let callers know they can switch the language they hear while on the call For example m Dial 9 or remain on the line to leave a message Para espa ol marque 1 m To hear this menu again dial 4 m The menu options should contain instructions that correspond to the Menu Definition set up on Form 3 Recording the N ight M enu Prompt If callers can dial extension numbers Direct Extension m To record the Night Menu Prompt dial 3 from the Programming Transfer the prompt should instruct callers to dial the extension numbe
48. Hold jack on the processor module isactive Write No if the jack is deactivated Automatic Daylight Standard Time 126 Release 3 0 or later By default the system automatically calculates Daylight Savings Time Write No to turn off this feature 10 Line Coverage Complete items based on Line Coverage selection on Form A Item 8 DXD PARTNER ACS Release 2 0 or later only If DXD is checked specify the following Direct Extension Dial Delay 112 By default a call rings 2 times before it is answered by the system Write number 0 9 if different from default Direct Extension Dial Record Playback I 892 message of up to 20 seconds that caller hears when call is answered with the Direct Extension Dial feature Write message below and record from extension 10 or 11 ASA VMS AA PARTNER ACS Release 3 0 or later only If VMS AA is checked you can specify a different Hunt Schedule and Hunt Delay for each line VMS AA Hunt Schedule 507 The Hunt Schedule specifies when your VMS answers your calls Your three options are Always Night Only or Day Only The default is Always With the default option VMS will always answer your calls after the number of rings established in VMS Hunt Delay On Form A Addendum write D if Day Only is desired or N if Night Only is desired VMS AA Hunt Delay 506 The Hunt Delay specifies how many rings are allowed before your VMS answers your incoming ca
49. Mailbox extension number Maximum message length and mailbox size parameter Mailbox language parameter Outcalling permission Record a Call message length Personal Operator Outcalling information including numbers schedule cycles and interval Personal Group Lists 4 38 Generating Configuration Reports Setting Up HyperTerminal To generate the report you will use the HyperTerminal application which is provided with Windows 95 Windows NT 4 0 or later and Windows 98 To set up HyperTerminal 1 From the Start menu choose Programs gt Accessories gt Hyperlerminal The HyperTerminal window appears Click on HyperTerminal The Connect Description dialog box appears l the Name box type Direct 2400 and then choose the OK button The Phone Number dialog box appears In the Connect using box choose the COM port on your PC that is connected to the PMVS serial port for example if you are using COM1 choose Direct to Com1 Choose the OK button The COM Properties dialog box appears In the Bits per second box choose 2400 n the Data bits box choose 8 n the Parity box choose None n the Stop bits box choose 1 In the Flow control box choose Xon Xoff Choose the OK button to close the COM Properties dialog box From the File menu choose Exit to close HyperTerminal A confirm
50. Messages I 777 VMMsgs 777 V Voice Mailbox Transfer F 14 VMBox paiinbey qaq 1 Requires Auto Dial button for each extension 2 Button with lights is recommended but not required 3 Extension number can be programmed as Auto Dial button 4 You can program the origination extension only or both the origination and destination extension 5 You can program the extension number 6 Available with ACS R2 0 or later only 7 Available with ACS R3 0 or later F Feature button G Group I Left Intercom button XX Extension Form C7 MLS 12 12D Phone Check Desired Button Features write in extension or group number Lucent Technologies Bell Labs Innovations Make as many copies as you need Use template and or checklist Automatic System Answer 111 ASA m For additional instructions see pages 9 through 14 Direct Extension Dial 113 DXD Night Service 503 NightSvc 3 SAMPLE Outgoing Call Restriction 114 1 OCR Q Template Instructions Wake Up Service 115 Wake e If desired write in line number pool access codet dial code feature or auto dial number e If desired write in Line Ringing Imm Del or No from Form B2 e If desired write in Line Access Restriction or Pool Access Restrictiont Caller ID Inspect F 17 ID Inspect Out Inor Ne ifrom Form Ba Caller ID Name Display F 16 ID Name t Available with AC
51. O ee Call Screening button Caller ID service 4 23 Centrex service Centrex Transfer Communications system 1 1 Communications system programming dial plan for mailboxes initialsetupJ4 1 o ooo methods of overview planning forms 3 2 Configuration Report 4 38 5 73 Delayed call handling H 9 CS Dial O Timeout Extension 4 12 5 30___ Dial 0 Timeout Extension Transfer 5 21 dial plan 5 42 14 13 5 20 5 31 _ 4 260 o y Direct Extension Transfer Disallowed Phone Numbers 4 26 DoNotDisturb 1 12 0 Do Not Disturb DND button Do Not Disturb button 5 69 __ _ A E error code 4 42 5 77 l6 15___ y O Extension coverage automatic 1 12 ooo immediate 1 12 manual 1 12 0 overview 1 12 Extension Line Coverage 5 67 SEs F FCC information B1 D G Group Call Distribution overview 1 8 group lists xv Guest Mailboxes 15 42 5 58 5 69 Cd Guest Mailboxes overview 1 14 H Helpline 6 1 o o oS HyperTerminal application 4 39 5 74 _ IN 1 Index I Immediate call handiing i 9 Installation guidelines 2 4 o o o oS O voice messaging system module 2 2 Cid L Language Mode line assignment Line Coverage 4 29 5 60 __ _ o 4 21 S 5 61 assigning changing checking deleting M mailb
52. Paging I 70 Loudspk 7 Available with ACS R3 0 Manual Signaling F 13 XX or F 13 XX 2 MS XX or later Message Light Off F 10 XX 5 MsgOff XX In Hybrid mode only if pool 880 is assigned these two buttons are associated with this pool Message Light On F 09 XX 5 MsgOn XX ACS R2 0 or later only Recall F 03 Recall Save Number Redial F 04 SNR Simultaneous Paging I 70 SPage Specify Automatic Line Selection Station Lock F 21 2 Lock F Feature button Identify extensions programmed as shown 16 17 Touch Tone Enable F 08 TT EN 5 eae Voice Mail Messages 777 VMMsgs 777 7 Bein SRO VMBox Voice Mailbox Transfer F 14 XX Extension Form 1 L anguage Q L anguage M ode Monolingual O Bilingual MU S English Y O Latin American Spanish O C anadian French M onolingual M ode System L anguage 7 U S English O Latin American Spanish LC anadian French O U S English O Latin American Spanish O Canadian French Bilingual M ode Primary L anguage ilingual Mode Secondary L anguage General I nformation m Factory defaults are identified by the Y symbol m Ifthe system is set for Bilingual Mode make sure you record the Automated Attendant Day Menu Prompts and Night Menu Prompts and Announcements if any in both the Primary and Secondary Languages Also subscribers can record two personal greetings one in the Primary Language and ano
53. Press amp The system plays Mailbox XX has YY new messages and ZZ old messages Do you want to delete Press 9 to confirm or 6 to cancel Press to confirm mailbox deletion The system plays Deleted 6 Press to return to the Programming Main Menu or hang up to quit Creating a Mailbox 5 46 Update Form 2 for the voice messaging system to show mailboxes to be created then use the updated form while performing the following procedure The default message length will be 4 minutes and the default mailbox size will be 20 minutes for these mailboxes Review the following notes before you create a mailbox Mailboxes can be created for extensions 11 through 33 for the PARTNER Plus 11 through 49 for PARTNER Endeavor and Advanced Communications System 3 0 11 through 41 for PARTNER Advanced Communications System 1 0 or 1 1 and 11 through 57 for the PARTNER II system See Hardware Considerations earlier in this chapter for details When a mailbox is created it uses the factory set password 1234 and the factory set Mailbox Language in either the System Language in Monolingual Mode or Primary Language in Bilingual Mode The Mailbox Language can be changed on a per mailbox basis See Modifying al Mailbox Language later in this chapter for details You can create a guest mailbox for an extension that does not have a phone connected to it See Guest Mailboxes Jearlier in t
54. Programming and Use guide for the communications system 4 7 Initial Programming Press until the appropriate value displays Repeat Steps 4 and 5 for each PARTNER MAIL VS extension Press Feature Q to exit programming Refer to the next section for information about programming the voice messaging system NOOO Voice Messaging System Programming Language Before you begin locate Form 1 for the voice messaging system Keep in mind that the Language settings apply to all Automated Attendants the Call Answer Service and the Voice Mail Service unless a subscriber uses the Mailbox Language option to change this language Check to see if any of the Language settings are changed from the factory defaults and implement the changes according to the following procedure gt NOTE In addition to administering the Language settings for the voice messaging system Announcements and prompts that callers and subscribers will hear you can specify another language for the System Administration Prompt Language See Changing the System Administration Prompt Language below Changing the System Administration Prompt Language The System Administration Prompt Language is the language in which programming prompts are played The default setting is the System Language for a system operating in Monolingual Mode or the Primary Language for a system operating in Bilingual Mode You have the option to specify another language f
55. Repair Information The Industry Canada IC label identifies certified equipment This certification means that the equipment meets certain telecommunications network protective operational and safety requirements The IC does not guarantee the equipment will operate to the user s satisfaction Before installing the equipment users should ensure that it is permissible to connect it to the facilities of the local telecommunications company The equipment must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection In some cases the company s inside wiring for single line individual service may be extended by means of a certified connector assembly telephone extension cord The customer should be aware that compliance with the above conditions may not prevent degradation of service in some situations Repairs to certified equipment should be made by an authorized Canadian maintenance facility designated by the supplier Any repairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment or any equipment malfunctions may give the telecommunications company cause to request the user to disconnect the equipment Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections of the power utility telephone lines and internal metallic water pipe system if present are connected This precaution may be particularly important in rural areas caution Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves but shou
56. Restore Press to access the Reports Menu Press to run the Configuration Report Note that the Configuration Report is the only report currently available The report is displayed in the HyperTerminal window This information is also saved to the text file you specified in Step 3 From the Transfer menu on your PC choose Capture Text A submenu appears Choose Stop You can now open view and print the text file that contains the Configuration Report Performing a System Backup Performing a System Backup You can perform a system backup to save the settings that you have programmed and prompts that you have recorded for your voice messaging system This information is saved on a PC Card which protects the programmed configuration data from being lost You can restore this information to the system from the PC Card according to the instructions in the next section The PARTNER MAIL VS system must be idle when you perform a backup Any calls being handled by PARTNER MAIL VS will be disconnected when the backup procedure begins PARTNER MAIL VS will not answer calls while the system backup is being performed For most systems the system backup can be performed in three minutes or less If your voice messaging system uses multiple Automated Attendants with all Announcements recorded at up to four minutes the system backup can take approximately 20 minutes to complete The system backup saves the following
57. Selector Code for which information is specified in Column C of Form 3 and go to Step 8 If Column C is empty skip to Step 12 To specify the Dial 0 Timeout Extension a Press 9 to make the modification b Enter the extension Hunt Group or Calling Group number specified in Column D of From 3 The default extension is 10 c Go to Step 14 Press Q to confirm that you are modifying this Selector Code action To specify Selector Code Transfer as the Selector Code Action go to Step 9 To specify Announcement as the Selector Code Action go to Step 10 To specify Direct Extension Transfer as the Selector Code Action the factory setting for Selector Codes 1 through 8 go to Step 11 To specify Mailbox Transfer as the Selector Code Action go to Step 12 To specify Centrex Transfer as the Selector Code Action go to Step 13 9 For Selector Code Transfer a Press Q b Enter the extension Hunt Group or Calling Group number specified in Column D of Form 3 c Press d Go to Step 14 10 For Announcement a Press b Enter the Announcement number 1 or 2 specified in Column C of Form 3A c Go to Step 16 Voice Messaging System Programming 11 For Direct Extension Transfer a Press For direct extension transfer the selector code represents a range of extensions For example selector code 1 allows outside callers to transfer directly to a
58. The Station Lock feature is available only to subscribers with a system or standard touch tone telephone This button allows subscribers to lock their telephones when they leave their desks for an extended period of time To lock the telephone the subscriber presses the programmed Station Lock button and enters a four digit code To unlock the telephone the subscriber re enters the code It is recommended that the button programmed for this purpose have lights To program a Station Lock button 1 or Ors Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program Central Tel Program Enter the number of the extension to be programmed Press a programmable button Press eature 2 Program another button for this extension or press Feature O to exit programming mode Label the button at the user s extension 4 33 Initial Programming Record a Call PARTNER ACS Release 3 0 or later F24 The Record a Call feature is available only on the PARTNER Advanced Communications System Release 3 0 or later with a 4 port PARTNER MAIL VS Release 5 0 configuration and a system telephone This Record a Call RAC button allows the subscriber to begin recording a call in progress with one touch of a button If the system detects 15 seconds of silence after recording has begun the system automatically turns off the Record a Call feature and the subscriber must press the programmed feature button to resume recording
59. The system plays Mailbox XX exists To administer the message length and mailbox size press 2 To reinitialize the password press 3 To reinitialize the mailbox press 4 To administer Outcalling press 5 To program the Mailbox Language press 6 To administer Record a Call press 7 To delete the mailbox press 3 If finished with this mailbox press or for the next mailbox press 4 Press to administer Outcalling The system plays To turn onOutcalling press 9 To turn off Outcalling press 6 5 Either Press 9 to activate Outcalling The system plays Outcalling is turned on Press to deactivate Outcalling The system plays Outcalling is turned off 6 To activate deactivate Outcalling for another mailbox repeat steps 3 through 5 7 Press to return to the Programming Main Menu or hang up to quit 5 55 System Management Administering Record a Call for a Mailbox 5 56 This feature is available only on the PARTNER Advanced Communications System Release 3 0 or later with a 4 port PARTNER MAIL VS Release 5 0 configuration The Record a Call feature allows a subscriber who is using an internal telephone to record a conversation while active on acall After the conversation is recorded in the voice mailbox the system turns on the Message Waiting Light of the associated extension If Outcalling is active the system will attempt to notify the subsc
60. To leave a message for our sales staff press 9 or stay on the line and we will return your call General I nformation The Night Menu Prompt plays to callers when the VMS Hunt Schedule is set to Always or Night Only and Night Service is on The Night Menu Prompt and the Day Menu Prompt use the same Menu Definition The Night Menu Prompt should contain a welcome and a list of menu options The welcome should introduce the company For example You have reached the Any Travel Agency Our hours are 9 AM to 5 PM Monday through Friday If the system is set for Bilingual Mode let callers know they can switch the language they hear while on the call For example Para espa ol marque 1 The menu options should contain instructions that correspond to the Menu Definition set up on Form 3 If callers can dial extension numbers Direct Extension Transfer the prompt should instruct callers to dial the extension number For example If you know the extension of the person you want to reach dial it now and leave a message If callers can dial a single digit to transfer to an extension or group Selector Code Transfer to a mailbox Mailbox Transfer or to a Centrex number Centrex Transfer the prompt should provide instructions such as To leave a message for Pat press 6 Keep in mind that there are no group mailboxes If Selector Code 9 is left as the default the prompt should instruct cal
61. VMS Hunt Delay Night enter the number of nighttime rings desired PARTNER ACS Release 2 0 or earlier Follow instructions as indicated above However the designated Hunt Schedule and Hunt Delay will be established system wide Different schedules and delays cannot be established for each line PARTNER ACS Release 2 0 or later only If ASA is checked specify the following Automatic System Answer Delay 110 By default a call rings 2 times before it is answered by the system Write number 0 9 if different from default Automatic System Answer Mode 121 By default ASA calls are put on hold after the greeting plays Check if calls should continue to ring or be disconnected Ring Disconnect ASA Record Playback 891 message of up to 10 seconds that caller hears when the call is answered by the Automatic System Answer feature Write message below and record from extension 10 or 11 Form B1 System Extensions Required for PARTNER Advanced Communications System For additional instructions see pages 5 and 6 Lucent Technologies Bell Labs Innovations Identify Telephone Identify Auxiliary Equipment Attached to this Extension Attached to this Extension Write Transfer Return Ext No 306 Ext Write in Other Equipment Write Name Description Button Display 2 Intercom Autodialer 18 Button Display 2 18 Button 2 FAX Machine Extension 6017 PARTNER Voice Messaging 10
62. a feature Programming extension An extension from which you can program the communications system It can be either extension 10 or 11 if available R Receptionist The person who primarily is responsible for answering outside calls This is typically the person at extension 10 Record A Call A PARTNER ACS R3 0 feature that works with the 4 port PARTNER MAIL VS allowing subscribers at an internal extension to record their conversation while active on a call GL 6 Glossary lila S Secondary Language In Bilingual Mode the language callers have the option of hearing when they call in to the voice messaging system See ee EAA Selector Code A single digit 1 9 used to define transfer options for outside callers on the Automated Attendant Service menu See a so Menu Definitionjand Menu Prompt Send All Calls A communications system feature that lets subscribers use Do Not Disturb to send callers imme diately to their mailbox calls do not ring the extension first provided voice mail coverage is on at the extension Standard phone An industry standard touch tone or rotary phone such as you might have in your home Some standard phones include special feature buttons for frequently used calling functions See also Industry standard device Subscriber A user who is assigned a mailbox System Backup A PARTNER MAIL VS Release 5 0 feature that allows you to save the settings that you have pro grammed an
63. aD8W 87 cable mw an AT amp T 355A connector or equivalent a a 25 pin female to female connector a a25 pin to 25 pin serial cable ma aQ pin to 25 pin adapter if your PC has a 9 pin serial COM port To connect your PC to the PARTNER MAIL VS 1 Turn off your PC 2 Connect the D8W 87 cable to the PMVS serial port see the area labeled COM in Figure 2 2 3 Connect the other end of the D8W 87 cable to the AT amp T 355A connector 4 Connect the 25 pin female to female connector to the AT amp T 355A connector 5 Connect the 25 pin to 25 pin serial cable to the 25 pin female to female connector 6 Perform one of the following steps lf your PC has a 25 pin serial COM port connect the other end of the 25 pin to 25 pin serial cable to the serial COM port on your PC lf your PC has a 9 pin serial COM port connect the 9 pin to 25 pin adapter to the other end of the 25 pin to 25 pin serial cable and then connect the 9 pin connector into the serial COM port on your PC 7 Turn on your PC 2 6 Understanding Programming This chapter provides general programming information for the communications system and the voice messaging system Both systems must be programmed so they can work together as an integrated unit Before you begin any programming you must ensure that all required communications system and voice messaging system planning forms described in this chapter are completed You wi
64. about the system including the line number and type of voice messaging service required for each line Form B1 System Extensions Contains basic information about each extension This includes the type of phone or auxiliary equipment at the extension and the name of the user or a description of how the extension is used Form B2 Customized Extension Settings Contains feature settings such as Automatic VMS Cover and Automatic Extension Privacy and group assignments for each extension Form C Button Assignments Specifies which features are programmed on buttons for each extension This includes VMS Cover Do Not Disturb Voice Mailbox Transfer and Voice Mail Messages buttons Communications System Programming Using the Forms The following table shows what procedures should be used and to which communications systems forms they correspond in planning for voice mail system installation and programming To Assign the extensions associated with the VMS hardware to Hunt Group 7 Assign lines to Hunt Group 7 so calls can ring di rectly to the VMS and receive Automated Attendant Service Assign lines to Hunt Group 7 so calls can ring di rectly to the VMS and receive Call Answer Service Identify an extension as an owner of an outside line so calls on that line can ring directly to the owner s voice mailbox when Automatic VMS Cover or VMS Cover is on at owner s ext Determine how quickly outside calls should be an
65. and mailbox size Enter the message length that is a value of 2 to 60 minutes followed by Note that this message length must be less than or equal to the mailbox size that you enter in Step 7 Enter the mailbox size that is a value of 5 to 180 minutes followed by Note that this mailbox size must be greater than or equal to the message length that you entered in Step 6 Press HA to accept the message length and mailbox size Repeat Steps 3 through 8 for each mailbox that you want to resize Press to return to the Programming Main Menu 5 51 System Management Playing a Mailbox s Language 5 52 To play the language currently used for a mailbox Access the Programming Main Menu a Press or the programmed Voice Mail Auto Dial button b Press OQA c Enter the password and press d Press The system plays the system programming options Press to program mailboxes The system tells you how many mailboxes exist and how many are allowed then Pleas nter the mailbox number followed by or press for the next mailbox Enter the number of the mailbox whose language you want to play ollowed by The system plays Mailbox XX exists To administer the message length and mailbox size press 2 To reinitialize the password press 3 To reinitialize the mailbox press 4 To administer Outcalling press 5 To program the Mailbox Language press 6 To administer R
66. beep press after recording Repeat if desired Press to play back this Menu Prompt Press to delete this Menu Prompt and return to Step 11 to be prompted for re recording Press to approve this Night Menu Prompt Press to approve and save all changes The Night Menu Prompts now take effect 4 15 Initial Programming 17 Press to return to the Programming Main Menu 18 Continue with the next section Voice Mail Service Voice Mail Service Before you begin locate Form 2 for the voice messaging system Check to see if any mailbox is to be deleted if a Mailbox Language is changed for any mailbox if the mailbox size or message length is changed or if any Outcalling or Record a Call permission is to be assigned Ad SECURITY ALERT As a safeguard against toll fraud delete unused mailboxes a f no mailbox is deleted no mailbox s language is changed no Outcalling and no Record a Call permission is assigned skip to Line Ownership a f any mailbox is to be deleted use the procedure below a f Mailbox Language is changed for any mailbox see Mailbox s Language later in this section a If the message length or size of a mailbox needs to be adjusted see Changing Mailbox Message Length or Size later in this section a f Outcalling is chosen see Assigning Outcalling Privileges later in this section m f Record a Call is chosen see Administering Record a Call l
67. button b Press OQA c Enter the password and press d Press The system plays the system programming options Press 8 for Reports and Backup Restore Press 8 to perform a system backup The system prompts Please wait for backup confirmation This may take up to three minutes Do you want to continue Press 9 to confirm or 6 to cancel Press to confirm that you want to perform the system backup Do not hang up until you hear the backup confirmation prompt When the backup is complete the system prompts Backup Successful The system returns you to the Programming Main Menu gt NOTE If the system prompts that the backup has failed call the Technical Service Center at 1 800 628 2888 or call your Lucent Technologies Representative or local Authorized Dealer and report the error code that accompanied the failure prompt Performing a System Restore Performing a System Restore You can restore the settings that is programming and recorded prompts that you have saved to a PC Card after system backup The PARTNER MAIL VS system must be idle when you perform a restore operation Any calls being handled by PARTNER MAIL VS will be disconnected when the restore procedure begins PARTNER MAIL VS will not answer calls while the system restore is being performed For most systems the system restore can be performed in three minutes or less If your voice messaging system uses multiple Automated Attendant
68. by dialing Then they dial an access code followed by a digit string to either direct dial or access a network operator to complete the call They try to locate unused or unprotected mailboxes and use them as drop off points for their own messages System Security Guidelines To reduce the risk of unauthorized use of your communications and voice mail systems you should require that the System Manager s Password be changed from the factory setting Use a hard to guess value delete any unused mailboxes immediately require all employees who have voice mailboxes to use passwords to protect their mailboxes permit no Outcalling or permit this privilege only for those with legitimate business need advise subscribers to change their passwords a 4 digit password is recommended when they log into the Voice Mail Service for the first time and frequently thereafter Subscribers can refer to the instructions for changing their passwords in Using the PARTNER MAIL vs familiarize yourself with the impact of the Outcalling feature on system performance and security If Outcalling is not permitted on the system Outgoing Call Restriction should be set to Inside Only for the voice mail system extensions It is strongly recommended that you use the communications system Call Restriction features that is Outgoing Call Restriction used with Allowed and Disallowed Lists to restrict Outcalling numbers See Outgoing Call Restrict
69. default the prompt should Schedule is set to Always or Night Only and Night Service is on instruct callers to press 9 to leave a message with the The Night Menu Prompt and the Day Menu Prompt use the same receptionist Menu Definition m The Night Menu Prompt should contain a welcome and a list of Completing this F orm menu options Write the message that you want callers to hear when they call after m The welcome should introduce the company For example normal business hours including instructions to the caller for You have reached the Any Travel Agency Our hours are 9 AM to selecting menu options 5 PM Monday through Friday 3 y Suggested options include m f the system is set for Bilingual Mode let callers know they can switch the language they hear while on the call For example m Dial 9 or remain on the line to leave a message Para espa ol marque 1 m To hear this menu again dial 4 m The menu options should contain instructions that correspond to the Menu Definition set up on Form 3 Recording the N ight M enu Prompt If callers can dial extension numbers Direct Extension m To record the Night Menu Prompt dial 3 from the Programming Transfer the prompt should instruct callers to dial the extension number For example If you know the extension of the person you want to reach dial it now and leave a message Main Menu If callers can dial a single digit to trans
70. desired if different from the default Bilingual Mode Primary Language Check the Primary Language desired if different from the default Bilingual Mode Secondary Language Check the Secondary Language desired if different from the default Programming L anguage m To program the Language Mode as well as the System Language in Monolingual Mode orthe Primary and Secondary Languages in Bilingual Mode dial LJ from the Programming Main Menu m To program the System Administration Language call the Voice Mail Service and enter the login and password Then dial 0 Form 2 Mailbox Assignments Copy this form for each Automated Attendant Save the original blank form for future use Check a number to indicate for which Automated Attendant this form is used o e je je je o o jo je e jo je j jo aov vea e J f T T wma Jose Yes e 1 f I aeaea ttt foe Pt Mailbox Subscriber Name Mailbox Language Outcalling Assigned RAC Assigned Message L ength Mailbox Size Automated Attendant 1 2 3 4 Form 3 Menu Definition Copy this form for each Automated Attendant Save the original blank form for future use Check a number to indicate for which Automated Attendant this form is used Selector Code Action Key 1 Selector Code Transfer Announcement Direct Extension Transfer Mailbox Transfer Centrex Transfer
71. following procedure in Line Coverage Extension Otherwise continue with the section Automatic VMS Cover 6 In some countries the procedure code for Group Call Distribution is 205 Check the Programming and Use guide for the communications system 4 28 Communications System Programming Line Coverage Extension To assign line coverage for the extension numbers specified in the VMS Mail column on Form A Page 1 Line Coverage tle 2 Press MOQ At the Line prompt enter the first line for which an extension is specified in the VMS Mail column of Form A Page 1 Line Coverage Atthe Data prompt enter the number of the extension specified in the VMS Mail column To program another line press Wextitem or Prev Item until the appropriate line number displays Atthe Data prompt enter the number of the extension specified in the VMS Mail column Repeat Steps 4 and 5 for each VMS Mail line for which an extension number is written on Form A Continue with the next section Automatic VMS Cover Automatic VMS Cover Check Form B2 to see if Automatic VMS Cover is assigned to any extensions If it is follow the procedure below If not skip to VMS Cover Rings To change the Automatic VMS Cover setting for an extension to Assigned as indicated on Form B2 2 Press AQBMO 2 Enter the number of the first extension to which Automatic VMS Cov
72. from or will prevent unauthorized use of common carrier telecommunication services or facilities accessed through or connected to it Lucent Technologies will not be responsible for any charges that result from such unauthorized use Federal Communications Commission Statement This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense Canadian Department of Communications DOC Interference Information This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class A limits for radio noise emissions set out in the radio interference regulations of the Canadian Department of Communications Le Pr sent Appareil Num rique n met pas de bruits radio lectriques d passant les limites applicables aux appareils num riques de la class A pr scrites dans le reglement sur le brouillage radio lectrique dict par le minist re des Communications du Canada Trademarks PART
73. in Bilingual Mode and the subscriber recorded a personal greeting in two languages the caller can switch between the two languages by pressing 90 a Manual VMS Coverage Regardless of the Automatic VMS Cover setting the communications system allows subscribers to press a programmed button to turn voice mail coverage on and off at their extension To make this possible the VMS Cover feature F15 must be programmed on a button with lights on the subscriber s system phone Do Not Disturb The Do Not Disturb button can be used to prevent calls for the extensions from audibly alerting lights still flash Subscribers with PARTNER II Communications System 4 0 or any PARTNER ACS release who have VMS Extension Coverage either automatic or manual can use this communications system feature when they want calls sent to their mailboxes immediately Line Coverage Extension Line Coverage Extension 208 identifies an extension as the line owner of a specific outside line so unanswered calls on that line will be sent to the owner s voice mailbox when either Automatic VMS Cover 310 or VMS Cover see Manual VMS Coverage above is on at the owner s extension Typically line coverage is assigned to lines such as personal lines that are not assigned Automated Attendant Service coverage You can use VMS Cover Rings 321 on PARTNER ACS Release 3 0 or later 117 on all other communications systems to specify the number of times calls
74. in combination are permitted Subscribers must also turn outcalling on before this feature will function If they wish subscribers may also establish an Outcalling schedule that defines when the system places outcalls soecify how much time elapses between outcall attempts and define how many outcall attempts are made per cycle Administering Record a Call for PARTNER ACS Release 3 0 or later 4 20 This feature is available only on the PARTNER ACS Release 3 0 or later with a 4 port PARTNER MAIL VS Release 5 0 configuration When the system is first installed the Record a Call feature which allows a subscriber to record a conversation while active on a call is not assigned to any mailbox That is the Record a Call message length is set to 0 for each mailbox A maximum of two subscribers can record conversations at any time Although you assign Record a Call for a specific mailbox with this procedure ou must also preprogram a feature button for this feature See Telephonel iain etc amming atc in this chapter A CAUTION Keep in mind that Record a Call messages count toward the maximum capacity size of a mailbox When the system storage limit is reached even if storage space is still available in an individual mailbox the system will not accept any new voice mail messages or record any conversations Therefore it is strongly recommended that you limit the number of subscribers who have this privilege and that you remind th
75. is located elsewhere and is connected to the business by Centrex service This frees sales people to handle customer transactions while the Automated Attendant Service transfers service calls to the appropriate department In this case the Automated Attendant Service can be programmed to prompt the caller to enter a single digit to reach any available customer service representative Communications System Features Affecting Automated Attendant Service When planning Automated Attendant Service for each Automated Attendant you must choose settings for the following communications system features Group Call Distribution Specifies the outside lines that are to be answered by each Automated Attendant Service VMS Hunt Delay Specifies whether the Automated Attendant Service is to provide immediate or delayed call handling a VMS Hunt Schedule Specifies when the communications system is to route calls to the Automated Attendant Service Transfer Return Extension Specifies where unanswered calls are transferred by the voice mail system Each of these features is explained briefly below For more information about these communications system features see the Programming and Use guide for your communications system Group Call Distribution This feature lets you specify the outside lines for which you want Automated Attendant Service coverage You can specify some or all of your company s outside lines VMS Hunt Delay Th
76. is set for Bilingual Mode let callers know they can switch the language they hear while on the call For example Para espa ol marque 1 The menu options should contain instructions that correspond to the Menu Definition set up on Form 3 If callers can dial extension numbers Direct Extension Transfer the prompt should instruct callers to dial the extension number For example If you know the extension of the person you want to reach dial it now lf callers can dial a single digit to transfer to an extension or group Selector Code Transfer to a mailbox Mailbox Transfer or to a Centrex number Centrex Transfer the prompt should provide instructions such as To speak to someone in sales press 6 lf callers can can choose an Announcement include that information For example For directions to our office press 4 Completing this F orm Write the message that you want callers to hear when they call during normal business hours including the instructions to the caller for selecting menu options Suggested options include m Remain on the line for assistance m Dial 0 for assistance m To hear this menu again dial 4 Recording the D ay Menu Prompt m Torecord the Day Menu Prompt dial L3 from the Programming Main Menu 41 Automated Attendant 2 3 4 Form 4A Day Menu Prompt Secondary L anguage Copy this form for e
77. listening to the Announcement For example Para espanol marque 1 m Announcements can supply frequently requested information so that your staff is free to assist customers or to perform other tasks more efficiently Automated Attendant 01 42 03 014 Form 4 Day Menu Prompt System L anguage or Primary L anguage Copy this form for each Automated Attendant Save the original blank form for future use Check a number to indicate for which Automated Attendant this form is used O l ee R equired if VMS H unt Schedule is set to D ay Only or Always Pn General I nformation Completing this F orm m The Day Menu Prompt plays to callers when the VMS Hunt Schedule is set to Always or Day Only and Night Service is off The Day Menu Prompt and the Night Menu Prompt use the same Menu Definition m The Day Menu Prompt should contain a welcome and a list of menu options m The welcome should introduce the company For example Thank you for calling the Any Travel Agency m f the system is set for Bilingual Mode let callers know they can switch the language they hear while on the call For example Para espa ol marque 1 m The menu options should contain instructions that correspond to the Menu Definition set up on Form 3 If callers can dial extension numbers Direct Extension Transfer the prompt should instruct callers to dial the extension number For example I
78. may frequently be unavailable for Outcalling What to do You may need more ports if you have a 2 port system or you may need to reduce the number of subscribers who have Outcalling or Record a Call privileges Possible Cause 2 A line may not be available to place a call What to do If all lines are in use when the system attempts to outcall the outcall does not go through The system counts the attempt toward the total number of attempts to be made during the specified time interval If the subscriber s Outcalling Schedule end time occurs before the remaining attempts these attempts will not be made by the system You may need to obtain more lines if the problem occurs frequently Outcalling to a Digital Pager Is Not Working 6 12 Possible Cause 1 The Outcalling number is not properly programmed What to do Check that the Outcalling number is correct If not reprogram the number Possible Cause 2 Insufficient number of pauses in Outcalling number What to do It is important to include a sufficient number of pauses between the pager number and the Personal Identification Number PIN or between the pager number and the callback number Leave several pauses after the pager number You must allow enough time for the paging system to answer before the PIN and or callback number is dialed In addition a pause should follow the 9 dialed to get an outside line And if the communications system is set to rotary ra
79. menu users simply make a call to the voice messaging system The system plays Welcome to PARTNER MAIL VS Pleas nter extension and Otherwise to access PARTNER Tutor press 4 When users dial amp they hear instructions for using Tutor followed by a list of topics and subtopics The user can then enter the topic and subtopic numbers of their choice Refer to Using the Tutor Feature in Chapier shor a list of topic and subtopic numbers Instruction labels which are designed for placement in the handset cradle on the base of the system phone are shipped with the voice messaging system hardware Languages The voice messaging system supports multiple languages You can choose to have outside callers hear all voice prompts and customized messages in one of the supported languages Monolingual Mode or you can let outside callers choose between two available languages preselected for the system by the System Manager Bilingual Mode When the system operates in Monolingual Mode the language you choose for voice prompts is referred to as the System Language When the system operates in Bilingual Mode the language you choose for voice prompts when calls are first answered is referred to as the Primary Language Outside callers then have the option of switching to the Secondary Language for the remainder of the call Overview Voice Messaging Services The voice messaging system provides three types o
80. on the feature when they leave their desks or whenever they are too busy to answer calls Calls to extensions with Do Not Disturb on are answered immediately Call Answer Service Terminates Message While Caller Is Recording Possible Cause The caller s recording time exceeded the mailbox s message time limit The time limit for recording a message is four minutes the factory setting or the administered length What to do Let the caller know the recording time limit Also let the caller know that he or she can press and the appropriate extension number to transfer to the extension again this avoids making another outside call to finish the message if necessary Messages Cannot Be Deposited in Mailbox Possible Cause 1 The mailbox or system is full What to do Old messages must be deleted regularly from mailboxes When a subscriber s mailbox is full the caller cannot leave a message in that mailbox but is given the option of transferring to another extension For all subscribers mailboxes can store up to 180 minutes of recorded messages or 120 messages whichever is reached first The factory set storage space for these mailboxes is 20 minutes The receptionist s mailbox at extension 10 is factory set to store 60 minutes of recorded messages or 120 messages You can change this setting to 180 minutes 6 7 Troubleshooting 6 8 Possible Cause 2 An Outcalling number is incorrectly programmed forwarding Outcalling not
81. s personal greet ing and can leave a message Automatic Call Handling Automated Attendant Service answers outside calls immediately The receptionist acts as a back up for unanswered calls Call Handling The receptionist answers outside calls Calls not answered by the specified number of rings go to the Automated Attendant Service VMS Coverage Subscribers have voice mail coverage on all the time at their Extension VMS Line Coverage Caller hears the line owner s personal greet ing and can leave a message Manual VMS Coverage Subscribers can turn voice mail coverage on and off at their Extension Allows subscribers to Listen to a caller leaving a message Create and send messages Create Personal Group Distribution Lists Listen to messages Adjust playback volume while listening to messages Forward messages with comment to other mailboxes Delete messages Set up Outcalling to a list of pager and telephone numbers Record a personal greeting Specify a Personal Operator Change password Record a call Voice Mail Service Voice Mailbox Transfer System users press a button to transfer callers directly to a voice mailbox without ringing the extension first Send All Calls Subscribers can use Do Not Disturb in conjunc tion with automatic or manual VMS coverage Doing so enables callers to receive Call Answer Serv
82. see Chapter 4 a Generate a System Configuration Report see Chapter 4 a Perform a system backup see Chapter 4 1 18 Installation This chapter provides instructions for installing the voice messaging system s hardware in the communications system s control unit It also includes instructions for connecting a printer to the system to allow you to print the System Configuration Report Before You Start Refer to Appendix Alto verify that you have the appropriate voice messaging system and communications system hardware Then a Make sure the communications system control unit processor module s and line extension modules have been installed m Make sure this installation meets the environmental and electrical requirements listed in Appendix Alof this guide Installation Installing the PARTNER MAIL VS Module 2 2 To install the voice messaging system module in the communications system s control unit Va Turn off power to the communications system s control unit either pull out the main circuit breaker on the upper right rear corner of the control unit or move the on off switch to the off position or remove the power cord from the AC outlet A CAUTION Failure to turn off power may damage the control unit and or the voice messaging system Install the voice messaging system module in the first available slot to the right of the last installed communications system module in a 5 slot conf
83. swered by the Automated Attendant Service of the VMS i e by the number of rings on PARTNER ACS Release 3 0 or later immediate or delayed call handling on all other systems On PARTNER ACS Release 3 0 or later this feature can be ad ministered on a per line basis and differently for day and night Determine when outside calls should ring the VMS Hunt Group always day only or night only de pending on the status of the Night Service Button at ext 10 On PARTNER ACS Release 3 0 or later this feature can be administered on a per line ba sis Determine whether an extension s unanswered in tercom and transferred calls and outside calls on lines assigned ownership 208 are automatically covered by the VMS Specify the number of times intercom and trans ferred calls or outside calls on lines assigned own ership ring at extensions before they are sent to the VMS Identify the extension to which a call transferred by the VMS should be routed if the destination exten sion does not answer and does not have voice mail coverage active The transfer return extension for the VMS is typically ext 10 Use Feature Procedure Hunt Group Extensions 505 Group Call Distribution 206 Option 1 Group Call Distribution 206 Option 3 Line Coverage Extension 208 VMS Hunt Delay 506 VMS Hunt Schedule 507 Automatic VMS Cover 310 VMS Cover Rings 117 on PARTNER ACS Re lease 3 0 or later
84. that answered most recently being the last one in the hunt order See also Calling Group and VMS I Immediate Call Handling A communications system feature that allows the Automated Attendant Service to answer every incoming outside call on specified lines and play the Automated Attendant Service day or night menu See al so Delayed Call Handling Industry standard device A telephone or other telecommunications device that can be connected directly to the public tele phone network See a so Standard phone Intercom call A call that is made to another system extension L Langua ge Mode See Bilingual Modejand Monolingual Mode Line Coverage Extension A communications system feature that directs incoming calls on a specific line to a specific exten sion Line jack The location on 206 308 and 400 modules that allows you to connect outside lines to the control unit GL 4 Glossary Line number The number assigned to each line jack on a 206 308 or 400 module Line jack numbers run con secutively from 01 through 12 for a PARTNER Plus system 01 through 15 for a PARTNER ACS and PARTNER Endeavor or from 01 through 24 for PARTNER ID Line Ownership A voice messaging system feature that lets you program VMS Line Coverage See a so Group Call Distributionjand VMS Line Coverage M Mailbox A storage area for messages associated with a system subscriber Mailbox Language The language assig
85. the doorphone remove all Do not assign restrictions that prevent dialing the outside number Forced Account Code Entry 307 or outside lines see Lines Pools Not Assigned on Form B2 groups Also see Form D External Hotline 311 9 Also write Transfer Return Ext No 306 on this form 5 Standard phone is recommended Write extension number of corresponding alert extension or 70 for 10 Extensions 78 and 79 should be assigned to the two voice ports on PARTNER Voice Messaging loudspeaker paging system in next column Extensions 78 and 79 must be assigned to Hunt Group 7 and any previous assignments for Hunt Group 7 should be erased Lucent Technologies Bell Labs Innovations Form B2 Customized Extension Settings PAGE Required if you want to change extension settings from defaults For additional instructions see pages 7 and 8 Identify Extension Settings Identify Line Ringing CTP Option Identify Restrictions Permissions Identify if Different than Default If Different than Default If Different than Defaults Group Assignments 5 a Pepe l a S S S IS l T 2 a g Write line numbers or pool access codes Write line numbers or pool access codes 2 oe S al g g oles 2 olg o S S 25 in each column to show desired for Line Access Restriction 302 or Sleztl f 3 S Si 2
86. to the Automated Attendant Service and the caller chooses to hear an Announcement the caller hears one of the Announcements on Form 3A VMS Form 4 for Automated Attendant 1 a When Night Service is off and an unanswered call goes to the Automated Attendant Service the caller hears the Day Menu Prompt on Form 4 E 7 Case Studies VMS Form 4 for Automated Attendant 2 a When Night Service is off and an unanswered call goes to the Automated Attendant Service the caller hears the Day Menu Prompt on Form 4 VMS Form 5 for Automated Attendant 1 a When Night Service is on and an unanswered call goes to the Automated Attendant Service the caller hears the Night Menu Prompt on Form 5 VMS Form 5 for Automated Attendant 2 a When Night Service is on and an unanswered call goes to the Automated Attendant Service the caller hears the Night Menu Prompt on Form 5 Post Installation Recommendations a Stan Sally and the coaches should record a personal greeting and change the factory set password for their mailboxes mw Stan and Sally should turn on Outcalling and enter an Outcalling number and schedule mw The clerk should record a general business greeting for the mailbox at extension 10 on Automated Attendant 1 because this is the general mailbox for Automated Attendant 1 and change the factory set password for that mailbox Sally should record a greeting appropriate for the Pro Shop for mailbox 11 which is used as the gene
87. under this limited warranty for damages resulting from a Failure to follow Lucent Technologies installation operation or maintenance instructions m Unauthorized system modification movement or alteration m Unauthorized use of common carrier communication services accessed through the system a Abuse misuse or negligent acts or omissions of the customer and persons under the customer s control or ma Actof third parties and acts of God LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES OBLIGATION TO REPAIR REPLACE OR REFUND AS SET FORTH ABOVE IS YOUR EXCLUSIVE REMEDY EXCEPT AS SPECIFICALLY SET FORTH ABOVE LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES ITS AFFILIATES SUPPLIERS AND DEALERS MAKE NO WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED AND SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIM ANY WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE C 3 Warranty Information Limitation of Liability C 4 Except as provided below the liability of Lucent Technologies and its affiliates and suppliers for any claims losses damages or expenses from any cause whatsoever including acts or omissions of third parties regardless of the form of action whether in contract tort or otherwise shall not exceed the lesser of 1 the direct damages proven or 2 the repair cost replacement cost license fee annual rental charge or purchase price as the case may be of the equipment that directly gives rise to claim Except as provided below Lucent Technologies and its affiliates and
88. use Centrex Transfer as an option on a particular Automated Attendant all lines assigned to that Automated Attendant must be Centrex lines Dial 0 Timeout Extension Transfer You can specify a Dial 0 Timeout Extension Transfer Then when a caller presses 0 or does not select any of the options listed on the menu the system transfers the call to the specific extension that you assigned Announcement You can assign any of the selector codes to an Announcement number When a caller presses the single digit selector code the system plays an Announcement primary or secondary that you assigned to that digit Each Announcement can be up to four minutes in length You can set the system to play the Announcement and hang up or prompt the caller to press and an extension number gt NOTE Voice mail coverage is not provided for group calls See Group Calling Tips earlier in this chapter for more information Depending on your business you can define the menu so that some options accommodate callers during normal business hours and other options accommodate after hours callers Keep in mind though that the menu definition he N Fore rans exten hrou settin hat you select for the Day Menu will be used by the voice messaging system to ight Menu as well xample The ANY Travel Agency wants to give outside callers the ability to er directly to any employee in their system by dialing the employee s 2 digit sion numb
89. 08 module that allow you to connect phones or other telecommunications devices to the control unit Extension Line Coverage A voice messaging system feature that lets a subscriber s extension mailbox be assigned as the owner of a covered line When a call comes in on the covered line the system routes the caller to the mailbox specified as the line owner if the call is not answered See a so Line Coverage Exten bion Extension number The number assigned to each extension jack on a 206 module Extension jack numbers run con secutively from 11 through 41 for the PARTNER ACS R1 0 and 1 1 11 through 49 for the PARTNER ACS R3 0 or later and PARTNER Endeavor R1 0 or later and 10 through 57 for the PARTNER HI and PARTNER Plus systems They are used for intercom calling Extension Programming A method of telephone programming that lets users program their own extensions from their sys tem phones See also Centralized Telephone Programming GL 3 Glossary G Group Call Distribution A communications system feature that directs incoming calls on specified lines to a Hunt Group for either Automated Attendant Service or Line Coverage See a so Automated Attendant Service Hunt Group VMS Hunt Group and VMS Line Coverage H Hunt Group A group of extensions that takes incoming or transferred calls in round robin fashion Calls to the Hunt Group are directed to the first available extension in the group with the extension
90. 2 2 ACE Background Music F 19 2 Music Call Coverage F 20 XX XX 2 4 6 Cover XX XX Call Forwarding Call Follow Me F 11 XX XX 24 CF XXXX Call Park XX 3 Park Call Pickup I 6 XX Pickup XX Conference Drop F 06 Drop Contact Closure 1 F 41 2 CC1 Contact Closure 2 F 42 2 CC2 Direct Line Pickup Active Line 68 DLPA Direct Line Pickup lIdle Line I 8 DLPI Exclusive Hold F 02 ExHold Fax Management I XX 2 FAX XX Group Calling Ring Page I 7 G or 7 G GCall g Group Hunt Ring Signal 177 G or 77 G Hunt g Group Pickup 66 G P U Grp g Intercom Autodial I XX or XX 2 Ext XX Last Number Redial F 05 LNR Loudspeaker Paging I 70 Loudspk Manual Signaling F 13 XX or F 13 XX 2 MS XX Message Light Off F 10 XX 5 MsgOff XX Message Light On F 09 XX 5 MsgOn XX Recall F 03 Recall Save Number Redial F 04 SNR Simultaneous Paging I 70 SPage Station Lock F 21 2 Lock Touch Tone Enable F 08 TT EN Voice Mail Messages I 777 VMMsgs 777 V Voice Mailbox Transfer F 14 VMBox paiinbey qaq 1 Requires Auto Dial button for each extension 2 Button with lights is recommended but not required 3 Extension number can be programmed as Auto Dial button 4 You can program the origination extension only or both the origination and destination extension 5
91. 2 0 or later with 308 and PARTNER MAIL Voice Messaging System Modules Installation Reserved for Future Use RS 232 Port COM Power Indicator Green LED Slot for PC Card 0 Figure 2 2 2 4 Installing the PC Card 4 To install the PC Card that is a 2 Port Card with Backup and Restore or 4 Port Expansion Card with Backup and Restore insert the card in the vertical slot on the lower front of the voice messaging system module see the area labeled Slot for PC Card in Figure 22 Make sure the arrows on the card label face up and in Also make sure the card is pushed in all the way gt NOTE After you have administered the voice messaging system for the first time it is recommended that you perform a system backup See Chapter 4 for details 5 Turn on power to the control unit The Power LED should light if it does skip to Step 6 If the Power LED does not light power down the control unit reseat the voice messaging system module then power up the control unit again If the Power LED still does not light call for support as indicated on the inside front cover of this guide Installing the PARTNER MAIL VS Module 6 After the voice messaging system module is powered up it performs some self diagnostic tests When these tests are complete the LED on the voice messaging system module works as follows LED Color and Pattern State Stead
92. 316 FAX Machine Extension 601 Doorphone 1 604 8 Contact Closure Group 612 PARTNER Voice Messaging 10 Answering Machine External Hotline 311 4 Extra Alert Intercom Autodialer 18 Button Display 2 18 Button 2 12 Button Display 2 PARTNER MAIL PARTNER MAIL VS Alert Extensions 606 for Doorphone 1 Doorphone 2 605 8 Alert Extensions 606 for Doorphone 2 AA Extension 607 9 12 Button 2 34 Button Display 2 6 Button 2 Cordless Wireless Standard 3 Alert Extension for Hotline PassageWay WARNING Customers should keep extension 10 11 or the first two extensions of any 308EC or 206 module available for power failure use 1 If checked see Form B1 Page 4 of 4 6 Also write Transfer Return Ext No 306 in the last column on this form usually extension 10 2 Ifthere is a mix of PARTNER model and MLS model phones write P for PARTNER and M for MLS Also see Form B2 Identify Group Assignments VMS Only 3 Write T for touch tone or R for rotary 7 To prevent other extensions from interrupting calls assign Automatic Extension Privacy 304 on Form B2 4 Must be standard phone If immediate dialing is required use a dedicated line 8 Check corresponding alert extensions in next column To prevent outside calls at
93. 5 56 S O Selector Code System Administration Prompt system backup 4 41 5 76 gt y O System Language 4 93 S O System Manager password for 5 2 o O system operation verifying 4 35 oo System Programming Reference system restore 4 43 15 78 S U OO system restore failure4 42 15 77 __ o o o Z o Y 5 78 o system settings restore 5 78 system settings restoring 4 43 Cid fC T terminal emulation program Terminology lxi o O Transfer nt Service callers for Automated Attenda Transfer Return Extension lt MS Cover button S Cover Rings 4 230 S Hunt Delay setting _4 23 5 36 Z MS Hunt Group extension assignment 4 6 S Hunt Schedule overview 1 9 settings 1 9 ooo o o VMS Hunt Schedule setting VMS Line Coverage 4 28 l5 61 Voice Mail Auto Dial button 5 70 Voice mail coverage for extensions 1 12 Voice Mail Service factory setmessage 1 14 overview 1 Voice Mailbox Transfer description 1 13 Voice Mailbox Transfer VMBox button 4 32 l5 69 Voice messaging system features 1 1 oo O overview 1 4 S ice messaging system programming guidelines initial setup volume contro ey R Ko V O IN 3 Language Press 1 Language Mode Press 1 Monolingual Mode Press 1 Bilingual Mode Press 2 System Language
94. Automated Attendant Announcement s Repeat this procedure for each additional Automated Attendant You can use this procedure to do the following a Specify the Automated Attendant Menu Definition including the selector codes and the Dial 0 Timeout Extension a Record an Automated Attendant Announcement a Record the Automated Attendant Menu Prompt It is important to understand that you must approve each element that is the Menu Definition the Day Menu Prompt and any Announcements as well as save all of these entries in Step 28 If you exit at any point before saving your approved entries your entries will be lost This procedure is designed to ensure that callers do not hear the incomplete menu while you are in the process of building modifying it 1 If necessary access the Programming Main Menu If you are already at the Programming Main Menu skip to Step 2 a Press or the programmed Voice Mail Auto Dial button b Press OQA c Enter the password and press d Press The system plays the system programming options 2 Press for Automated Attendant The system prompts you to specify the Automated Attendant 3 Enter the Automated Attendant number from 1 to 4 4 Press for Day Menu 4 11 Initial Programming 4 12 Press to modify the Menu Definition and or Day Menu Prompt Do one of the following Press to specify a Dial 0 Timeout Extension Go to Step 7 Enter a
95. Call Pickup I 6 XX Pickup XX Conference Drop F 06 Drop Contact Closure 1 F 41 2 CC1 Contact Closure 2 F 42 2 CC2 Direct Line Pickup Active Line 68 DLPA Direct Line Pickup lIdle Line I 8 DLPI Exclusive Hold F 02 ExHold Fax Management I XX 2 FAX XX Group Calling Ring Page I 7 G or 7 G GCall g Group Hunt Ring Signal 177 G or 77 G Hunt g Group Pickup 66 G P U Grp g Intercom Autodial I XX or XX 2 Ext XX Last Number Redial F 05 LNR Loudspeaker Paging I 70 Loudspk Manual Signaling F 13 XX or F 13 XX 2 MS XX Message Light Off F 10 XX 5 MsgOff XX Message Light On F 09 XX 5 MsgOn XX Recall F 03 Recall Save Number Redial F 04 SNR Simultaneous Paging I 70 SPage Station Lock F 21 2 Lock Touch Tone Enable F 08 TT EN Voice Mail Messages I 777 VMMsgs 777 V Voice Mailbox Transfer F 14 VMBox paiinbey qaq 1 Requires Auto Dial button for each extension 2 Button with lights is recommended but not required 3 Extension number can be programmed as Auto Dial button 4 You can program the origination extension only or both the origination and destination extension 5 You can program the extension number 6 Available with ACS R2 0 or later only 7 Available with ACS R3 0 or later F Feature button G Group I Left Intercom button XX Ex
96. Chock if pplicabie Fo rm A Addendu IM Aaaitional information for Release 3 0 and later Caller ID Devices r Loudspeaker Paging Number of zones i VMS Hunt Delay 506 Unique Magic on Hold Music on Hold 602 must be active ane Uninterruptible Power Supply Mant Ringing POE No of Rings 209 SMDR If checked specify the following if appropriate SMDR Record Type 608 By default all calls are included on call reports Write Out if only outgoing calls are reported SMDR Output Format 610 By default up to 15 digits are printed for dialed numbers in the Number field of the call report Write 24 if a maximum of 24 digits is desired SMDR Talk Time 611 By default a Talk field is not included on the call report Write Active if the Talk field is desired i PARTNER Contact Closure Adjunct If checked write in the number 1 4 below to specify Operation Type for each Contact Closure as appropriate Lucent Technologies Bell Labs Innovations Schedule Day 507 No of Rings OperationType Contact Contact 613 Closure 1 Closure 1 1 1 second on 2 3 seconds on V 3 5 seconds on 4 Toggle ASA DXD PC Card PARTNER Voice Messaging PC Card 12 Notes Write any additional information that you want to communicate to the installer Ooo S o t Jo e ee Ooo J t o f E re a ee e ee
97. Document xi a Terminology i a How to Use This Guide ili I a System Manager Activities Checklist 1 18 Installation 2 1 Before You Start 2 1 Installing the PARTNER MAIL VS Module 2 2 2 6 a Connecting a PC to the PARTNER MAIL VS 2 iii Contents Communications System Programming Planning Forms 3 Understanding Programming a Voice Messaging System Programming Planning Forms Using System Programming i i 3 1 icati i 3 1 i 3 2 i i 3 6 i 3 6 i 3 9 E 4 Initial Programming 4 1 a Voice Mail System Configurations 4 2 Upgrading Your Voice Mail System from a 2 Port to a 4 Port Configuration 4 2 iti icati 4 6 6 Outgoing Call Restriction 4 7 Changing the System Administration Prompt Language 4 8 Automated Attendant Service 4 10 Voice Mail Service 4 16 Line Ownership 4 21 a Communications System Programming 4 22 Automated Attendant Service 4 22 Call Answer Service 4 28 Telephone Button Programming 4 31 Performing a System Backup 4 41 a Performing a System Restore 4 43 a Verifying System Operation 4 35 iv Contents 5 System Management 5 1 m General Information 5 2 Changing Your Password 5 2 Changing the System Administration Prompt Language 5 3 Playing the System Primary or Secondary Language 5 12 Modifying the System Primary or Secondary Language 5 14 Playing the Day or Night Menu Prompt 5 27 Modifying the Menu Definitio
98. E THROUGH SYSTEM PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES PRESS Next Procedure or Prev Procedure GROUP CALL DISTRIBUTION DIAL 206t PRESS for the VMS Hunt Group DIAL a line number DIAL 1 Assigned 2 Not Assigned 3 VMS Line Cover PRESS to program another line LINE COVERAGE EXTENSION DIAL 208 DIAL a line number DIAL an extension number PRESS to program another line PRESS to unassign ownership VMS HUNT DELAY PARTNER ACS 3 0 OR LATER DIAL 506 PRESS or 2 for Mode ENTER the line number ENTER value from 0 to 6 VMS HUNT DELAY ALL OTHER PARTNER SYSTEMS DIAL 506 DIAL 1 Immediate 2 Delayed VMS HUNT SCHEDULE PARTNER ACS 3 0 OR LATER DIAL 507 PRESS or 2 for Mode ENTER the line number ENTER value from 1 to 3 VMS HUNT SCHEDULE DIAL 507 DIAL 1 Always 2 Day Only 3 Night Only TO CYCLE THROUGH AVAILABLE SETTINGS PRESS Next Data or Prev Data TO RETURN TO FACTORY SETTINGS PRESS AUTOMATIC VMS COVER DIAL 310 DIAL an extension number DIAL 1 Assigned 2 Not Assigned PRESS to program another extension VMS COVER RINGS PARTNER ACS 3 0 OR LATER DIAL 321 ENTER the extension number ENTER value from 1 to 9 VMS COVER RINGS ALL OTHER PARTNER SYSTEMS DIAL 117 DIAL one digit 1 9 for the number of rings before the call is sent to the voice messaging system vY 3 rings NIGHT SERVICE BUTTON DIAL 503 DIAL 1 Assigned 2
99. If you do subscribe to Caller ID service it is recommended that you specify 1 Update Form A Page 2 of the System Planner for the communications system to show modifications to the VMS Hunt Delay setting before you begin To change the VMS Hunt Delay setting 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program Enter the System Password if required Press HOO At the Mode prompt enter 7 Day or 2 Night At the Line prompt enter the first line number Press until the appropriate value displays To program another line press Next fem or Previtem until the appropriate line number displays Then repeat Step 6 8 Press Featured O to exit programming Sl ODO AS O IND VMS Hunt Delay All Other PARTNER Systems 5 36 Use this communications system procedure to specify either immediate or delayed call handling Any changes you make will apply to all Automated Attendants Update Form A Page 2 of the System Planner for the communications system to show modifications to the VMS Hunt Delay setting before you begin To change the VMS Hunt Delay setting 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program 2 Enter the System Password if required 3 Press MBO Automated Attendant Service 4 Press until the appropriate value displays 5 Press Feature O to exit programming Automatic Extension Privacy Use this procedure to prevent users from accid
100. Jose and Juan have delayed DEL ringing set for their extensions CS Form C3 PARTNER 18 Phone VMS Form 1 VMS Form 2 E 32 Form C3 identifies the buttons programmed on the PARTNER 18 phones at extensions 13 14 15 16 17 18 and 19 Voice Mail Messages and Voice Mailbox Transfer Language Mode The check mark in the Bilingual box indicates that the system allows outside callers to choose between two languages Primary Language The check mark in the Latin American Spanish box indicates that the system answers outside calls in Spanish The check mark in the U S English box for Secondary Language indicates that the system can play messages and prompts in English when callers press O English is indicated as the language chosen for the System Administration Prompt Language A Note that unused mailboxes are crossed off B Subscriber Name In this column the names listed for mailboxes 10 through 19 indicate that all employees have mailboxes Eng in column C Mailbox Language for extensions 12 13 and 16 indicates the subscribers at those extensions prefer to listen to prompts and messages in English when retrieving messages recording personal greetings and accessing other Voice Mail Services The rest of the subscribers prefer prompts and messages in Spanish the system s Primary Language D Outcalling Assigned Yes in this column for Juan the system administrator and the customer service represen
101. Lucent Technologies Bell Labs Innovations PARTNER MAIL VS Voice Messaging System Release 5 Installation and Programming 585 322 532 Comcode 108355173 Issue 1 December 1998 Copyright 1998 Lucent Technologies 585 322 532 All Rights Reserved Comcode 108355173 Printed in USA Issue 1 December 1998 Notice Every effort was made to ensure that the information in this book was complete and accurate at the time of printing However information is subject to change Your Responsibility for Your System s Security Toll fraud is the unauthorized use of your telecommunications system by an unauthorized party for example persons other than your company s employees agents subcontractors or persons working on your company s behalf Note that there may be a risk of toll fraud associated with your telecommunications system and if toll fraud occurs it can result in substantial additional charges for your telecommunications services You and your System Manager are responsible for the security of your system such as programming and configuring your equipment to prevent unauthorized use The System Manager is also responsible for reading all installation instruction and system administration documents provided with this product in order to fully understand the features that can introduce risk of toll fraud and the steps that can be taken to reduce that risk Lucent Technologies does not warrant that this product is immune
102. Mailbox Subscriber Name Mailbox Language Outcalling Assigned RAC Assigned Message L ength Mailbox Size Automated Attendant 1 2 3 4 Form 3 Menu Definition Copy this form for each Automated Attendant Save the original blank form for future use Check a number to indicate for which Automated Attendant this form is used Selector Code Action Key 1 Selector Code Transfer Announcement Direct Extension Transfer Mailbox Transfer Centrex Transfer General I nformation m Factory defaults are identified by the Y symbol m This Menu Definition applies to both the Day and Night Menu prompts m The Lines Assigned area is reserved for you to specify the lines assigned to this Automated Attendant m The Selector Code is the first digit dialed by the caller in response to menu prompts m In Direct Extension Transfer Selector Codes 1 5 and 7 represent the first digit for a range of extensions see table These Selector Codes let callers dial extension numbers directly m In Selector Code Transfer Selector Codes 1 9 represent a specific extension Group Calling number if available Hunt Group number Centrex number or guest mailbox number that you specify to which the caller is transferred See the range of extensions table Selector Code Transfer lets callers dial a single digit to reach a single extension or group such as the VP of Sales at e
103. Monolingual Mode the system plays To play System Language press 2 To modify System Language press 6 If finished press If the system is operating in Bilingual Mode the system plays To program Primary Language press 1 To program Secondary Language press 2 If finished press 4 Do one of the following Ifthe system is operating in Monolingual Mode press and go to Step 5 The system plays System language is LANGUAGE where LANGUAGE is the current language To play System Language press 2 To modify System Language press 6 If finished press If the system is operating in Bilingual Mode press for the Primary Language Go to Step 6 If the system is operating in Bilingual Mode press for the Secondary Language Go to Step 6 If the system is operating in Monolingual Mode do one of the following To change the System Language go to Step 4 of Modifying the System Primary or Secondary Language Press to return to the Programming Main Menu or hang up to quit If the system is operating in Bilingual Mode do one of the following Press 2 to play the Primary Language Go to Step 7 The system plays Primary language is LANGUAGE where LANGUAGE is the current language To play Primary Language press 2 To modify Primary Language press 6 If finished press Press to play the Secondary Language Go to Step 7 The syste
104. NER PARTNER MAIL VS PARTNER MAIL MLS 34D MLS 18D MLS 12D MLS 12 MLS 6 MLC 6 MDC 9000 MDW 9000 MDW 9010 and MDW 9030P are registered trademarks of Lucent Technologies in the U S and other countries Microsoft Windows and Windows NT are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation Ordering Information Call Lucent Technologies Publications Center Voice 1 800 457 1235 International Voice 317 361 5353 Fax 1 800 457 1764 International Fax 317 361 5355 Write Lucent Technologies Publications Center 2855 N Franklin ndianapolis IN 46219 Order Document No 585 322 532 Issue 1 December 1998 Comcode 108355173 Support Telephone Number In the continental U S Lucent Technologies provides a toll free customer helpline 24 hours a day Call the Lucent Technologies Helpline at 1 800 628 2888 or your Lucent Technologies authorized dealer if you need assistance when installing programming or using your system Consultation charges may apply Outside the continental U S contact your local Lucent Technologies authorized representative Lucent Technologies Fraud Intervention If you suspect you are being victimized by toll fraud and you need technical support or assistance call Technical Service Center Toll Fraud Intervention Hotline at 1 800 643 2353 WWW Home Page The WWW home page for Lucent Technologies is www lucent com Important Safety Instructions A WARNING The following list provides basic safety precau
105. NG PRESS o Automated Attendant REFER to Forms 3 3A 3B 4 4A 5 and 5A PRESS to program Automated Attendant Service ENTER Automated Attendant number TO MODIFY ANNOUNCEMENT BILINGUAL MODE PRESS for Day Menu PRESS to modify ENTER a Selector Code 1 through 9 PRESS to confirm PRESS to play the Announcement corded for the Selector Code Announcement number to record the Announcement in e Primary Language after recording to approve to record the Announcement in e Secondary Language after recording to approve to move up a menu level to move up another menu el to approve all changes OBE SES H Oo ENTER PRESS Qs 3 era Fe g PRESS PRESS PRESS DDS je PRESS PRESS PRESS PRESS WAS lt Ey PRESS TO MODIFY DIAL 0 TIMEOUT EXTENSION BILINGUAL MODE PRESS PRESS PRESS PRESS ENTER PRESS PRESS for Day Menu to modify for Dial 0 Timeout to modify extension number and to approve to record the Day Menu Prompt the Primary Language after recording to approve to record the Day Menu Prompt the Secondary Language after recording to approve all changes PRESS PRESS PRESS PRESS PRESS WHSNABFHAWS SESE PARTNER MAIL VS System Programming Reference TO START PROGRAMMING PRESS PRESS 9 9 and ENTER your Password factory setting is 1234 and PRESS 9 to access the Programming Main Menu Automated Attenda
106. Not Assigned 3 Select button then PRESS a programmable button to assign Night Service to that button If you use option 3 after a Night Service button has been assigned the Night Service button moves from the old button to the new button you select AUTOMATIC EXTENSION PRIVACY DIAL 304 DIAL the extension number DIAL 1 Assigned 2 Not Assigned PRESS to program another extension Some systems allow programming from extension 11 Check the Programming and Use guide for the communications system t In some countries the procedure code for Transfer Return Extension is 309 Check the Programming and Use guide for the communications system tt In some countries the procedure code for Group Call Distribution is 205 Check the Programming and Use guide for the communications system system Check the Programming and Use guide for the communications system Line Coverage Extension 208 VMS Cover Rings 117 and option 3 of the Night Service Button 503 procedure may not be available on your PARTNER MAIL VS System Programming Reference To Program the Communications System for PARTNER MAIL VS Place the Programming Overlay on the dial pad of the system display phone at extension 10 TO START CENTRALIZED TELEPHONE PROGRAMMING PRESS 0 PRESS System Program System Program PRESS Central Tel Program DIAL the extension number to be programmed Buttons on which lines are assigned for t
107. O O O oO O Call Pickup 1 6 XX Pickup XX 4 Requires Auto Dial button Conference Drop F 06 Drop for each extension Contact Closure 1 F 41 2 CC1 2 Button with lights is L L O L L Contact Closure 2 F 42 2 Cc2 ieee but not O O O O O Direct Line Pickup Active Line l 68 DLPA 3 Extension number can be p Direct Line Pickup ldle Line l 8 DLPI programmed as Auto Dial 5 Night 4 4 VMS z C Exclusive Hold F 02 ExHod igen PS o c q C T Fax Management XX 2 FAX XX origination extension only CGA LJ ing Ri 5 4 or both the origination and SVC DND Auto Dial VM Box Group Caling RingPage 17Gorl 7 G GCall g destination Saale k Group Hunt Ring Signal 77 G or 1 77 G Hunt g f 5 You can program the SS D l G G g Group Pickup 66 G P U Grp g extension number DEL DEL DEL DEL Intercom Autodial I XX or XX 2 Ext XX 6 Available with ACS R2 0 Or H 0 H o Hog E O Last Number Redial F 05 LNR or later only Loudspeaker Paging I 70 Loudspk 7 Ayala e with ACS R3 0 7 Intercom Intercom Manual Signaling F 13 XX or F 13 XX 2 MS XX H Ext Message Light Off F 10 XX 5 MsgOff XX 0 0 1 Message Light On F 09 XX 5 MsgOn XX Recall F 03 Recall Save Number Redial F 04 SNR Simultaneous Paging I 70 SPage Station Lock F 21 2 Lock In Hybrid mode only if pool 880 is assigned these two buttons are associated with this pool ACS R2 0 or later only F Feature button
108. Off XX Message Light On F 09 XX 5 MsgOn XX Recall F 03 Recall Save Number Redial F 04 SNR Simultaneous Paging I 70 SPage Station Lock F 21 2 Lock Touch Tone Enable F 08 TT EN Voice Mail Messages I 777 VMMsgs 777 V Voice Mailbox Transfer F 14 VMBox paiinbey qaq 1 Requires Auto Dial button for each extension 2 Button with lights is recommended but not required 3 Extension number can be programmed as Auto Dial button 4 You can program the origination extension only or both the origination and destination extension 5 You can program the extension number 6 Available with ACS R2 0 or later only 7 Available with ACS R3 0 or later F Feature button G Group I Left Intercom button XX Extension Lucent Technologies Bell Labs Innovations Make as many copies as you need Use template and or checklist For additional instructions see pages 9 through 14 Template Instructions e If desired write in line number pool access code dial code feature or auto dial number e If desired write in Line Ringing Imm Del or No from Form B2 e If desired write in Line Access Restriction or Pool Access Restrictiont Out In or No from Form B2 t Available with ACS R2 0 or later only Form C3 PARTNER 18 18D Phone PAGE 3 of 8 Check Desired Button Features write in extension or group number SAMPLE Automati
109. R De ee ee EL ec falls E 2 z g z 10 11 9 12 o UR 13 14 g5 If PARTNER MAIL VS 5 2 port Is Installed In Slot Systems Then Assi gn These Exts To Hunt Group 7 20 21 26 27 32 33 38 39 44 45 50 51 56 57 If PARTNER MAIL VS 4 port J Is Installed In Sit Systems Then Assign These 18 19 24 25 30 31 136 37 42 43 48 49 154 55 Exts To Hunt Group 7 20 21 26 27 32 33 38 39 44 45 50 51 56 57 Figure D 5 Voice Messaging System Extensions for PARTNER Plus and PARTNER II Communications Systems Systems with Fax Tone Detect In general 308 modules should be installed to the left of any 206 modules However some systems using Fax Tone Detect with older 308 modules that is 308 Version 1 may not adhere to this recommendation The following illustrations depict the dial plan for these configurations when a voice messaging system is installed gt NOTE While the configurations depicted in the following illustrations may be necessary for your system they are not recommended D 7 Dial Plans 5 Slot Carrier ACS Processor Module 206 308 Vi A PMVS i oje
110. S Cover is on at the owner s extension Call in and make sure the call goes to VMS Cover by the number of rings specified by VMS Cover Rings 117 321 on PARTNER ACS Release 3 0 Verify that you hear the factory set mailbox greeting for the line owner Repeat this procedure for every Line Coverage extension 11 VMS Cover Rings 117 is not available on all systems Check the Programming and Use guide for the communications system 4 37 Initial Programming Generating Configuration Reports When you have verified the system s operation you can generate a Configuration Report as a convenient reference This report can be directed to a PC running a terminal emulation program see Chapter 2 for instructions on how to connect a PC to your PARTNER MAIL VS system When you generate a Configuration Report in the PARTNER MAIL VS system and send it to your PC it is saved in a text file that you can open and print The procedures in this section explain how to set up HyperTerminal the terminal emulation program and how to run the report The Configuration Report shows the current settings for a System Language Mode and Primary and Secondary Language choices a System Administration Prompt Language m For each Automated Attendant All Menu Definitions including Dial 0 Timeout Extension and Selector Code assignments All Automated Attendant line assignments a Line Ownership m For each mailbox
111. S R2 0 or later only Do Not Disturb F 01 DND Privacy F 07 Priv Record a Call F 24 7 RAC VMS Cover F 15 VMSCover Voice Interrupt on Busy Talk Back F 18 VIOB Account Code Entry F 12 2 ACE Background Music F 19 2 Music Call Coverage F 20 XX XX 2 4 6 Cover XX XX Call Forwarding Call Follow Me F 11 XX XX 24 CF XXXX Call Park I XX 3 Park Call Pickup I 6 XX Pickup XX Conference Drop F 06 Drop Contact Closure 1 F 41 2 CC1 Contact Closure 2 F 42 2 CC2 Direct Line Pickup Active Line 68 DLPA Direct Line Pickup lIdle Line I 8 DLPI Exclusive Hold F 02 ExHold Fax Management I XX 2 FAX XX Group Calling Ring Page 17 G or 1 7 G GCall g Group Hunt Ring Signal I 77 G or 77 G Hunt g Group Pickup I 66 G P U Grp g Call Screening F 25 7 SCREEN Caller ID Call Log F 23 6 Calls peiinbey qa 1 Requires Auto Dial button for each extension 2 Button with lights is recommended but not required 3 Extension number can be programmed as Auto Dial button 4 You can program the origination extension only or both the origination and destination extension 5 You can program the Intercom O p i Intercom Autodial I XX or XX 2 Ext XX extension number E Last Number Redial F 05 NE A AS EE Loudspeaker
112. Settings Write response on line for each item Receptionist answers calls during business hours Write Yes or No Yes Number of Lines 104 By default 3 lines per PARTNER ACS processor module or 308EC module 2 lines per 206 module and 4 lines per 400 module are assigned to each extension or to pool 880 in Hybrid mode Write number if different from default Transfer Return Rings 105 By default a transferred call rings 4 times before going to the transfer return extension Write number 0 9 0 no return if different from default Outside Conference Denial 109 By default a conference call can include 2 outside parties Write No if 2 outside parties are not allowed Ring on Transfer 119 By default the caller hears ringing when the call is transferred Write NA if music on hold or silence is desired Toll Call Prefix 402 By default 0 or 1 must be dialed before the area code for a long distance call Write No if 0 or 1 is not required System Password 403 By default no password is programmed to override dialing restrictions and to turn Night Service on and off Write 4 digits if password is desired tg Star Code Dial 410 By default the system inserts a 0 second delay after a valid Central Office star code when it autodials Write number 1 5 of seconds if a longer delay is desired or NO if this feature should not be active Music on Hold 602 By default the Music on
113. TNER and M for MLS Also see Form B2 Identify Group Assignments VMS Only 3 Write T for touch tone or R for rotary 7 To prevent other extensions from interrupting calls assign Automatic Extension Privacy 304 on Form B2 4 Must be standard phone If immediate dialing is required use a dedicated line 8 Check corresponding alert extensions in next column To prevent outside calls at the doorphone remove all Do not assign restrictions that prevent dialing the outside number Forced Account Code Entry 307 or outside lines see Lines Pools Not Assigned on Form B2 groups Also see Form D External Hotline 311 9 Also write Transfer Return Ext No 306 on this form 5 Standard phone is recommended Write extension number of corresponding alert extension or 70 for 10 Extensions 78 and 79 should be assigned to the two voice ports on PARTNER Voice Messaging loudspeaker paging system in next column Extensions 78 and 79 must be assigned to Hunt Group 7 and any previous assignments for Hunt Group 7 should be erased Form B1 System Extensions 5795 Required for PARTNER Advanced Communications System For additional instructions see pages 5 and 6 Lucent Technologies Bell Labs Innovations Identify Telephone Identify Auxiliary Equipment Attached to this Extension Attached to this Extension Write Transfer Write in Return Other Ext No Write Name Description Equipment 306 Call Waiting
114. You can program the extension number 6 Available with ACS R2 0 or later only 7 Available with ACS R3 0 or later F Feature button G Group I Left Intercom button XX Extension Lucent Technologies Bell Labs Innovations Make as many copies as you need Use template and or checklist For additional instructions see pages 9 through 14 Template Instructions e If desired write in line number pool access code dial code feature or auto dial number e If desired write in Line Ringing Imm Del or No from Form B2 e If desired write in Line Access Restriction or Pool Access Restrictiont Out In or No from Form B2 t Available with ACS R2 0 or later only Form C3 PARTNER 18 18D Phone PAGE 3 of 8 Check Desired Button Features write in extension or group number SAMPLE Automatic System Answer 111 6 ASA Direct Extension Dial 113 6 DXD Night Service 503 NightSvc Outgoing Call Restriction 114 1 OCR 04 DEL Wake Up Service 115 Wake Call Screening F 25 7 SCREEN luo OL 1X9 L O O ri O O Eoy O O O O oan VMS O O O DND Auto Dial VM Box IMM mT z 2 05 L 06 L O _ n IMM IMM L IMM O IMM 01 U2 Lo O o
115. able below to determine whether calls are routed on an immediate or delayed basis a For a2 port system If the bottom two extensions are used calls are routed to the subscriber s mailbox on an immediate basis If the remaining four extensions are used calls are routed to the subscriber s mailbox after four rings or after the number of rings programmed in the VMS Cover Ring Interval a Fora 4 port system Ifthe bottom four extensions are used calls are routed to the subscriber s mailbox on an immediate basis If the remaining two extensions are used calls are routed to the subscriber s mailbox after four rings or after the number of rings programmed in the VMS Cover Ring Interval a A 2 port voice messaging system uses the bottom two extension numbers associated with the slot in which the module is installed see Figure 2 1 in Chapter 2 and the figures in Appendix D For example if the module is installed in the last slot on a PARTNER ACS 5 slot configuration see Figure 2 1 it uses extensions 46 and 47 In this case you can use extensions 42 through 47 for guest mailboxes a A 4 port system uses the bottom four extensions for example 44 45 46 and 47 In this case you can use extensions 42 through 47 for guest mailboxes 5 43 System Management Checking a Mailbox s Status 5 44 Use this procedure to determine if a mailbox exists 1 Access the Programming Main Menu a Pre
116. ach Automated Attendant Save the original blank form for future use Check a number to indicate for which Automated Attendant this form is used R equired for Bilingual M ode only if VMS H unt Schedule is set to D ay Only or Always Thank you for calling Software Mexico If you know the extension number dial it now If not please wait and the receptionist will answer your call For Customer Service press 4 For Billing press 5 General I nformation The Day Menu Prompt plays to callers when the VMS Hunt Schedule is set to Always or Day Only and Night Service is off The Day Menu Prompt and the Night Menu Prompt use the same Menu Definition The Day Menu Prompt should contain a welcome and a list of menu options The welcome should introduce the company For example Thank you for calling the Any Travel Agency Let callers know they can switch back to the Primary Language For example For English press 1 The menu options should contain instructions that correspond to the Menu Definition set up on Form 3 If callers can dial extension numbers Direct Extension Transfer the prompt should instruct callers to dial the extension number For example If you know the extension of the person you want to reach dial it now lf callers can dial a single digit to transfer to an extension or group Selector Code Transfer to a mailbox Mailbox Transfer or to a Centrex number Centrex Transfer the
117. age Cannot Switch Between Primary and Secondary Languages Possible Cause The system is set for Monolingual Mode What to do Refer to Modifying the Language Mode in Chapter 5 to determine the system s Language Mode Cannot Understand Language Prompts Possible Cause Either a language you do not understand was inadvertently chosen while programming or you do not understand the factory set language Note that the language for the programming prompts can differ from the system language What to do To change the language to one you understand do one of the following m If the System Administration Language needs to be changed Intercom 7 7 Z or the programmed Voice Mail Auto Dial a D Press button NOH c Enter the password d e f Press Press Select Press VA to to change the programming prompt language the appropriate language return to the Main Menu or hang up to quit m If the system is set for Monolingual Mode and the System Language needs to be changed a b 6 14 Press Press Press Press the num Press Intercom t Oe 6 DOH c Enter the password d D200 ber corresponding to the desired language Error Messages m If the system is set for Bilingual Mode and the Primary Language needs to be changed a z 2 o Error Messages Press Press Intercom D NODS Enter the pa
118. age column of Form A Page 1 Press until the display reads 1 Assigned To program another line press Next item or Prev Item until the appropriate line number displays 8 Press until the display reads 1 Assigned Repeat Steps 7 and 8 for each VMS AA line on Form A Continue with VMS Hunt Delay below 3 Some systems also allow programming from extension 11 Check the Programming and Use guide for the communications system 4 In some countries the procedure code for Group Call Distribution is 205 Check the Programming and Use guide for the communications system 4 22 Communications System Programming VMS Hunt Delay PARTNER ACS Release 3 0 or later Check Form A Page 2 VMS Hunt Delay If Delayed is specified follow the procedure below which allows you to specify the VMS Hunt Delay for each line Otherwise skip re ore EET CRETGRERRET A in this section gt NOTE See VMS Hunt Delay on Page 2 of Form A be sure that the appropriate number of rings is specified The default setting is 2 but you can change this value for more immediate call handling If you do not subscribe to Caller ID service from your local telephone company you can specify 0 rings If you do subscribe to Caller ID service specify 1 To change the VMS Hunt Delay setting as specified on Form A Page 2 1 Press HOO 2 At the Mode prompt enter 7 Day or 2 Night 3 At the Line prompt enter the first
119. ages Automated Attendant Service Automated Attendant Line Assignment You can add lines to an Automated Attendant review assigned lines or delete lines from one Automated Attendant and assign them to another Automated Attendant following the procedures in this section If you use only one Automated Attendant Automated Attendant 1 you do not need to specify the Automated Attendant to which the lines are assigned the system will do this automatically for you Note that if you plan to use Centrex Transfer in the Menu Definition for an Automated Attendant all lines assigned to that Automated Attendant must be Centrex lines Playing the Automated Attendant Line Assignments This procedure lets you listen to the current line assignments for a specified Automated Attendant To review the lines that have been assigned 1 If necessary access the Programming Main Menu If you are already at the Programming Main Menu skip to Step 2 a Press or the programmed Voice Mail Auto Dial button b Press QOQA c Enter the password and press d Press The system plays the system programming options 2 Press for Automated Attendant The system prompts you to specify the Automated Attendant 3 Enter the Automated Attendant number from 1 to 4 4 Press for line assignment The system plays To review line assignments press 1 To adda line press 2 To delete a line press 3 If finished press 5
120. ages with comment to one or more mailboxes on the system to create and send a message to other mailboxes on the system In addition you can assign subscribers permission to have the system outcall a list of up to five telephone and pager numbers according to a predefined schedule whenever a new message is received If you have a PARTNER Advanced Communications System Release 3 0 or later subscribers can listen while a caller is leaving a message in their mailbox You can also assign these subscribers permission to record a conversation while th an internal telephone ey are active on a call at The voice messaging system also offers a built in Tutor feature which is discussed in O SEE Tutor Feature Tutor Feature Tutor is an on line help feature that allows users to easily access and listen to information about commonly used communications system features Any user can access the Tutor users do not have to be voice messaging system subscribers Tutor provides information about the following subjects a System phone features such as ringing patterns volume control speakerphone display buttons and lights a Various types of internal calls including group paging calls voice interrupt on busy calls and hands free answer on intercom calls a System features such as Conference Transfer Auto Dialing Personal Speed Dialing Last Number Redial and Save Number Redial To access the Tutor
121. al button Press QOQA Enter the password and press Press 9 2 Press for Automated Attendant Th 3 En Th e system prompts you to specify the Automated Attendant ter the Automated Attendant number 1 to 4 e system plays To program the Day Menu press 1 For the Night Menu press 2 If finished press 5 27 System Management 5 28 Press 4 Either Press for the Day Menu Press for the Night Menu The system plays To play the menu press 2 to modify the menu press 6 If finished press The system plays To play the menu prompt press 1 To play the Menu Definition press 2 If finished press To play the Menu Prompt press If the system is operating in Monolingual Mode the system plays the Day or Night Menu Prompt depending on your choice in Step 4 If the system is operating in Bilingual Mode the system plays To play Primary Language prompt press 1 To play Secondary Language prompt press 2 If finished press Either Press Q for the Primary Language prompt Press 2 for the Secondary Language prompt The system plays the Day or Night Menu Prompt depending on your choice in Step 4 in either the Primary or Secondary Language depending on your choice in this step Repeat Step 7 to play the Day or Night Menu Prompt in the other language Press to return to the Programming Main Me
122. aller ID Call Log F 23 Calls D t Available with ACS R2 0 or later only Caller ID Inspect F 17 ID fspect o Caller ID Name Display F 16 ID Name c Do Not Disturb F 01 DND m 7 Privacy F 07 Pwl 2 Record a Call F 247 RAC O O VMS Cover F 15 VMSCover Voice Interrupt on Busy Talk Back F 18 VIOB O O O o a O Account Code Entry F 12 2 ACE Background Music F 19 2 Music O O O O O Call Coverage F 20 XX XX 246 Cover XX XX Call Forwarding Call Follow Me F 11 XX XX 24 CF XX XX Oo O 0 O L O Call Park I XX 3 Park Oo O o O Call Pickup 1 6 XX Pickup XX 4 Requires Auto Dial button Conference Drop F 06 Drop for each extension Contact Closure 1 F 41 2 CC1 2 Button with lights is L L O L L Contact Closure 2 F 42 2 Cc2 ieee but not O O O O O Direct Line Pickup Active Line l 68 DLPA 3 Extension number can be Direct Line Pickup ldle Line l 8 DLPI programmed as Auto Dial VMS Exclusive Hold F 02 ExHold button O nli 0O L 4 You can program the g c q C T Fax Management XX 2 FAX XX origination extension only i Group Calling Ring Page 17 G or 1 7 G GCall or both the origination and DND Auto Dial VM Box sa l g 9 destination extension x x Group Hunt Ring Signal 77 G or 1 77 G Hunt g 5 You can program the Oo O _ 0 0m 0 g Group Pickup I 66 G P U Grp g extension number DEL DEL DEL DEL Intercom Autodial 1 XX or XX 2 Ext XX 6 Available with ACS R2 0 Or H 0 H o
123. and Guest Mailboxes 5 41 System Management Hardware Considerations Remember that mailbox numbers and extension numbers are the same You can also assign available mailboxes to extensions that do not have phones connected to them so that guests employees who work off premises most of the time such as salespeople can access messages while on the road See Guest Mailboxes later in this chapter After initial installation you have default mailboxes for extensions 10 through 57 You should always delete unused mailboxes to protect your system s security When you create mailboxes for new subscribers you can use any mailbox in your system s dial plan The dial plan is the maximum number of extensions supported by your system You can have mailboxes for extensions 11 through 57 Note that the mailbox at extension 10 cannot be deleted Figure 2 1 in Chapter 2 and the figures in show the most common dial plans Guest Mailboxes 5 42 You can assign available mailboxes to extensions in the dial plan that do not have phones connected to them Guest mailboxes are useful for employees who work off premises most of the time Guest mailboxes provide all the benefits of a regular mailbox including Outcalling privileges except the subscriber does not receive visual indication of a message deposited in the mailbox since there is no phone and therefore no message waiting light associated with the mailbox Guests can call th
124. and Sally will have Outcalling privileges so that when they are moving around the club or traveling they can be alerted via their pagers to the arrival of messages being left in their voice mailboxes a Sally will also have Record A Call privileges to ensure that she doesn t miss writing down any details while she s arranging tournament schedules and press releases Case Studies Filling Out the Planning Forms This section explains how the System Planner for the PARTNER Advanced Communications System Release 3 0 and the forms for the PARTNER MAIL VS Release 5 Voice Messaging System are filled out based on the facts in the Tennis Land case For brevity CS refers to the System Planner forms for the communications system and VMS refers to the forms for the voice messaging system CS Form A Page 1 of 3 Write the Telephone Numbers in order customer desires Telephone numbers in this column represent Tennis Land s outside lines Two lines are assigned to Automated Attendant 1 and three are assigned to Automated Attendant 2 Stan s personal line is Line 03 VMS AA Numbers in this column correspond to the specific PARTNER MAIL VS Automated Attendant that is 1 2 3 or 4 that will answer calls on Lines 01 02 04 05 and 06 VMS Mail Stan s extension number 12 in this column indicates that the Line Coverage Extension 208 feature sends unanswered calls on Line 03 directly to Stan s mailbox CS Form A Pag
125. ardware that connects lines coming into the building to the extensions in the system and also provides system features Communications system The control unit and system phones plus all other telecommunications devices that are con nected to the control unit Certain releases of PARTNER Plus PARTNER II PARTNER Endeavor and PARTNER Advanced communications systems can be used with the PARTNER MAIL VS sys tem GL 2 Glossary D Delayed Call Handling A communications system feature that allows the communications system to send incoming out side calls to the Automated Attendant Service if the receptionist does not answer by the third ring See also immediate Call Handling Dial plan The range of extensions provided for a specific system Do Not Disturb A communications system feature that can be used in conjunction with automatic or manual voice coverage to send callers immediately to a subscriber s mailbox rather than ringing the extension first E Extension An endpoint in the system that connects telephones or standard devices which can be dialed using the Intercom button See also Extension number and Programming extension Extension coverage A feature that allows callers to leave messages or transfer to another extension when the exten sion called is busy or not answered and Automatic VMS Cover is on Extension jack The six jacks on the lower half of a 206 module or eight jacks on the lower half of the 3
126. assword and press d Press The system plays the system programming options 2 Press for Automated Attendant The system prompts you to specify the Automated Attendant 3 Enter the Automated Attendant number 1 to 4 The system plays To program the Day Menu press 1 For the Night Menu press 2 If finished press 5 29 System Management 5 30 Press Press The system plays To play the menu press 2 to modify the menu press 6 If finished press The system plays Pleas nter a selector code from 1 to 9 Press 0 for the Dial O Timeout action When finished modifying the Menu Definition press If you want to modify only the Day Menu Prompt go to Step 16 Otherwise continue with Step 7 Do one of the following Press to specify a Dial 0 Timeout Extension Go to Step 8 Enter a Selector Code from 1 through 9 Go to Step 9 The system plays the current Selector Code Action or Announcement Number and Announcement then asks Do you want to make a modification Press 9 to confirm or 6 to cancel To specify the Dial 0 Timeout Extension a Press 9 to make the modification b Enter the extension number specified in Column D of Form 3 The default is extension 10 c Go to Step 15 Press Q to confirm that you want to modify this Selector Code The system plays For selector code transfer press 1 for announc
127. at correspond to the Menu Definition set up on Form 3 If callers can dial extension numbers Direct Extension Transfer the prompt should instruct callers to dial the extension number For example If you know the extension of the person you want to reach dial it now lf callers can dial a single digit to transfer to an extension or group Selector Code Transfer to a mailbox Mailbox Transfer or to a Centrex number Centrex Transfer the prompt should provide instructions such as To speak to someone in sales press 6 lf callers can can choose an Announcement include that information For example For directions to our office press 4 4 Completing this F orm Write the message that you want callers to hear when they call during normal business hours including the instructions to the caller for selecting menu options Suggested options include m Remain on the line for assistance m Dial 0 for assistance m To hear this menu again dial 4 Recording the D ay Menu Prompt m Torecord the Day Menu Prompt dial L3 from the Programming Main Menu Automated Attendant V1 02 03 114 Form 5 Night Menu Prompt System L anguage or Primary L anguage Copy this form for each Automated Attendant Save the original blank form for future use Check a number to indicate for which Automated Attendant this form is used R equired if VMS
128. ater in this section Deleting a Mailbox gt NOTE The receptionist s mailbox at extension 10 cannot be deleted To delete mailboxes as specified on Form 2 1 If necessary access the Programming Main Menu If you are already at the Programming Main Menu skip to Step 2 a Press or the programmed Voice Mail Auto Dial button b Press Q9 Q c Enter the password and press d Press The system plays the system programming options 2 Press for Mailboxes 4 16 Voice Messaging System Programming Enter the number of a mailbox to be deleted as indicated on Form 2 followed by Press 4 to delete the mailbox Press to confirm mailbox deletion Repeat Steps 3 through 5 for each mailbox to be deleted Press 4 to return to the Programming Main Menu Continue with the appropriate mailbox administration procedures in the remainder of this section or Line Ownership later in this chapter Modifying a Mailbox s Language To modify a mailbox s language as specified on Form 2 Ai If necessary access the Programming Main Menu If you are already at the Programming Main Menu skip to Step 2 a Press or the programmed Voice Mail Auto Dial button b Press QOQA c Enter the password and press d Press The system plays the system programming options Press for Mailboxes Enter the number of a mailbox whose language is to change as indicated o
129. ation dialog box appears Choose the Yes button to save the HyperTerminal session you just created HyperTerminal closes and an icon for Direct 2400 is displayed The Direct 2400 file contains the settings required to capture the report on the PC To run the report go to Running the Configuration Report 4 39 Initial Programming Running the Configuration Report To generate a Configuration Report ale 10 From the File menu choose Exit to close HyperTerminal 4 40 From the Start menu on your PC choose Programs gt Accessories gt Hyperlerminal The HyperTerminal window appears Click on the Direct 2400 icon that was created when you performed the procedure in Setting Up HyperTerminal The HyperTerminal window appears From the Transfer menu choose Capture Text The Capture Text dialog box appears displaying the default text file to which the Configuration Report will be saved You may change the text file to which the Configuration Report will be saved Be sure to note the path and file name of this text file Choose the Start button At your telephone access the Programming Main Menu If you are already at the Programming Main Menu skip to Step 6 a Press ZZ Z or the programmed Voice Mail Auto Dial button b Press QOQ c Enter the password and press d Press The system plays the system programming options Press for Reports and Backup
130. ay have with the voice messaging system After you are experienced with the system refer to the Menu Map and System system settings pages at the back of this book to confirm or change This guide contains some information about communications system features as well as voice messaging system features For detailed information about a specific communications system feature refer to the Programming and Use guide for the communications system xiii About This Guide Product Safety Statements Product safety statements are identified in this guide by a A CAUTION Indicates the presence of a hazard that will or can cause minor personal injury or property damage if the hazard is not avoided A DANGER Indicates the presence of a hazard that can cause severe or fatal personal injury if the hazard is not avoided How to Comment on This Guide A feedback form is located at the end of this guide after the appendixes If the form is missing send your comments and recommendations for changes to Publications Manager Lucent Technologies 211 Mount Airy Road Room 2W 226 Basking Ridge NJ 07920 FAX 1 908 953 6912 xiv Reference Materials Reference Materials In addition to this guide the following materials are available the order numbers are in parentheses for the voice messaging system a Using the PARTNER MAIL VS Voice Messaging System 585 322 531 provides instructions for using the voice messagi
131. ays and 2 nights in San Juan Voice Messaging Services Puerto Rico for 439 per person including hotel and airfare To speak to an agent about this package or other winter getaways press 8 and extension 13 For after hours callers you can set up Automated Attendant Service to play this prompt You have reached the ANY Travel Agency Our hours are 8 to 5 Monday through Friday Please press 9 to leave a message and we will return your call when the office opens For a system set for Bilingual Mode the Day Menu Prompt should let callers know that they can switch from the Primary Language to the Secondary Language Note that callers can also press while listening to an Automated Attendant Announcement to switch between the Primary and Secondary Languages In the following example the Primary Language is Latin American Spanish and the Secondary Language is U S English Gracias por llamar a Software M xico For English press 1 Si usted tiene tel fono de tonos y conoce l n mero d xtensi n marquelo ahora De lo contrario spere a ser atendido por nuestra operadora For after hours callers you can set up Automated Attendant Service to play this prompt Gracias por llamar a Software M xico For English press 1 Nuestro horario de oficina es de 9 a 14 30 horas y de 16 a 18 horas Si usted tiene tel fono de tonos y conoce 1 n mero de la extensi n a la que desea llamar marquelo ahora
132. between outcall attempts and the number of times the list of Outcalling numbers is dialed for each attempt Subscribers can retrieve messages at their convenience from any touch tone phone either while on site or from an off site location The system informs subscribers of the number of new and old saved messages in their mailboxes and plays new messages first Subscribers can refer to their Using PARTNER MAIL VS booklet for instructions on recording a personal greeting changing a password forwarding a message specifying an outcall list and schedule for Outcalling and performing other Voice Mail Service procedures Voice Mail Service also allows the System Manager to program the voice messaging system See Voice Messaging System Programming in Chapter 3 for more information When subscribers call into the Voice Mail Service they hear this factory set prompt in either the System Language Monolingual Mode or the Primary and Secondary Language Bilingual Mode Welcome to PARTNER MAIL VS Pleas nter extension and Otherwise to access PARTNER Tutor press 4 The System Manager can change on a per mailbox basis the language subscribers hear after they access their mailboxes The mailbox language can be different from the System Language selected in Monolingual Mode or the Primary and Secondary Languages selected in Bilingual Mode Mailboxes The voice messaging system provides 48 mailboxes which are assigned t
133. c System Answer 111 6 ASA Direct Extension Dial 113 6 DXD Night Service 503 NightSvc Outgoing Call Restriction 114 1 OCR 04 DEL Wake Up Service 115 Wake Call Screening F 25 7 SCREEN luo OL 1X9 L O O ri O O Eoy O O O O oan VMS O O O DND Auto Dial VM Box IMM mT z 2 05 L 06 L O _ n IMM IMM L IMM O IMM 01 U2 Lo O oq Intercom g Intercom Ext O gt IN Caller ID Call Log F 23 Calls Caller ID Inspect F 17 ID Inspect PARTNER 18D only In Hybrid mode only if pool 880 is assigned these two buttons are associated with this pool ACS R2 0 or later only Specify Automatic Line Selection Identify extensions programmed as shown 12 Caller ID Name Display F 16 ID Name Do Not Disturb F 01 DND Privacy F 07 Priv Record a Call F 24 7 RAC VMS Cover F 15 VMSCover Voice Interrupt on Busy Talk Back F 18 VIOB Account Code Entry F 12 2 ACE Background Music F 19 2 Music Call Coverage F 20 XX XX 2 4 6 Cover XX XX Call Forwarding Call Follow Me F 11 XX XX 24 CF XXXX Call Park XX 3 Park Call Pickup I 6 XX Pickup XX Confere
134. call the Pro Shop frequently to inquire about Tennis Land s hours and location Therefore when the Automated Attendant Service for this area answers callers can choose to hear either an announcement that includes Tennis Land s hours of operation and directions to the center or another detailing this month s specials When the Automated Attendant Service answers for the court area callers can choose to hear either an announcement that includes Tennis Land s hours of operation and directions to the center or another detailing upcoming competitions ma Callers who receive Automated Attendant Service and want to speak to a person will be able to reach the first available person in either the shop or court area a A general mailbox will be set up for each Automated Attendant Customers who receive Automated Attendant Service and stay on the line or press O for assistance will be routed to this extension Customers who call after business hours will have the option of leaving a message in this mailbox The mailbox at extension 10 will be used as the general mailbox for the pro shop s Automated Attendant The mailbox at extension 11 Sally s mailbox will be used as the general mailbox for the court area Automated Attendant a All key employees will have a mailbox and Automatic VMS Cover Callers will be routed automatically to the appropriate mailbox where they can leave a message when the person they called is not available a Stan
135. change the System Manager s password to prevent unauthorized programming of the system Change the System Administration Prompt Language Option 1 The default System Administration Prompt Language which you can change is the System Language Monolingual Mode or the Primary Language Bilingual Mode From the Programming Main Menu you may also program Language By default the voice messaging system operates in Monolingual Mode with the System Language set to English By selecting Language Mode you can set the system to operate in Bilingual Mode and choose a Primary and Secondary Language Automated Attendant Service By default all lines are assigned to Automated Attendant Service If you are using multiple Automated Attendant Service you should add lines to each of the Automated Attendants In addition you can program a Day Menu for each Automated Attendant including any Dial 0 Timeout Extension and Selector Code Actions by default all Selector Codes are set to Direct Extension Transfer You can also record a Night Menu Prompt to correspond to the Day Menu Voice Mail Service You can use the Mailboxes option of the Programming Main Menu to delete unused mailboxes modify a mailbox s language modify a mailbox s message length or size assign Outcalling privileges and administer Record a Call Line Ownership Initial Programming Checklist When you have completed programming it is strongly reco
136. ck that the Outcalling number is correct In particular verify that the Outcalling number is not a telephone number that is forwarded to an internal telephone number with voice mail coverage If necessary reprogram the number Possible Cause 2 A line may not be available to place a call What to do If all lines are in use when the system attempts to outcall the outcall does not go through The system counts the attempt toward the total number of attempts to be made during the specified time interval If the subscriber s Outcalling Schedule end time occurs before the additional attempts these attempts will not be made by the system You may need to obtain more lines if the problem occurs frequently Possible Cause 3 The message was received outside the hours programmed in the subscriber s Outcalling Schedule or the Outcalling period was ended What to do This is standard operation Outcalling is performed only during the hours specified by the subscriber s Outcalling Schedule Outcalling will be done only for messages received during the Outcalling period Possible Cause 4 Outcalling may not be turned on What to do Have the mailbox owner verify that Outcalling is turned on The System Manager should also verify that the Outcalling privilege is assigned Possible Cause 5 The number may be on the Disallowed Number List What to do Check call restrictions and Allowed and Disallowed Number Lists 6 13 Troubleshooting Langu
137. come to PARTNER MAIL VS Pleas nter extension and Otherwise to access PARTNER Tutor press 4 2 Press QOQA The system plays Enter password and 3 10 Voice Messaging System Programming 3 Enter the Password and press The factory set Password is 1234 The system plays System Manager PARTNER MAIL VS Release 5 The system plays the available programming options It does not play option 9 the Programming Main Menu which only the System Manager can access Press Q to access the Programming Main Menu The system plays To program the System Language press 1 for Automated Attendants press 3 for mailboxes press 4 for line ownership press 6 for Reports and System Backup and Restore press 8 If finished press Programming Guidelines Once you are familiar with the voice messaging system use these shortcuts to save time while programming You do not have to wait for a prompt to play before entering digits for the next step Press to return to the previous menu Press to repeat the current menu options Press at any point during programming to restart at the Programming Main Menu Use the handset rather than the speakerphone to record prompts and greetings to avoid background noise in your recordings To ensure that you hear voice prompts turn off your microphone when programming the system using the speakerphone Hang up to exit programming 3 11 Initial P
138. ct time What to do Refer to System Date 101 System Day 102 or System Time 103 in the Programming and Use guide for the communications system to check the day date or time settings If the day date and time are correct choose one of these procedures and re enter the correct value After one minute this updates the day date and time on the voice messaging system If message headers for new messages are still incorrect call for help 6 9 Troubleshooting Subscriber Cannot Forward Messages to Another Subscriber Possible Cause 1 The system is full or does not have enough space remaining to accommodate the message What to do Old messages must be deleted regularly from mailboxes When a subscriber s mailbox is full the caller cannot leave a message in that mailbox but is given the option of transferring to another extension The sender cannot resend the forwarded message until the system has more message space For all subscribers mailboxes have storage space factory set at 20 minutes but mailboxes can be programmed to store up to 180 minutes of recorded messages or 120 messages whichever comes first The receptionist s mailbox at extension 10 is factory set to store up to 60 minutes of recorded messages or 120 messages whichever comes first You can program a mailbox to store up to 180 minutes of messages Possible Cause 2 The message has been forwarded the maximum of 13 times What to do Verify the number
139. d 5 7 System Management Receptionist s Responsibilities After the voice messaging system is installed the receptionist at extension 10 should be aware of certain interactions between the voice messaging system and the receptionist s extension gt NOTE You can change the receptionist s extension number from the factory setting of extension 10 Use the following list as a guide when you explain these interactions to the receptionist The receptionist s mailbox can handle up to 180 minutes of stored messages or 120 messages For each Automated Attendant unless programmed otherwise when the Automated Attendant Service answers outside calls the receptionist will receive calls from any caller who presses or stays on the line after hearing the menu prompt VMS shows on the display of the receptionist s phone to identify calls transferred by the voice messaging system The personal greeting recorded at the receptionist s mailbox should be more general than personal since this mailbox is the destination for business calls when the receptionist is not available If the receptionist requests a personal mailbox you can create a guest mailbox for that purpose seel ue Maiboxe Tac in this chapter for instructions Once the guest mailbox is created the receptionist should tell people who might call to dial the extension number of the guest mailbox to leave personal messages when they call and hear the Automat
140. d Press AMMO Enter the VMS Cover Rings setting a e amp WN Select another procedure or exit programming mode 3 VMS Cover Rings 117 is not available on all systems Check the Programming and Use guide for the communications system 5 59 System Management Line Coverage This feature lets callers who call in on a covered line leave messages in the mailbox of a specific subscriber Line coverage typically is used for personal lines or outside access to the voice messaging system if Automated Attendant Service is not used There are two ways to Set up line coverage For VMS Line Coverage you must program the voice messaging system s Line Ownership feature and the communication system s Group Call Distribution 206 feature With this method when a call on a covered line is not answered within five rings the voice messaging system routes the caller to the line owner s mailbox The caller then hears the personal greeting for the line owner s mailbox For Extension Line Coverage you only need to program the communication system s Line Coverage Extension 208 feature This method provides flexibility for calls ringing on covered lines You can specify the number of times calls ring at the user s extension before going to the user s mailbox using the communication system s VMS Cover Rings 117 321 on PARTNER ACS 3 0 feature In addition if the user s extension has Do Not Disturb on calls on the
141. d and Simultaneous Paging desired NA Not Assigned or individual extension basis put appropriate extensions in Calling Group 1 Also see Form C Simultaneous Paging Not Active 4 Specify number of rings 1 9 desired before an incoming call is sent to a user s voice mailbox The 11 Write group number 1 6 R No Restriction default setting is 3 rings For PARTNER ACS Release 3 0 or later this can be specified on an individual 12 Check off the same PARTNER MAIL or PARTNER MAIL VS extensions indicated on Form B1 Pooled extension basis For the PARTNER Voice Messaging PC Card extensions 78 and 79 must be assigned to CTP Centralized Telephone 5 In Key mode use Line Assignment 301 to remove lines from or assign lines to extensions In Hybrid Hunt Group 7 7 Programmin p mode use Pool Extension Assignment 314 to remove pools from or assign pools to extensions Pooling available only for ACS R2 0 or later g g 6 Write IN for Inside Only or LOC for Local Only to indicate restrictions for all outgoing calls on all lines Lucent Technologies Bell Labs Innovations Make as many copies as you need Use template and or checklist For additional instructions see pages 9 through 14 Template Instructions e If desired write in line number pool access code dial code feature or auto dial number e If desired write in Line Ringing Imm Del or No from Form B2 e If desired write in Line Access Restriction or Pool Access Restric
142. d by 4 Press 2 for Administer Message Length and Mailbox Size 5 Press C to confirm that you want to change the message length and mailbox size 6 Enter the message length that is a value of 2 to 60 minutes followed by Note that this message length must be less than or equal to the mailbox size that you enter in Step 7 7 Enter the mailbox size that is a value of 5 to 180 minutes followed by Note that this mailbox size must be greater than or equal to the message length that you entered in Step 6 8 Press amp o accept the message length and mailbox size 9 Repeat Steps 3 through 8 for each mailbox that you want to resize 10 Press amp o return to the Programming Main Menu 11 Continue with the appropriate mailbox administration procedures in the remainder of this section or Line Ownership later in this chapter Voice Messaging System Programming Assigning Outcalling Privileges When the system is first installed the Outcalling feature is not assigned to any mailbox A CAUTION Before you assign mailboxes Outcalling privileges you should consider the several system performance and security issues If the privilege is assigned to a majority of users and their message traffic is heavy system performance could be adversely affected Outcalling attempts could be delayed In rare instances an Outcall may not be performed if it is delayed beyond the scheduled Outcalling
143. d calls to this extension from being transferred to the receptionist s extension If you delete a mailbox that was assigned a line owner using VMS Line Cover either delete line ownership from that line or assign a different mailbox as the owner of that line Similarly if you delete a mailbox that was assigned a line owner using Extension Line Coverage either unassign coverage or assign a different extension as the owner SECURITY ALERT As a safeguard against toll fraud delete unused mailboxes To delete a mailbox 1 Access the Programming Main Menu a Press or the programmed Voice Mail Auto Dial button b Press QOQA c Enter the password and press d Press The system plays the system programming options Press 4 to program mailboxes The system tells you how many mailboxes exist and how many are allowed then Pleas nter the mailbox number followed by or press for the next mailbox 5 45 System Management 3 Enter the number of the mailbox you want to delete followed by The system says if the mailbox exists then To administer the message length and mailbox size press 2 To reinitialize the password press 3 To reinitialize the mailbox press 4 To administer Outcalling press 5 To program the Mailbox Language press 6 To administer Record a Call press 7 To delete the mailbox press 3 If finished with this mailbox press or for the next mailbox press
144. d certain prompts that you have recorded for the voice messaging system System Language In Monolingual Mode the language callers hears when they call in to the voice messaging sys tem System Manager The person responsible for managing both the communications and voice messaging systems System phone A telephone that is specifically designed for use with PARTNER systems Models include the PARTNER 34D PARTNER 18D PARTNER 18 PARTNER 6 PARTNER Endeavor 34D PARTNER Endeavor 18D PARTNER Endeavor 18 MLS 34D MLS 18D MLS 12 MLS 12D MLS 6 MDC 9000 MDW 9000 MDW9000LC 6 MDW 9010 and MDW 9030P phones System programming Procedures that allow you to customize the communications system settings System program ming requires a system display phone and is done from extension 10 or 11 if available System Restore A PARTNER MAIL VS Release 5 0 feature that allows you to restore the settings that have been backed up GL 7 Glossary T Telephone programming Customizes extensions to meet the needs of individual users including the assignment of fea tures to programmable buttons Telephone Programming can be done either centrally or from the user s own extension See oe occa aa SRE ming Tutor A voice messaging system feature that lets any communications system user access and listen to information about their phone and commonly used communications system features V VMS Cover button A button on a system
145. d in Using the PARTNER MAIL VS Voice Messaging System In addition you should provide users with the following information about the Outcalling feature Although you are responsible for assigning Outcalling privileges to a subscriber s mailbox the subscriber must turn on Outcalling and specify an Outcalling number or numbers Otherwise the system does not notify subscribers when new messages have arrived in their mailboxes If the subscriber is logged into the system the system does not place an outcall If the subscriber disconnects from the system without listening to a new message the outcall is placed according to schedule Subscribers can specify up to five Outcalling numbers that the system will dial in sequence Anumber can be repeated in this list The list may contain a combination of telephone and pager beeper numbers Each Outcalling number may contain up to 60 digits including the and symbols The 9 dialed to get an outside line must be included in the Outcalling number And a pause should be included after the 9 Subscribers may also specify a schedule that is a start time and end time for Outcalling For example they may direct the system to outcall only during the hours of 7 30 p m to 8 00 a m Otherwise the default schedule is 24 hours The start and end times entered by a user are based on a 24 hour clock however the voice playback of these times is based on the sys
146. dant this form is used Se N E Required if Selector C ode Transfer is set to A nnouncement a Tennis Land is located at 4 Clay Court just 5 blocks east of Anytown Shopping Plaza on Route 66 Our courts are available daily from 6 a m to 8 p m and our pro shop is open EC E eT eee Ss ST for an exhibition match on the 26th Be sure to sign up at the Main Desk for these exciting events For more information press O now Monday through Saturday 10 a m to 6 p m To return to the Main Menu press 7 General I nformation Completing this F orm m An Announcement can be up to four minutes long Write the Announcement and its number in the space provided m Inthe Announcement you can offer callers the option of pressing 4 to repeat this Announcement 7 to return to the Main Menu Recording the A nnouncement s 8 to transfer to an extension or 0 to transfer to the programmed Dial 0 Timeout Extension After playing the Announcement the system waits five seconds to allow the caller to press one of these digit If the caller does not press a digit the system hangs up m To record the Announcement dial 3 from the Programming Main Menu m f the system is set for Bilingual Mode let callers know they can switch the language they hear while listening to the Announcement For example Para espanol marque 1 m Announcements can supply frequently requested informat
147. de 1 ao fF ON At extension 10 or 11 if available make sure the programming overlay is in place over the system phone s dialpad Press Feature O 0 Press System Program System Program Enter the System Password if required Enter the specific programming procedure codes 3 5 Understanding Programming Voice Messaging System Programming Before you program the voice messaging system obtain completed copies of planning forms for the communications system and the voice messaging system These forms provide the names extensions mailboxes and other information required to program the voice messaging system Planning Forms 3 6 You need the following forms for the voice messaging system Form 1 Language Shows the Language Mode Monolingual or Bilingual Also specifies the System Language for Monolingual Mode or the Primary and Secondary Language for Bilingual Mode It also shows the System Administration Prompt Language in which programming prompts are played Form 2 Mailbox Assignments Shows factory set mailbox assignments Allows you to delete mailbox assignments to indicate whether Outcalling capability and Record a Call permission are assigned and to identify the language used for each mailbox Form 3 Menu Definition Shows the lines assigned to an Automated Attendant the Dial 0 Timeout Extension and transfer options for Automated Attendant Service Allows you to specify the act
148. e press 2 To delete a line press 3 If finished press Press to delete an assigned line The system prompts Enter line number followed by To quit press Enter the line number you want to delete gt NOTE You can delete only lines that are assigned to the Automated Attendant that you specified in Step 3 The system plays the line number and its current assignment The system prompts Do you want to delete the line assignment press 9 to confirm or 6 to cancel 5 25 System Management 7 Press Q to confirm that you want to delete the line The system confirms the deletion 8 Press to return to the Programming Main Menu 9 Repeat Steps 2 through 8 for each additional Automated Attendant or hang up to quit Playing the Menu Definition and Announcements 5 26 For a specific Automated Attendant this procedure lets you listen to the current Menu Definition and any Announcement associated with a Selector Code The Menu Definition is accessed through the Day Menu To play the current menu definition 1 Access the Programming Main Menu a Press or the programmed Voice Mail Auto Dial button b Press OQA c Enter the password and press d Press The system plays the system programming options 2 Press for Automated Attendant The system prompts you to specify the Automated Attendant 3 Enter the Automated Attendant number 1 to 4 The system plays
149. e D 5 Program another button for this extension or press Feature O to exit programming mode 6 Label the button at the user s extension 8 In some countries the feature code for Voice Mailbox Transfer is D Check the Programming and Use guide for the communications system 5 69 System Management Voice Mail Auto Dial This intercom Auto Dial button allows the subscriber to access the voice messaging system with one touch of a button To program a Voice Mail Auto Dial button 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program Central Tel Program 2 Enter the number of the extension to be programmed 3 Press a programmable button 4 5 Press left Gntercom AZ Program another button for this extension or press eature 0 to exit programming mode Label the button at the user s extension Station Lock F21 5 70 The Station Lock feature is available only to subscribers with the PARTNER Advanced Communications System Release 3 0 or later and a system or standard touch tone telephone This button allows subscribers to lock their telephones when they leave their desks for an extended period of time To lock the telephone the subscriber presses the programmed Station Lock button and enters a four digit code To unlock the telephone the subscriber re enters the code It is recommended that the button programmed for this purpose have lights To program a Statio
150. e the caller hears the prompt on Form 4 in Spanish the Primary Language When Night Service is off and a call goes to the Automated Attendant Service the caller hears the prompt on Form 4A in English the Secondary Language when he or she presses amp When Night Service is on and a call goes to the Automated Attendant Service the caller hears the prompt on Form 5 in Spanish the Primary Language When Night Service is on and a call goes to the Automated Attendant Service the caller hears the prompt on Form 5A in English the Secondary Language when he or she presses amp E 33 Case Studies Post Installation Recommendations E 34 Since callers can leave a message in the mailbox at extension 10 Vera should record a general business greeting for this extension in both Spanish and English The greetings should instruct callers to press to switch to the other language All employees should record a personal greeting in both Spanish and English The greetings should instruct callers to press to switch to the other language In addition employees change the factory set password for their mailboxes Lucent Technologies Bell Labs Innovations 1 Customer Billing Name Software M xico Form A System Configuration PAGE 1of3 Required for PARTNER Advanced Communications System For additional instructions see pages 2 and 3 6 Administer system for Hybrid Mode PARTNER ACS Release 2 0 or later only
151. e 2 of 3 System Settings Receptionist answers calls during business hours The clerk and salespeople will serve the receptionist function so Yes appears on this line Ring on Transfer 119 NA written in the space provided indicates that music or recorded messages will be played while calls are being transferred Music on Hold 602 The blank line indicates that a Music on Hold device is installed CS Form A Addendum Page 3 of 3 E 4 VMS Hunt Delay 506 Day No of Rings This setting indicates that on all lines the Automated Attendant Service acts as a backup picking up calls after the fourth ring during the day A person has a chance to answer before a call goes to the PARTNER MAIL VS system VMS Hunt Delay 506 Night No of Rings At night when no receptionist is available the Automated Attendant Service is set to answer immediately that is O rings VMS Hunt Schedule 507 The absence of a D or N indicates that the Automated Attendant Service picks up unanswered calls during business hours and after hours This setting is the default Case Study 1 CS Form B1 Page 1 of 4 Write Name Description The names listed for extensions 10 though 17 in this column identify the extension assignments Identify Telephone Attached to this Extension Check in these columns specify the type of telephone each person or location has VMS in the Write Name Description column and chec
152. e Mode either Monolingual or Bilingual and the Language s used by that mode see Figure 5 1 Monolingual Mode supports a single System Language that callers hear when they call in to the voice messaging system Bilingual Mode supports two languages a Primary Language and a Secondary Language Callers who call in to a voice messaging system set for Bilingual Mode hear the Automated Attendant Service menu prompt announcements and mailbox greetings in the Primary Language but have the option of switching to the Secondary Language by pressing Programming Main Menu Press 9 Geen Press System Language Mode Press 1 Language Press 2 Monolingual Bilingual Mode Mode Press Press 2 ha Yes Bilingual Mode Play System Modify System Play Primary Modify Primary Language Language Language Language Press 2 Press 6 Press 1 2 Press 1 6 Play Secondary Modify Language Secondary Press 2 2 Language Press 2 6 Figure 5 1 Language Menu 5 10 Language If you need to change current programming for Language you can use the instructions presented in this section For example If you want to change the Language Mode from Monolingual to Bilingual or Bilingual to Monolingual use Modifying the Language Mode If you want to cha
153. e by programming the System Administration Prompt Language a This login s factory set Password is 1234 If you are the System Manager refer to Changing Your Password in Chapter 5 to change the password before you begin to program the system To begin programming the voice messaging system you make a call to the Voice Mail Service enter the login and password and select option 9 you are not prompted for this option This takes you to the Programming Main Menu shown in Figure 3 1 3 9 Understanding Programming The Programming Main Menu The Programming Main Menu allows you to access the Language Mode and the language s associated with that mode the Automated Attendant Service Menu mailbox assignments line ownership assignments and reports and backup and restore features or AV eM VET EST Tad LEE Intercom Enter Login Press JBE CAVED A acca elem see 1 213 4 7 Select Programming Main Menu Press O Language Automated Mailboxes Line Reports amp Press 1 Attendant Press 4 Ownership Backup Restore Press 3 Press 6 Press 8 Figure 3 1 Programming Menus Accessing the Programming Main Menu To access the Programming Main Menu 1 Press or a programmed Voice Mail Auto Dial button The system plays Wel
154. e messaging system to show the ownership assignments you want to delete then use the updated form while performing the following procedure gt NOTE If you remove line ownership either use Group Call Distribution 206 to remove VMS Line Coverage from the line or assign a new mailbox number as the owner of the line to prevent the system from transferring callers who callin on the covered line to the receptionist s extension To delete an existing line owner assignment 1 Access the Programming Main Menu a Press or the programmed Voice Mail Auto Dial button b Press DOS c Enter the password and press d Press The system plays the system programming options 2 Press for line ownership The system plays To scan line ownership press 2 to assign line ownership press 4 to modify line ownership press 6 To delete line ownership press D 3 Press DB The system plays Pleas nter the CO line number followed by If finished press 4 Enter the number of the outside line whose ownership you want to delete followed by The system responds as follows lf the line has an owner the system tells you the mailbox number of the owner and asks you to confirm the deletion Go to Step 5 lf the line has no owner the system tells you so and asks you to enter another CO line number Enter another line number followed by or go to Step 7 5 65 System Managem
155. e voice messaging system from any touch tone phone to retrieve their messages Review the following notes before you program guest mailboxes a f you have empty slots in the carrier you can assign guest mailboxes to those extensions in the dial plan that correspond to the empty slot s When you assign guest mailboxes it is recommended that you start assignments from the high end of the dial plan On a PARTNER Plus system work backwards from extension 33 on a PARTNER H system work backwards from extension 57 on a PARTNER Advanced Communications System 3 0 or PARTNER Endeavor work backwards from extension 49 or on a PARTNER Advanced Communications System 1 0 or 1 1 work backwards from extension 41 a After you create a guest mailbox use Automatic VMS Cover later in this section to assign automatic coverage to the guest mailbox Calls to these extensions are routed immediately to the mailbox the call does not try ringing the extension first a f you do not have empty slots in the carrier you can assign guest mailboxes to the unused extension numbers associated with the voice messaging system module You also need to assign automatic coverage to these guest mailboxes You can use any of the six extensions on the voice messaging system module for guest mailbox assignments Modifying Mailboxes Calls routed to these extensions are routed to the subscriber s mailbox depending on the extension used Refer to the t
156. eature that provides voice mail coverage for a subscriber s unan swered transferred and intercom calls GL 1 Glossary a B Bilingual Mode A Language Mode setting that_allows messages and prompts to be played in either of two lan guages See also Monolingual Mode a C Call Answer Service A component of the voice messaging system that lets callers leave a message at an unanswered extension or transfer to another extension Calling Group A group of extensions that can be called simultaneously by dialing a group calling code This feature may not be available on your system check your Programming and Use guide See also Call Screening A PARTNER ACS R3 0 feature that allows PARTNER MAIL VS subscribers to listen while a caller is leaving a message in their voice mailbox Centralized Telephone Programming A method of telephone programming that lets you program individual extensions in the system from a system display phone at extension 10 or 11 if available Centralized Telephone Program ming is an alternative to Extension Programming Centrex Transfer A Selector Code Action that directs the Automated Attendant to transfer calls to a specified Cen trex number when a caller presses the digit that is Selector Code associated with this action Configuration Report A PARTNER MAIL VS 5 0 feature that allows you to create a record of the system s current settings and direct the record to a PC Control Unit H
157. ecord a Call press 7 To delete the mailbox press 3 If finished with this mailbox press or for the next mailbox press Press The system plays To play Mailbox Language press 2 To modify Mailbox Language press 6 If finished press Press 2 The system plays Mailbox language is LANGUAGE where LANGUAGE is the current language Press to return to the Programming Main Menu or hang up to quit Modifying Mailboxes Modifying a Mailbox s Language Update Form 2 for the voice messaging system to show the languages assigned to mailboxes then use the updated form while performing the following procedure To modify a mailbox s language 1 Access the Programming Main Menu a Press or the programmed Voice Mail Auto Dial button b Press QOQA c Enter the password and press d Press The system plays the system programming options Press to program mailboxes The system tells you how many mailboxes currently exist and how many are allowed then Pleas nter the mailbox number followed by or press for the next mailbox Enter the number of the mailbox whose language you want to modify ollowed by The system plays Mailbox XX exists To administer the message length and mailbox size press 2 To reinitialize the password press 3 To reinitialize the mailbox press 4 To administer Outcalling press 5 To program the Mailbox Language p
158. ed Attendant Service prompt Additionally the receptionist can record a note on the personal greeting at extension 10 to notify callers of the guest mailbox For example the personal greeting for extension 10 can also say If you would like to leave a personal message for Ms Smith dial AOO In this example 33 represents the 2 digit extension number of the guest mailbox Remind the receptionist to log in to the guest mailbox regularly to check for messages since the guest mailbox does not have an associated phone with a message waiting light If Automatic VMS Cover is not assigned to extension 10 you should program a VMS Cover button and a Do Not Disturb button on the system phone at extension 10 Then instruct the receptionist to press both the VMS Cover and Do Not Disturb buttons to turn the features on whenever the receptionist leaves the desk or leaves for the day This ensures that any calls routed to extension 10 when the receptionist is away are immediately covered by the voice messaging system If the receptionist has Automatic VMS Cover program only the Do Not Disturb button at the extension General Information If selector code 9 on the Automated Attendant Service menu is left at the factory setting which is highly recommended callers who press 9 from the Automated Attendant Menu are routed directly to the receptionist s mailbox to leave a message If this is the case let the receptionist know that he or she
159. ee Ooo J o f ee Ooo es S O E E o Ooo es S oS er a a E ae es ee ee rs es a S tS eS E rs as ee Oooo o er ee rs es es E rs S ee eS ee es ee a ee eee eee 1 Fora ring pattern other than the standard one enter valid values 2 8 13 Installation Date 14 Order Nos 15 Sales Support Representative s Name Telephone No Lucent Technologies Bell Labs Innovations Ext Write Name Description Form B1 System Extensions Identify Auxiliary Equipment Attached to this Extension Identify Telephone Attached to this Extension Write in Other Equipment Button Display 2 18 Button 2 FAX Machine Extension 6017 PARTNER Voice Messaging 10 Contact Closure Group 612 Answering Machine 34 Button Display 2 Intercom Autodialer 12 Button Display 2 12 Button 2 Cordless Wireless Standard LL Call Waiting 316 External Hotline 311 4 Alert Extension for Hotline PARTNER MAIL PARTNER MAIL VS PassageWay Doorphone 1 604 8 Alert Extensions 606 for Doorphone 1 Doorphone 2 605 8 Alert Extensions 606 for Doorphone 2 AA Extension 607 9 Extra Alert PAGE 1of4 Required for PARTNER Advanced Communications System For additional instructions see pages 5 and 6 Write Transfer Return Ext No 306 13 Ivan Coach NiNii8 NN Carol Coach t l Pat Coach l I Sho zS S
160. elapse between attempts Before subscribers can turn on Outcalling specify the Outcalling number and establish an Outcalling schedule you must assign Outcalling privileges for their mailboxes You may also remove Outcalling privileges by following the instructions below Be sure to update Form 2 to indicate the current status of Outcalling privileges for each mailbox Ay CAUTION Before you assign mailboxes Outcalling privileges you should review the system performance and security issues discussed in detail in Chapter 1 There are no restrictions on the Outcalling Numbers entered by subscribers Therefore it is strongly recommended that you limit the number of subscribers who have the Outcalling privilege And call restrictions should be used for the communications system See Outgoing Call Restriction in Chapter 4 for details Modifying Mailboxes To assign or remove Outcalling privileges for a mailbox 1 Access the Programming Main Menu a Press or the programmed Voice Mail Auto Dial button b Press QOQA c Enter the password and press d Press The system plays the system programming options 2 Press to program mailboxes The system tells you how many mailboxes exist and how many are allowed then Pleas nter the mailbox number followed by or press for the next mailbox 3 Enter the number of the mailbox for which you want to activate deactivate Outcalling privileges followed by
161. elector code 9 is different from selector codes 1 through 8 If you leave selector code 9 at the factory setting outside callers are transferred directly to the receptionist s mailbox although you can specify another mailbox where they can leave a message This is especially useful for night operation If you use it callers are routed directly to the receptionist s mailbox the system does not ring the extension first You can also change the factory setting and use selector code 9 for any of the following purposes Selector Code Transfer You can assign any of the selector codes to one specific extension or group Then when a caller presses the single digit selector code the system transfers the call to the specific extension or Calling Group or Hunt Group that you assigned to that digit Mailbox Transfer You can assign any of the selector codes to transfer a call to a preprogrammed mailbox number Then when a caller presses the single digit selector code the system transfers the call to the specific mailbox that you assigned to this selector code action Automated Attendant Service Centrex Transfer If your business uses Centrex service supplied by the local telephone company you can assign any of the selector codes to transfer a call to a preprogrammed Centrex number Then when a caller presses the single digit selector code the system transfers the call to the Centrex number that you assigned to this selector code action If you
162. em to delete unnecessary messages from their mailboxes on a regular basis To enable the Record a Call RAC feature for a mailbox as specified on Form 2 1 If necessary access the Programming Main Menu If you are already at the Programming Main Menu skip to Step 2 a Press or the programmed Voice Mail Auto Dial button b Press OQA c Enter the password and press d Press The system plays the system programming options Voice Messaging System Programming Press for Mailboxes Enter the number of a mailbox whose Record a Call permission is to change as indicated on Form 2 followed by Press for Record a Call Administration Enter a Record a Call message length from 1 to 60 minutes followed by Repeat Steps 3 through 5 for each mailbox whose Record a Call permission is to be changed Press to return to the Programming Main Menu Continue with the next section Line Ownership Line Ownership Before you begin locate Form 6 for the voice messaging system If Form 6 is filled out use the procedure below to assign ownership If Form 6 is not filled out skip to Communications System Programming Assigning Line Ownership To assign an owner to an outside line as specified on Form 6 1 an A WwW PY O If necessary access the Programming Main Menu If you are already at the Programming Main Menu skip to Step 2 a Press or the programmed Voice Mail Auto Dial b
163. em users know about this feature and recommend that users stick the Tutor Service label provided with the voice messaging system hardware into the depression for the handset mouthpiece on the base of their system phone To access the Tutor menu users simply call the voice messaging system by dialing and enter after they hear the Please enter extension prompt Voice prompts request the user to enter topic and subtopic numbers General Information The available topics are 1 Autodial Features 3 Fixed Features 1 Last Number Redial 1 Transfer 2 Save Number Redial 2 Conference 3 Personal Speed Dial 4 About Your Phone 4 Intercom Auto Dial 1 Buttons and Lights 5 Outside Auto Dial 2 Display 2 Internal Calls 3 Speakerphone 1 Hands Free Answer on Intercom 4 Volume 2 Voice Interrupt On Busy 5 Ring Patterns 3 Group Paging Information about each subtopic is presented in short easy to understand segments After a segment plays the user hears one beep or two beeps a One beep means that there is more information about the subtopic The user can press to replay the previous segment or to play the next segment a Two beeps indicate the end of the information about the subtopic The user can press to replay the previous segment or to return to the Tutor Main Menu gt NOTE Tutor s prompts play in either the System Language selected for Monolingual Mode or the Primary Language selected for Bilingual Mode This cannot be change
164. ement press 3 for direct extension transfer press 5 for mailbox transfer press 6 for Centrex transfer press 7 If you want to return the Selector Code to the factory setting Direct Extension Transfer for Selector Code 1 through 8 go to Step 10 If you want to assign a different extension or group to the Selector Code go to Step 11 If you want to change the Announcement go to Step 12 If you want to specify Mailbox Transfer to the Selector Code go to Step 13 If you want to specify Centrex Transfer to the Selector Code go to Step 14 Automated Attendant Service 10 To return to Direct Extension Transfer a Press For direct extension transfer the selector code represents a range of extensions For example selector code 1 allows outside callers to transfer directly to any extension that begins with a 1 extensions 10 19 b Go to Step 15 To change the Selector Code Transfer extension or group a Press O b Enter the desired extension or group number specified in Column D of Form 3 c Go to Step 15 To change an Announcement a Press b Enter the Announcement number 1 or 2 specified in Column D of Form 3 c Go to Step 18 To change Mailbox Transfer a Press b Enter the desired mailbox number specified in Column D of Form 3 c Go to Step 15 To change Centrex Transfer a Press 7 b Enter the desired Centrex
165. en callers can press to switch between the languages 5 17 System Management Programming Main Menu Press E Automated Attendant Press E Specify Automated Attendant Number Day Menu Night Menu Press 1 Press 2 Yes No Bilingual No Mode Bilingual Mode Play Night Modify Night Prompt Prompt Modify Menu Definition and or Press 2 1 Press 6 Day Prompt Press 6 Play Menu Definition and Play Primary Modify Primary Announcement Night Prompt Night Prompt Press 2 2 1 Press 2 1 1 Press 4 1 Play Secondary Modify Secondar Night Prompt Night Prompt Play Primary Modify Menu Press 2 1 Q Press 6 Day Prompt Definition Press 2 1 1 and or Primary Day Prompt Press 6 Automated Play Secondary Play Menu Day Prompt Definition and Press 2 1 2 Announcement Press 2 Yes Play Primary Play Secondary Announcement Announcement Press i Press 2 Review Delete Assigned Lines Assigned Lines Press 1 Press x 3 Figure 5 2 Automated Attendant Service Menu 5 18 Automated Attendant Service I
166. en to a caller leaving a message in the subscriber s mailbox Note that this feature is available only to subscribers using a PARTNER ACS Release 3 0 or later a Specify a Personal Operator for their mailbox a Have the system outcall a list of specified telephone and pager numbers according to a predefined schedule whenever a new message is received m Transfer to another extension or to the receptionist s extension m Listen to and forward recorded conversations at your extension Note that this feature is available only to subscribers using a PARTNER ACS Release 3 0 or later with a 4 port PARTNER MAIL VS R5 0 configuration for whom the System Manager has administered the feature a Adjust the playback volume while listening to messages To increase the volume of messages being played back press 4 or press Z to decrease the volume A subscriber s extension number and mailbox number are the same When a caller leaves a message the voice messaging system places the message in the subscriber s mailbox and turns on the message light if available at the subscriber s phone when a new message is received If the subscriber has Outcalling privileges the system will call the list of telephone and pager numbers specified by the subscriber if the message is received during the hours specified in the subscriber s Outcalling schedule and Outcalling is turned on The 1 13 Overview subscriber can also define the time interval
167. ent Press to confirm that you want to delete the ownership assignment The system plays Deleted Repeat Steps 4 and 5 to delete other line ownership assignments Press to return to the Programming Main Menu or hang up to quit Group Call Distribution Option 3 Use this procedure to modify the assignment of outside lines for VMS Line Coverage Update Form A Page 1 Line Coverage of the System Planner for the communications system to show modifications to VMS MAIL lines before you begin To modify VMS MAIL lines assignments J Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program Enter System Password if required 2 3 Press M OOO 4 5 At the Group prompt press Z Atthe Line prompt enter the first VMS MAIL line to be programmed as specified in the Line Coverage column of Form A Page 1 Press until the display reads 3 VMS Line Coveror2 Not Assigned Be careful not to choose 1 Assigned because you will assign Automated Attendant Service coverage rather than ownership to the line To program another line press Wextitem or Prev Item until the appropriate line number displays Then press until 3 VMS Line Cover or 2 Not Assigned is displayed Press eature 0 to exit programming 6 In some countries the procedure code for Group Call Distribution is 205 Check the Programming and Use guide for the communications system 5 66 Line Coverage Exte
168. entally picking up calls sent to the voice messaging system Update Form B1 of the System Planner for the communications system to show Automatic Extension Privacy 304 as Assigned for the PARTNER MAIL VS extensions To change the Automatic Extension Privacy setting 1 Press eature 0 0 System Program System Program Enter the System Password if required Press AHOA Enter the first PARTNER MAIL VS extension number specified on Form B1 A OO N o Press Next Data until the display reads 1 Assigned 6 Press Nextitem or Prev item until the next PARTNER MAIL VS extension number specified on Form B1 displays 7 Press Next Data until the display reads 1 Assigned 8 If additional PARTNER MAIL VS extensions are specified on Form B1 repeat Steps 6 and 7 for each one 9 Press Feature O to exit programming 5 37 System Management VMS Hunt Schedule PARTNER ACS Release 3 0 or later Use this communications system procedure to specify when the communications system is to route calls to the voice messaging system You can change this setting for each line assigned to the Automated Attendants Update Form A Page 2 of the System Planner for the communications system to show modifications to the VMS Hunt Schedule setting before you begin To change the VMS Hunt Schedule setting 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program Enter the Syste
169. er The company has employees assigned at extensions 10 gh 25 Therefore the company leaves Selector Codes 1 and 2 at the factory g Direct Extension Transfer This leaves Selector Codes 3 through 9 available for Selector Code Transfer In this case ANY Travel Agency assigns Selector Code 3 to extension 21 and Selector Codes 4 and 5 to Hunt Groups 1 and 2 respectively A sample Day Menu Prompt for the ANY Travel Agency follows Thank you for calling the ANY Travel Agency If you know the extension of the person you are calling enter the extension number now To speak with a cruise specialist press 3 For corporate travel press 4 For personal travel press 5 For assistance press 0 or if you have a rotary phone stay on the line 5 21 System Management A sample night menu prompt for the ANY Travel Agency follows You have reached the ANY Travel Agency Our business hours are 9 to 5 Monday through Friday To leave a message press 9 and we will return your call as soon as possible If this is an emergency press 6 for our special traveler s assistance information In this case the caller who needs after hours assistance can press 6 to hear the following Announcement If you have misplaced your airline tickets or passport missed your flight or limousine pickup or have any other travel emergency after ANY Travel s standard business hours call 1 800 555 6060 to speak with our special traveler
170. er Service 6 7 Answer Calls 6 7 Call Answer Service Terminates Message While Caller Is Recording 6 7 Messages Cannot Be Deposited in Mailbox 6 7 a Voice Mail Service Date or Time in Message Headers Is Incorrect 6 Subscriber Cannot Forward Messages to Another Subscriber 6 9 Subscriber Unable to Log In to Voice Mail 6 9 6 9 10 Subscribers Hear Busy Signal When Calling In to Voice Mail 6 10 Cannot Switch Between Primary and Secondary Languages 6 14 Cannot Understand Language Prompts 6 14 m Error Messages 6 15 A Specifications A 1 B FCC Information B 1 a Federal Communications Commission FCC Interference Information B 1 FCC Notification and Repair Information i i B 2 a C Notification and Repair Information B 3 icati i B 4 Renseignements sur la notification du minist re des Communications du Canada et la r paration vii Contents i C 1 Repair Information C 1 In Warranty Repairs C 1 Post Warranty Repairs C 2 a Lucent Technologies Warranty and Limitation of Liability C 3 Limitation of Liability C 4 C Warranty Information D Dial Plans D 1 Systems with Fax Tone Detect D 7 E Case Studies E 1 Purpose E 1 m Case Study 1 E 2 About the Customer E 2 Filling Out the Planning Forms E 4 Post Installation Recommendations E 8 m Case Study 2 E 29 About the Customer E 29 Filling Out the Planning Forms E 30 Post Installation Recommendations E 34
171. er and ringer equivalence number REN which can be found on the right hand side of the primary carrier You must also notify your local telephone company if and when this equipment is permanently disconnected from the line s a Repair Instructions If you experience trouble because your equipment is malfunctioning the FCC requires that you disconnect the equipment from the network and not use it until the problem has been corrected Repairs to this equipment can only be made by the manufacturer its authorized agents or by others who may be authorized by the FCC In the event repairs are needed on this equipment please contact the Lucent Technologies Technical Service Center at 1 800 628 2888 For warranty information see Appendix C Rights of the Local Telephone Company If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network the local telephone company may discontinue your service temporarily If possible they will notify you in advance But if advance notice is not practical you will be notified as soon as possible You will also be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC Your local telephone company may make changes in its facilities equipment operations or procedures that affect the proper functioning of this equipment If they do you will be notified in advance to give you an opportunity to maintain uninterrupted telephone service B 2 IC Notification and Repair Information IC Notification and
172. er is to be assigned 3 Press until the display reads 1 Assigned 4 To program another extension press Next item or Prev item until the extension number shows on the display 5 Press until the display reads 1 Assigned 6 Repeat Steps 4 and 5 for each extension to which Automatic VMS Cover is to be assigned 7 Continue with VMS Cover Rings below T Extension Line Coverage 208 is not available on all systems Check the Programming and Use guide for the communications system 4 29 Initial Programming VMS Cover Rings PARTNER ACS Release 3 0 or later Check Form A Page 2 to see if VMS Cover Rings 321 is different from the factory setting of 3 If it is follow the procedure below beginning with Step 1 to specify the VMS Cover Rings for each extension If not skip to Step 3 of the procedure below To change the number of times calls ring before they are sent to the voice messaging system as indicated on Form A Page 2 VMS Cover Rings 1 Press AHOA 2 Enter the number of the first extension for which VMS Cover Rings is to be specified 3 Press until the appropriate value displays 4 To program another extension press Next item or Prev item until the extension number shows on the display 5 Press until the appropriate value displays 6 Repeat Steps 4 and 5 for each extension for which VMS Cover Rings setting is to be specified 7 Press Feature O to exit programming mode 8 C
173. erage using either VMS Line Coverage or Extension Line Coverage Telephone Button Programming Allows you to program buttons on subscriber s system phones for convenient use of voice messaging system features 5 1 System Management If you are a new System Manager you should review the following section for general information that you need to know in your new role You should use the rest of this chapter on an as needed basis Also if you have not done so already you should read Chapter 1 for a description of the voice messaging system s features and services and Chapter 3 for an overview of voice messaging system and communications system programming General Information This section tells you how to change the System Manager s password which is required for changing voice messaging system settings It also provides information that you should share with all system users and other information that is specifically for the receptionist at extension 10 Changing Your Password 5 2 The factory setting for login 99 the System Manager s Password is 1234 To prevent unauthorized programming of the system you should change the default password immediately after installation or any time the password has been reset You can assign up to four digits for a Password It is recommended that you create a Password from random non sequential digits If you change the Password and forget it you must contact the BCS Technical Service
174. ess The system plays the system programming options Press to program mailboxes The system tells you how many mailboxes exist and how many are allowed then Pleas nter the mailbox number followed by or press for the next mailbox Enter the number of the mailbox you want to reinitialize followed by The system plays Mailbox XX exists To administer the message length and mailbox size press 2 To reinitialize the password press 3 To reinitialize the mailbox press 4 To administer Outcalling press 5 To program the Mailbox Language press 6 To administer Record a Call press 7 To delete the mailbox press 3 If finished with this mailbox press or for the next mailbox press Press The system plays Mailbox XX has YY new and ZZ old messages Do you want to reinitialize this mailbox Press 9 to confirm or 6 to cancel 5 49 System Management 5 Press The system plays Reinitialized 6 Press to return to the Programming Main Menu or hang up to quit Changing Mailbox Message Length or Size 5 50 You can adjust a subscriber s mailbox message length o r storage space by changing the default message length 4 minutes or mailbox size 60 minutes for the receptionist s mailbox and 20 minutes for all others 2 to indicate changes to the message length or size of a The message length administered by this procedure app Be sure update to Form mailbox
175. ess to approve the Day Menu Prompt or Announcement You have now completed this procedure For systems operating in Bilingual Mode press to approve the Day Menu Prompt or Announcement Continue with Step 22 If you want to record the Day Menu Prompt or Announcement in the Secondary Language continue with Step 23 otherwise skip to Step 25 Press and record the Menu Prompt from Form 4A or Announcement from Form 3B Press C after recording Choose an option or skip this step Press o immediately re record the Day Menu Prompt or Announcement Begin recording immediately after the beep press after recording Repeat if desired Press o play back the Day Menu Prompt or Announcement Repeat if necessary Press o delete the Day Menu Prompt or Announcement and return to Step 23 to be prompted for re recording Press to approve this Day Menu Prompt or Announcement Press to approve and save all entries The Menu Definition Day Menu Prompts and Announcements if any now take effect Press to return to the Programming Main Menu or hang up to quit Automated Attendant Service Modifying the Night Menu Prompt Update Forms 5 and 5A for the voice messaging system to show modifications to the Night Menu Prompt then use the updated form s while performing the following procedure To change the Night Menu Prompt ile Access the Programming Main Menu a Press ntercom 7 7 or the pro
176. f DXD is checked specify the following Direct Extension Dial Delay 112 By default a call rings 2 times before it is answered by the system Write number 0 9 if different from default Direct Extension Dial Record Playback I 892 message of up to 20 seconds that caller hears when call is answered with the Direct Extension Dial feature Write message below and record from extension 10 or 11 ASA VMS AA PARTNER ACS Release 3 0 or later only If VMS AA is checked you can specify a different Hunt Schedule and Hunt Delay for each line VMS AA Hunt Schedule 507 The Hunt Schedule specifies when your VMS answers your calls Your three options are Always Night Only or Day Only The default is Always With the default option VMS will always answer your calls after the number of rings established in VMS Hunt Delay On Form A Addendum write D if Day Only is desired or N if Night Only is desired VMS AA Hunt Delay 506 The Hunt Delay specifies how many rings are allowed before your VMS answers your incoming calls You can establish a different delay schedule for day and night calls For Day Night or Always the ring delay can be set to 0 through 6 rings The default setting is 2 rings To change the delay schedule for the daytime on Form A Addendum under VMS Hunt Delay Day enter the number of daytime rings desired To change the delay schedule for the nighttime on Form A Addendum under
177. f service Automated Attendant Service Answers outside calls and transfers them to the destination selected by the caller or plays an Announcement selected by the caller Call Answer Service Allows the caller to leave a message or to transfer to another extension if the called party is busy or does not answer a Voice Mail Service Allows subscribers to listen to messages and manage their own mailbox Figure 1 1 provides an overview of the features associated with each service VMS Programming CS Programming Voice Messaging Services Automated Attendant Service Multiple Prompts caller to make a choice from a menu of options then transfers the call to the selected destination including an extension mailbox or Centrex number or plays the selected announcement Communications system always routes calls to Automated Attendant Service PARTNER MAIL VS Voice Messaging System answer VMS Hunt Schedule Communications system routes calls to Auto mated Attendant Service when Night Service is off VMS Hunt Delay Immediate Night Only Communications system routes calls to Auto mated Attendant Service when Night Service is on Delayed Call Answer Service Prompts caller to leave a message or transfer to another extension or transfer to a personal operator when the called party does not VMS Extension Coverage Caller hears the called party
178. f you know the extension of the person you want to reach dial it now lf callers can dial a single digit to transfer to an extension or group Selector Code Transfer to a mailbox Mailbox Transfer or to a Centrex number Centrex Transfer the prompt should provide instructions such as To speak to someone in sales press 6 lf callers can can choose an Announcement include that information For example For directions to our office press 4 Write the message that you want callers to hear when they call during normal business hours including the instructions to the caller for selecting menu options Suggested options include m Remain on the line for assistance m Dial 0 for assistance m To hear this menu again dial 4 Recording the D ay Menu Prompt m Torecord the Day Menu Prompt dial L3 from the Programming Main Menu Automated Attendant 1 42 3 4 Form 5 Night Menu Prompt System L anguage or Primary L anguage Copy this form for each Automated Attendant Save the original blank form for future use Check a number to indicate for which Automated Attendant this form is used R equired if VMS H unt Schedule is set to N ight Only or Always Thank you for calling Tennis Land s Pro Shop We are currently closed To get information about our location and hours press 5 To get information about this month s special offers press 6
179. f you need to change current programming for the Automated Attendant Service you can use the instructions presented in this section For example a f you want to add or delete lines assigned to any of the four Automated Attendants use Modifying Lines Assigned to Automated Attendants and If you want to change the transfer options available for outside callers use Modifying the Menu Definition Day Menu Prompt and Announcements Modifying the Night Menu Prompt to update the options prompts and or Announcements callers hear a If you add a line to the system that requires Automated Attendant Service use Group Call Distribution to include the new line a If you want to change the way Automated Attendant Service handles calls use VMS Hunt Delay Jand or VMS Hunt Schedule Note that the settings you choose for VMS Hunt Delay and VMS Hunt Schedule on one Automated Attendant will apply to all Automated Attendants if you have a PARTNER Plus PARTNER II PART Release 1 0 or 2 0 If you have a selections can be made for each NER Endeavor or PARTNER ACS PARTNER ACS 3 0 or later these ine on each Automated Attendant 5 19 System Management Menu Definition Prompt and Announcements 5 20 When the Automated Attendant Service answers a call the caller hears a menu promp that requests the caller to press one or more buttons on the dialpad to transfer to a spec
180. fer to an extension or group Selector Code Transfer to a mailbox Mailbox Transfer or to a Centrex number Centrex Transfer the prompt should provide instructions such as To leave a message for Pat press 6 Keep in mind that there are no group mailboxes Automated Attendant 1 2 3 4 Form 5A Night Menu Prompt Secondary L anguage Copy this form for each Automated Attendant Save the original blank form for future use Check a number to indicate for which Automated Attendant this form is used R equired for Bilingual M ode only if VMS H unt Schedule is set to N ight Only or Always Good Evening Thank you for calling Software Mexico Our business hours are from 9 00 to 2 30 and 4 00 to 6 00 If you know the extension number and you want to leave a message dial it now If not please wait and leave a message for the attendant General I nformation The Night Menu Prompt plays to callers when the VMS Hunt Schedule is set to Always or Night Only and Night Service is on The Night Menu Prompt and the Day Menu Prompt use the same Menu Definition The Night Menu Prompt should contain a welcome and a list of menu options The welcome should introduce the company For example You have reached the Any Travel Agency Our hours are 9 AM to 5 PM Monday through Friday Let callers know they can switch back to the Primary Language For example For English press 1 The menu opt
181. fer to the appropriate chapters to help you Install the voice messaging system hardware Chapter 2 provides instructions for installing and upgrading the voice messaging system module in the communication system s control unit Refresh your memory about programming Chapter 3 offers general programming information for both the communications system and the voice messaging system Perform initial programming Chapter 4 provides step by step programming instructions for integrating the voice messaging system with the communications system It also provides test procedures that you should use after installation to ensure that the system is working properly Solve problems Chapter 6 provides information to help you identify and correct problems you may have with the voice messaging system If you are the System Manager refer to the appropriate chapters to help you Learn about the voice messaging system Chapter 1 describes the voice messaging system s features and services Learn about programming Chapter 3 offers general programming information for both the communications system and the voice messaging system Manage the voice messaging system Chapter 5 provides instructions for changing system settings to accommodate the changing needs of the business It also offers guidelines for setting up and using the receptionist s extension Solve problems Chapter 6 provides information to help you identify and correct problems you m
182. ferent lines within your business Automated Attendant Service see Figure 5 2 can provide both day and night operation so callers can hear an appropriate prompt in either the System or Primary Language when they call your company The voice messaging system switches to day or night operation depending on the setting of the Night Service button at extension 10 the receptionist s extension You can customize the day and or night menu to welcome the caller and offer the caller a list of options for transferring to a system extension group or mailbox or for hearing an Announcement that you record If your business has multiple locations connected with Centrex service from your local telephone company you can also program the system to transfer calls to a specific Centrex number when the caller selects the associated option from the menu In addition you can specify an extension Dial 0 Timeout Extension to which calls are transferred when a caller dials O or does not select one of the listed options on the menu For each Automated Attendant you can record up to two Announcements of up to four minutes each Announcements can tell callers about your business hours and location emergency cover information and seasonal or special offers If the system is set for Bilingual Mode you can record up to two Announcements in each language Be sure to record the Day and Night Menu Prompts in both the Primary and Secondary Languages as well Th
183. for Selector Code Transfer or Annc Required for Automated Attendant Service Script Automated Attendant Announcements in Sys tem or Primary Language Required if Annc is assigned to a Selector Code Script Automated Attendant Announcements in Sec ondary Language Required for Bilingual Mode if Annc is assigned to a Selector Code Script the Day Menu Prompt in System or Primary Language Required if VMS Hunt Schedule is set to Day Only or Always Script the Day Menu Prompt in Secondary Lan guage Required for Bilingual Mode if VMS Hunt Schedule is set to Day Only or Always Script the Night Menu Prompt in System or Primary Language Required if VMS Hunt Schedule is set to Night Only or Always Script the Night Menu Prompt in Secondary Lan guage Required for Bilingual Mode if VMS Hunt Schedule is set to Night Only or Always Assign Line Ownership cannot be assigned to lines assigned Automated Attendant coverage Required if VMS Line Coverage exists for one or more lines 3 8 Voice Messaging System Programming Using System Programming A special login number is required to program the voice messaging system The following information applies to this login a The login number is 99 a By default the language associated with this login is either the System Language chosen for Monolingual Mode or the Primary Language chosen for Bilingual Mode If you wish you can specify another choic
184. fter the pager service number It is important to ensure that enough time is allowed for the call to be dialed and answered before additional information such as the PIN or callback number is dialed It is strongly recommended that subscribers verify that the system can function properly with the Outcalling number as it is entered Subscribers should leave a message in their own mailbox during a scheduled Outcalling period to ensure that the system places the call to their beeper m For a telephone number After the system has sent all the digits of the Outcalling number the system plays a message that announces the subscriber s mailbox number and notification that a new message has arrived It also instructs the subscriber how to access the new message and how to cancel the Outcalling notification This message is repeated five times unless it is interrupted by the subscriber The subscriber may make up to three attempts to log in during the outcall before the system disconnects A subscriber can cancel Outcalling for a new message without logging in or listening to the new message by pressing when listening to the Outcalling notification message System Management Record a Call PARTNER ACS Release 3 0 or later You should let system users know that they can turn this feature on or off by pressing a button that you have programmed on their telephone Instructions for using this feature are provided in U
185. fy his or her identity before permitting that person any access to the system a Establish well controlled policies for passwords Establish a specific date for changing passwords for example the first of each month and help users remember to do it Advise subscribers to use a 4 digit password Tell users that passwords should not be recycled They should be hard to guess and should not contain m all the same numbers for example 4444 a sequential characters for example 1234 m personal information that can be associated with them such as their name birthdate telephone number or social security number Discourage the practice of writing down passwords If a password needs to be written down keep it in a secure place and never discard it while it is still active Tell users never to program passwords onto Auto Dial buttons Display phones reveal the programmed numbers 1 16 Security Educate employees that hackers may try to trick them into providing them with dial ton e or dialing a number for them Ask users to tell you if any of the following suspicious activity occurs inability to log into Voice Ma lost mail messages or altere inability to get an outside lin il d greetings e series of calls where there is silence on the other end or the caller hangs up sudden increase in wrong n caller complaints that your li callers claiming to represen callback number
186. g guest mailboxes without ringing the extension first To program a Voice Mailbox Transfer VMBox button as specified on Form C 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program Central Tel Program 2 Enter the number of the extension to be programmed 3 Press a programmable button 4 Press Feature DD 5 At this point do one of the following Go to Step 3 of the next procedure to program another button for this extension Press and go to Step 2 of any button programming procedure in this section to program a button for a different extension Press Feau to exit 4 32 In some countries the feature code for Voice Mailbox Transfer is 6 Check the Programming and Use guide for the communications system Communications System Programming Voice Mail Auto Dial This intercom Auto Dial button allows the subscriber to access the voice messaging system with the touch of one button To program a Voice Mail button as specified on Form C 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program Central Tel Program 2 Dial the number of the extension to be programmed 3 Press a programmable button 4 Press left GntercoomM 7 5 At this point do one of the following Press and go to Step 2 of any button programming procedure in this section to program a button for a different extension Press eature Q to exit Station Lock F21
187. ges in your company Most changes you make will occur because of personnel changes You should refer to the System Configuration Report as you make changes and generate a new report each time you have completed making changes The following list identifies areas of system programming that you are likely to change as you manage the system on an on going basis Language Allows you to change the Language Mode Monolingual or Bilingual and the language s supported by that mode Note that you can also change the System Administration Prompt Language to any of the supported languages Automated Attendant Service Allows you to change delete lines assigned to an Automated Attendant to change the prompt that outside callers hear when the Automated Attendant answers calls and to redefine menu options for transferring outside callers to specific destinations and for changing announcements that callers can choose to hear Allows you to specify the extension to which calls are transferred when a caller presses O or takes no action in response to menu prompts Mailbox Assignments Allows you to delete and create mailboxes reset mailboxes and subscriber s passwords to factory settings assign cancel Outcalling and Record a Call privileges for a subscriber s mailbox and change the language a subscriber hears when using Voice Mail Service Also allows you to change a mailbox s size and message length Line Coverage Allows you to modify line cov
188. gram another Selector Code for Mailbox Transfer repeat PRESS to approve PRESS to record the Day Menu Prompt PRESS after recording PRESS to approve all changes PARTNER MAIL VS System Programming Reference TO START PROGRAMMING PRESS PRESS 9 9 and ENTER your Password factory setting is 1234 and PRESS 9 to access the Programming Main Menu Automated Attendant to Forms 3 3A 3B 4 4A 5 and 5A to program Automated Attendant Service Automated Attendant number TO CHANGE SELECTOR CODE ACTION TO ANNOUNCEMENT MONOLINGUAL MODE PRESS for Day Menu PRESS to modify ENTER a Selector Code 1 through 9 PRESS to modify PRESS for Announcement ENTER Announcement number PRESS to record the Announcement PRESS after recording PRESS to approve PRESS to continue without ogramming another Selector ode or another Selector Code repeat to record the Day Menu Prompt after recording to approve all changes AWEHRS oeo BE ov To progra PRESS PRESS PRESS 3 WA TO CHANGE SELECTOR CODE ACTION TO CENTREX TRANSFER MONOLINGUAL MODE PRESS for Day Menu PRESS to modify ENTER a Selector Code 1 through 9 PRESS to modify PRESS for CentrexTransfer ENTER a Centrex number and wait for stem to time out to continue to approve to confirm another Selector Code for ntrex Transfer repeat to approve to record the Day Menu Prompt after recording to approve all change
189. grammed Voice Mail Auto Dial button b Press QOQA c Enter the password and press d Press The system plays the system programming options Press for Automated Attendant The system prompts you to specify the Automated Attendant Enter the Automated Attendant number 1 to 4 The system plays To program the Day Menu press 1 For the Night Menu press 2 If finished press Press The system plays To play the menu press 2 to modify the menu press 6 If finished press Press If the system is operating in Monolingual Mode the system plays To record a new prompt for this menu press 1 To use the existing prompt press If the system is operating in Bilingual Mode the system plays To record Primary Language prompt press 1 To record Secondary Language prompt press 2 To save any recordings press Lift the handset Press to record the Night Menu Prompt in the Primary Language Press to record the Night Menu Prompt in the Secondary Language Record the prompt after the beep 5 33 System Management 5 34 8 9 Press Q when you are finished recording Choose an option or skip this step Press to immediately re record this Night Menu Prompt Begin recording immediately after the beep press after recording Repeat if desired Press to play back this Night Menu Prompt Press amp
190. guage PRESS 9 to confirm TO MODIFY THE PRIMARY AND SECONDARY LANGUAGES BILINGUAL MODE PRESS 2 for System Language PRESS for Primary Language PRESS to modify ENTER the number of the desired System nguage to confirm for Secondary Language to modify e number of the desired System nguage to confirm AW gt PRESS PRESS PRESS PRESS ENTER ANWOS gt Oh PRESS TO REPLAY A MENU PRESS TO RETURN TO A PREVIOUS MENU PRESS Automated Attendant to Forms 3 3A 4 and 5 to program Automated Attendant Service Automated Attendant number TO MODIFY ASSIGNED LINES PRESS 6 for line assignment PRESS to modify ENTER line number and PRESS 9 to confirm TO DELETE ASSIGNED LINES PRESS 6 for line assignment PRESS to modify ENTER line number and PRESS 9 to confirm TO MODIFY THE MENU DEFINITION AND DAY MENU PROMPT MONOLINGUAL MODE PRESS for Day Menu PRESS 6 to modify ENTER a Selector Code 1 through 9 PRESS 9 to modify PRESS for Selector Code Transfer ENTER an extension Hunt Group Calling Group mailbox or Centrex number and To program another Selector Code for Selector Code Transfer repeat PRESS to approve PRESS to record the Day Menu Prompt PRESS after recording PRESS to approve all changes TO MODIFY ANNOUNCEMENT MONOLINGUAL MODE PRESS PRESS ENTER PRESS PRESS for Day Menu to modify Selector Code 1 through 9 to confirm to
191. guration data from being lost You can restore this information to the system from the PC Card according to the instructions in the next section The PARTNER MAIL VS system must be idle when you perform a backup Any calls being handled by PARTNER MAIL VS will be disconnected when the backup procedure begins PARTNER MAIL VS will not answer calls while the system backup is being performed For most systems the system backup can be performed in three minutes or less If your voice messaging system uses multiple Automated Attendants with all Announcements recorded at up to four minutes the system backup can take approximately 20 minutes to complete The system backup saves the following information a System Language Mode and Primary and Secondary Language choices a System Administration Prompt Language a For each Automated Attendant All Menu Definitions including Dial 0 Timeout Extension and Selector Code assignments For systems operating in Monolingual Mode all Automated Attendant Announcements are saved For systems operating in Bilingual Mode only Announcements for Automated Attendants 1 and 2 are saved Day and Night Menu Prompts For systems operating in Monolingual Mode all menu prompts are saved For systems operating in Bilingual Mode only menu prompts for Automated Attendants 1 and 2 are saved All Automated Attendant line assignments Line Ownership a For each mailbox Mailbox e
192. h programming the voice messaging system and the communications system you should perform the tests described in this section to verify system operation If your system allows programming from extension 1110 you should perform these tests from extension 11 to keep extension 10 free for the receptionist to handle calls Voice Mail Service Make a call to the VMS Hunt Group by pressing or the programmed Voice Mail Auto Dial button You should hear the Voice Mail Service greeting Welcome to PARTNER MAIL VS Pleas nter extension and Otherwise to access PARTNER Tutor press 4 Automated Attendant Service Day Menu If the VMS Hunt Schedule is set for Day Only or Always follow the procedure for Day Menu If the VMS Hunt Schedule is set for Night Only follow the procedure for Night Menu Make sure the Night Service button at extension 10 is off Callin on a line answered by the Automated Attendant Service when Day Service is in effect If the system is set for Immediate Automated Attendant Service should answer the call on the second ring Delayed Automated Attendant Service should answer the call after the fourth ring gt NOTE For PARTNER Advanced Communications System Release 3 0 or later this setting is specified in number of rings Listen for the Day Menu Prompt 10 Some systems allow programming from extension 11 Check the Programming and Use guide for the communicatio
193. handle calls to the pro shop while the other Automated Attendant will handle calls to the court area mw The clerk will have a PARTNER 18D phone at extension 10 Sally s PARTNER 18D phone will be extension 11 Stan s PARTNER 18D phone will be extension 12 The three coaches will have PARTNER 18 phones Two MLS 12 phones will be in the shop an s callers should be able to reach him without having to be transferred y an employee or the PARTNER MAIL VS system so Stan will have a ersonal line When Stan is not available his callers will be sent directly to s mailbox where they can leave messages an works late so he ll be using Call Screening to decide whether to pick p calls on his line after hours cM DDUOM a WM an prefers that customers speak with an employee while the center is open so all lines for the pro shop will ring at all phones in that area and all lines for the court area will ring at all phones there Although there is no receptionist the clerk and the salespeople will serve the receptionist function by answering calls when they can a During business hours calls will go to the Automated Attendant Service of the PARTNER MAIL VS system only when the clerk and salespeople are busy E 2 Case Study 1 a All of Tennis Land s customers and employees speak English so the PARTNER MAIL VS system will be set for Monolingual Mode with U S English as the System Language Potential customers
194. he extension light up to show the current Line Ringing setting remaining buttons can be programmed with Auto Dial numbers or features VMS COVER PRESS a programmable button with lights PRESS ot DO NOT DISTURB PRESS a programmable button with lights PRESS o TF Button with Lights Required TO PROGRAM ANOTHER FEATURE AT THE SAME EXTENSION After you program one feature continue with the instructions in the box for the next feature TO CHANGE SETTINGS FOR ANOTHER EXTENSION PRESS Central Tel Program DIAL the new extension s number VOICE MAILBOX TRANSFER PRESS a programmable button PRESS att RECORD A CALL PARTNER ACS 3 0 OR LATER PRESS a programmable button with lights PRESS CALL SCREENING PARTNER ACS 3 0 OR LATER PRESS a programmable button lights PRESS TO ERASE A FEATURE OR AUTO DIAL BUTTON PRESS the programmed button PRESS TO END CENTRALIZED TELEPHONE PROGRAMMING PRESS o VOICE MAIL AUTO DIAL BUTTON PRESS a programmable button PRESS left DIAL Some systems allow programming from extension 11 Check the Programming and Use guide for the communications system t In some countries the procedure code for Transfer Return Extension is 309 Check the Programming and Use guide for the communications system tt In some countries the procedure code for Group Call Distribution is 205 Check the Programming and Use guide for the communications system
195. he Capture Text dialog box appears displaying the default text file to which the Configuration Report will be saved You may change the text file to which the Configuration Report will be saved Be sure to note the path and file name of this text file Choose the Start button Atyour telephone access the Programming Main Menu If you are already at the Programming Main Menu skip to Step 6 a Press D200 or the programmed Voice Mail Auto Dial button b Press QOQA c Enter the password and press d Press The system plays the system programming options Press 8 for Reports and Backup Restore Press to access the Reports Menu Press to run the Configuration Report Note that the Configuration Report is the only report currently available The report is displayed in the HyperTerminal window This information is also saved to the text file you specified in Step 3 From the Transfer menu on your PC choose Capture Text A submenu appears Choose Stop From the File menu choose Exit to close HyperTerminal You can now open view and print the text file that contains the Configuration Report 5 75 System Management Performing a System Backup 5 76 You can perform a system backup to save the settings that you have programmed and prompts that you have recorded for your voice messaging system This information is saved on a PC Card which protects the programmed confi
196. he Programming Main Menu a Press or the programmed Voice Mail Auto Dial button b Press OQA c Enter the password and press d Press The system plays the system programming options 2 Press Q for Language The system plays To program Language Mode press 1 To program System Language press 2 If finished press 5 14 Language Press for System Language If the system is operating in Monolingual Mode the system plays To play System Language press 2 To modify System Language press 6 If finished press If the system is operating in Bilingual Mode the system plays To program Primary Language press 1 To program Secondary Language press 2 If finished press Do one of the following If the system is operating in Monolingual Mode press 8 The system plays the current System Language then prompts you to enter the number corresponding to the desired language Go to Step 5 If the system is operating in Bilingual Mode press for Primary Language Go to Step 7 Ifthe system is operating in Bilingual Mode press 2 for Secondary Language Go to Step 7 If the system is operating in Monolingual Mode press the number for the language you want to use Go to Step 6 The system plays For LANGUAGE where LANGUAGE is the current language press 9 to confirm or 6 to cancel If the system is operating in Monolingual Mode either Pres
197. he System Save Reset All procedure by entering 989 RESET 989 73738 after you log in as the System Manager If the Power LED is not lit power down the control unit reseat the PARTNER MAIL VS module and power up the control unit m If the module is working properly after one minute the problem is solved a If the module still does not work properly it is damaged Possible Cause 3 The PARTNER MAIL VS may not be programmed correctly What to do Refer to Figure 2 1 in Chapter 2 and the figures in Appendix D to determine the extension numbers that are associated with the PARTNER MAIL VS module Then use Hunt Group Extensions 505 to verify that the VMS extensions are assigned to Hunt Group 7 a f Hunt Group 7 does not have the correct VMS extensions assign the correct extension numbers a f Hunt Group 7 has the correct VMS extensions call 1 800 628 2888 for help or call your Lucent Technologies Representative or Authorized Dealer Message Light Does Not Turn Off Possible Cause There are messages in the mailbox The message light stays on if there are any new unretrieved messages in the mailbox What to do Retrieve or delete all new messages from the mailbox 6 11 Troubleshooting Outcalling Is Delayed Possible Cause 1 There is heavy call traffic and Outcalling volume on the mail system The Outcalling port is also used in call handling If your system performs heavy Outcalling or has heavy call volume the port
198. he system plays System is in Monolingual Mode To program Language Mode press 1 To program System Language press 2 If finished press Press 2 for Bilingual Mode The system plays System is in Bilingual Mode To program Language Mode press 1 To program System Language press 2a If finished press point do one of the following To change the System Language if the system is set for Monolingual Mode go to Step 3 of Modifying the System Primary or Secondary Language To change the Primary Language if the system is set for Bilingual Mode go to Step 3 of Modifying the System Primary or Secondary Language To change the Secondary Language if the system is set for Bilingual Mode go to Step 3 of Modifying the System Primary or Secondary Language Press to return to the Programming Main Menu or hang up to quit Playing the System Primary or Secondary Language 5 12 To listen to the current System Primary or Secondary Language 1 Access the Programming Main Menu a b C d Press or the programmed Voice Mail Auto Dial button Press QOQA Enter the password and press Press The system plays the system programming options 2 Press Q for Language The system plays To program Language Mode press 1 To program System Language press 2 If finished press Language 3 Press for System Language If the system is operating in
199. hich the call is transferred The Selector Code 9 factory setting lets callers transfer directly to mailbox 10 receptionist s mailbox where they can leave a message The Description and Selector Code number from this form will be used to complete the Day and Night Menu Prompts Forms 4 4A 5 and 5A Announcement entries in Description Selector Code and Number Range of Numbers of this form will be used to complete Forms 3A and 3B PARTNER System Range of Extensions Advanced R1 0 1 1 10 41 71 74 or 771 776 Advanced R3 0 or later 10 49 71 74 or 771 776 Endeavor R1 0 or later 10 49 71 74 or 771 776 II Plus 10 57 71 74 or 771 776 Automated Attendant 1 2 3 4 Form 4 Day Menu Prompt System L anguage or Primary L anguage Copy this form for each Automated Attendant Save the original blank form for future use Check a number to indicate for which Automated Attendant this form is used R equired if VMS H unt Schedule is set to D ay Only or Always General I nformation The Day Menu Prompt plays to callers when the VMS Hunt Schedule is set to Always or Day Only and Night Service is off The Day Menu Prompt and the Night Menu Prompt use the same Menu Definition The Day Menu Prompt should contain a welcome and a list of menu options The welcome should introduce the company For example Thank you for calling the Any Travel Agency If the system
200. his chapter for details Modifying Mailboxes To create a mailbox 1 Access the Programming Main Menu a Press or the programmed Voice Mail Auto Dial button b Press QOQA c Enter the password and press d Press The system plays the system programming options 2 Press to program mailboxes The system tells you how many mailboxes exist and how many are allowed then Pleas nter the mailbox number followed by or press for the next mailbox 3 Enter the number of the mailbox you want to create followed by The system plays Mailbox XX does not exist To create this mailbox press 4 If finished with this mailbox press or press for the next mailbox 4 Press 2 The system plays Created 5 Press to return to the Programming Main Menu or hang up to quit 5 47 System Management Reinitializing a Password 5 48 If a subscriber forgets the password for his or her mailbox you can reinitialize the password to the factory setting of 1234 so the user can retrieve messages Remind the subscriber to change the password immediately after logging in for the first time To reinitialize a password to 1234 1 Access the Programming Main Menu a Press or the programmed Voice Mail Auto Dial button b Press Q c Enter the password and press d Press The system plays the system programming options 2 Press to program mailboxes The system tells you ho
201. ic extension Group Calling number if available Hunt Group number Centrex number or guest mailbox number that you specify to which the caller is transferred See the range of extensions table Selector Code Transfer lets callers dial a single digit to reach a single extension or group such as the VP of Sales at extension 37 or the order processing operators assigned to Hunt Group 774 Selector N umber R ange C ode Action of N umbers Mailbox 10 Dial 0 T imeout E xtension 40 Specify the extension to which calls are transferred if the caller dials 0 or does not enter a Selector Code If you use the Centrex Transfer option all lines assigned to this Automated Attendant must be Centrex lines If you use the Mailbox Transfer option Selector Codes 1 9 represent a mailbox number that you specify to which the call is transferred The Selector Code 9 factory setting lets callers transfer directly to mailbox 10 receptionist s mailbox where they can leave a message The Description and Selector Code number from this form will be used to complete the Day and Night Menu Prompts Forms 4 4A 5 and 5A Announcement entries in Description Selector Code and Number Range of Numbers of this form will be used to complete Forms 3A and 3B PARTNER System Range of Extensions Advanced R1 0 1 1 10 41 71 74 or 771 776 Advanced R3 0 or later 10 49 71 74 or 771 776 Endeavor R1 0 or la
202. ice storage maximum With 4 Port PC Card 4 voice channels ports 48 mailboxes 100 hours of voice storage maximum Total Number of Calls Supported During Peak Usage Hour Call Connect Time Calls 2 port 4 port 0 5 minutes 25 122 1 minute 12 61 1 5 minutes 8 40 Communications Systems The PARTNER MAIL VS system is supported on the following PARTNER Plus PARTNER II PARTNER Advanced and PARTNER Endeavor communications systems In most countries Release 3 1 or later of PARTNER Plus and PARTNER II and Release 1 0 or later of PARTNER Endeavor and PARTNER Advanced Communications System lIn United Kingdom Release 2 0 or later of PARTNER Plus Languages Supported U S English Latin American Spanish Canadian French Default Mode Monolingual Default Languages Monolingual Mode U S English Bilingual Mode U S English primary Latin American Spanish secondary Dimensions and Weights approx PARTNER MAIL VS 11 D x 17 H x 1 5 W or 27 9 x 43 2 x 3 8 cm 4 3 lbs or 2 0 kgs Expansion Card 3 4 D x 2 1 H x 0 2 W or 8 6 x 5 3 x 0 5 cm 07 Ibs or 32 grams PC Card 3 4 D x 2 1 H x 0 2 W or 8 6 x 5 3 x 0 5 cm 07 Ibs or 32 grams Electrical Specifications 15 Watts 52 BTUs hr per ACS processor module during normal and maximum power consumption Maximum current 0 13 Amps Battery Backup Compatible Processor Module Specifications 68000EC processor 512Kby
203. ice immediately calls do not ring the extension first Figure 1 1 Voice Messaging Service Overview Automated Attendant Service The Automated Attendant Service can answer and route outside calls without assistance from a receptionist Release 5 0 offers four Automated Attendants allowing the incoming lines that are directed to the voice messaging system to be answered by separate Automated Attendants The System Manager is responsible for assigning lines to the appropriate Automated Attendant By programming multiple Automated Attendants you can customize how calls are answered for separate areas of your business that use different sets of lines After an outside call is answered the Automated Attendant Service plays a customized message called the menu prompt Typically the message welcomes callers to let them know they have reached the correct number then offers callers a menu of options for transferring to the desired party or listening to an Announcement It is recommended that the menu offer not more than five options to avoid confusing callers A call can be transferred to an extension number including the receptionist s preprogrammed mailbox number or to a preprogrammed Centrex number With the Multiple Automated Attendant feature you can record up to two Announcements for each Automated Attendant Note that each of these Automated Attendants operates in the same language or language combinations
204. ific extension or group of extensions or to hear an Annou call to tones ncement After the caller presses the button s the system transfers the he appropriate extension or group and the caller hears Music On Hold ringing or silence or an Announcement depending on how the communications system is set up Menu Definition lets you specify the extens Annou ions or groups to which outside callers are transferred or the ncements that callers hear Each of your Automated Attendants can have its own Menu Definition and Announcements The voice messaging system uses the Menu Definition for both day and night operat ion To set up the menu you define digits 1 through 9 called Selector Codes The Selector Code is the first digit dialed by the caller in response to the menu prompts A corresponding Selector Code Action can be assigned to each of the selector codes for the following types of call transfer Direct Extension Transfer This is the factory setting for selector codes 1 through 8 If you use the factory setting callers can enter an extension number directly from the menu For direct extension transfer the selector code represents a range of extensions For example selector code 1 allows outside callers to transfer directly to any extension that begins with a 1 extensions 10 19 For selector code 2 outside callers can transfer directly to any extension that begins with a 2 extensions 20 29 and so on S
205. ification to an internal telephone associated with this mailbox Each time a new message is received while Outcalling is in effect the system will send the notification to this mailbox according to the specified number of Outcalling cycles and intervals What to do Verify that Outcalling numbers are correctly entered Voice Mail Service Voice Mail Service Subscriber Unable to Log In to Voice Mail Possible Cause 1 A subscriber entered the number of a mailbox that does not exist What to do Make sure the subscriber enters an existing mailbox number Use Playing a Mailbox s Status in Chapter 5 to check the status of existing mailboxes a If the subscriber tries again and succeeds the problem is solved a f the subscriber still cannot log in go to Possible Cause 2 Possible Cause 2 The subscriber forgot his or her password or entered it incorrectly What to do The subscriber should try entering the password again a If the subscriber can log in the problem is solved a Ifthe subscriber still cannot log in re initialize the password as described in Chapter 5 If you forget the password for login 99 you must call 1 800 628 2888 for help or call your Lucent Technologies Representative or Authorized Dealer Date or Time in Message Headers Is Incorrect Possible Cause The day date or time programmed for the communications system is incorrect or the PARTNER MAIL VS system was not updated with the corre
206. ifies where unanswered calls that are transferred by the voice mail system return If the mail system transfers a call to an extension and the call is not answered the communications system transfers the call to the Transfer Return Extension that 1 9 Overview you have programmed The call rings at this extension until it is answered For extensions that do not have Voice Mail coverage this option can be programmed to ensure that unanswered calls transferred by the mail system return to the designated extension where they ring until answered Automated Attendant Service Scenarios The following sample scenarios illustrate typical ways in which Automated Attendant Service for an individual Automated Attendant is set up with the communications system features a Case 1 The receptionist is the primary call handler both day and night Automated Attendant Service handles overflow 1 Use Group Call Distribution 206 Setting 1 to identify the lines to be answered by Automated Attendant Service 2 Set VMS Hunt Schedule 507 to Always 3 Set VMS Hunt Delay 506 to Delayed a Case 2 Automated Attendant Service is the primary call handler 1 Use Group Call Distribution 206 Setting 1 to identify the lines to be answered by Automated Attendant Service 2 Set VMS Hunt Schedule 507 to Always 3 Set VMS Hunt Delay 506 to Immediate a Case 3 The receptionist answers calls during the day Automated Attendant Service an
207. ify AA Mailboxes Press 4 Mailbox Number Enter Number Administer Create Message Length Mailbox amp Mailbox size Pressi4 Press 2 Reinitialize Password Press s Reinitialize Mailbox Press Administer Outcalling Press5 Program Mailbox Language Press 6 Administer Record A Call Press 7 Delete Mailbox Pressi EAE TS E E EEA 11213 AERE E EE i D Line Ownership Press 6 Scan Line Ownership Press 2 Assign Line Ownership Press 4 Modify Line Ownership Press 6 Delete Line Ownership Press 3 Reports amp Backup Restore Press 8 Run Configuration Report Press 1 1 System Reset Save All Press IZZIE PARTNER MAIL VS System Programming Reference TO RETURN TO THE PROGRAMMING MAIN MENU TO START PROGRAMMING PRESS PRESS 9 9 and ENTER your Password factory setting is 1234 and PRESS 9 to access the Programming Main Menu Language REFER to Form 1 PRESS to program Language TO MODIFY THE LANGUAGE MODE PRESS for Language Mode PRESS for Monolingual Mode or for Bilingual Mode TO MODIFY THE SYSTEM LANGUAGE MONOLINGUAL MODE PRESS for System Language PRESS 6 to modify ENTER the number of the desired System Lan
208. iguration Keep in mind the following guidelines The voice messaging system module should always be installed after the communications system modules to ensure consecutive extension numbering On the PARTNER Endeavor or Advanced Communications System you must install the voice messaging system module in the slot to the right of the PARTNER ACS module in the 2 slot carrier see Figure D 4Jin Appendix D lf your system has a 5 slot carrier you may install the voice messaging system module in any slot except the center slot see Figure 2 1 Jas well as Figures in Appendix D If the control unit is upgraded with more communications system modules the voice messaging system module should be removed the new modules should be installed and the voice messaging system module should be installed in the first available slot after the communication system modules The VMS Hunt Group Extensions and Transfer Return Extensions must then be reprogrammed see Chapter 4 Do not install the voice messaging system module in the first slot of the PARTNER Plus system control unit or the PARTNER II system primary carrier see Figure D 5 gt NOTE Push slowly but firmly in the center of the module until the module locks into place and is attached to the rear of the backplane A click indicates that the connectors are attached to the rear of the backplane Use the carrier shelf as a reference and do not tilt slant
209. ines If a subscriber needs more storage space in his or her mailbox use Changing Mailbox Message Length or Size If a subscriber forgets his or her password use Reinitializing a Password to return the password to the factory setting 1234 If a subscriber would like to interact with Voice Mail Service using a language different from the one assigned to his or her mailbox use Modifying a Mailbox s Language If you want to activate or deactivate Outcalling for a subscriber s mailbox refer to Administering Outcalling for a Mailbox As the default setting Outcalling privileges are denied Even after you activate Outcalling for a subscriber s mailbox the subscriber must also turn on this feature and specify an Outcalling number or list of numbers by following the procedure in Using the PARTNER MAIL VS Voice Messaging System If you want to activate or deactivate Record a Call privileges for a eibee bere faibex iter eh Aeninisioning Records Caloha Manso As the default setting Record a Call privileges are denied that is message length is set to O Even after you activate Record a Call for a subscriber s mailbox you must also program a telephone button for this feature The subscriber should follow the Record a Call procedure in Using the PARTNER MAIL VS Voice Messaging System Before you change mailbox assignments you should review the next two sections Hardware Considerations
210. information a System Language Mode and Primary and Secondary Language choices a System Administration Prompt Language m For each Automated Attendant All Menu Definitions including Dial 0 Timeout Extension and Selector Code assignments For systems operating in Monolingual Mode all Automated Attendant Announcements are saved For systems operating in Bilingual Mode only Announcements for Automated Attendants 1 and 2 are saved Day and Night Menu Prompts For systems operating in Monolingual Mode all menu prompts are saved For systems operating in Bilingual Mode only the menu prompts for Automated Attendants 1 and 2 are saved All Automated Attendant line assignments Line Ownership m For each mailbox Mailbox extension number Maximum message length and mailbox size parameter Mailbox language parameter Outcalling permission Record a Call message length 4 41 Initial Programming 4 42 Personal Operator Personal Group List Outcalling information including numbers schedule cycles and interval gt NOTE Personal greetings and messages are not saved To perform system backup Te Be sure the PC Card is installed see the area labeled Slot for PC Card in If necessary access the Programming Main Menu If you are already at the Programming Main Menu skip to Step 3 a Press or the programmed Voice Mail Auto Dial
211. inition and follow the procedure in Playing the Automated Attendant Line Assignments in Chapter 5 to determine the lines assigned to each Automated Attendant In particular if you have deleted a line from one Automated Attendant be sure you have reassigned the line to another Automated Attendant Follow the steps nF Veriying System Operation in Chapter 4 to test Automated Attendant Service Refer to Line Coverage column on Form A Page 1 of the System Planner for the communications system to determine the lines to which Automated Attendant Service should be assigned Then use Group Call Distribution 206 to verify that the VMS AA lines are assigned to Hunt Group 7 If Hunt Group 7 does not have the correct VMS AA lines assign the correct lines If Hunt Group 7 has the correct VMS AA lines go to the next step Refer to in Chapter 2 and the figures in to determine the extension numbers that are associated with the PARTNER MAIL VS module Then use Hunt Group Extensions 505 to verify that the VMS extensions are assigned to Hunt Group 7 If Hunt Group 7 does not have the correct VMS extensions assign the correct extension numbers If Hunt Group 7 has the correct VMS extensions call 1 800 628 2888 for help or call your Lucent Technologies Representative or Authorized Dealer Outside Callers Hear Silence Tones or Ringing During Transfer Possible Cause Music On Hold is not set up for the system What to do See Music On H
212. ion in Chapter 4 for details monitor your call reporting system records of outgoing calls to identify possible system abuse 1 15 Overview You should also a provide effective physical security for the room containing your telecommunications equipment and the room with administrative tools records and System Administration information These areas should be locked when unattended a provide a secure trash disposal for all sensitive information including your company s telephone directories call accounting records or anything that may supply information about your communications system This trash should be shredded Security Policy and User Education As part of your responsibility for protecting system security you should establish and communicate security policies for all system users You should let users know what measures they should take to protect system security and explain how hackers may try to gain access to the system In particular you should provide users with the following information All reports of trouble requests to move extensions or any other administrative details associated with the communications system or the voice mail system should be handled by one person the System Manager or within one department Anyone claiming to be a telephone company representative should be referred to this person or department a lf acaller claims to be an authorized telephone company representative veri
213. ion so that your staff is free to assist customers or to perform other tasks more efficiently Automated Attendant 1 2 3 4 Form 4 Day Menu Prompt System L anguage or Primary L anguage Copy this form for each Automated Attendant Save the original blank form for future use Check a number to indicate for which Automated Attendant this form is used R equired if VMS H unt Schedule is set to D ay Only or Always Thank you for calling Tennis Land If you know the extension of the person you want to reach dial it now To speak to someone in the pro shop press 4 To get information about our location and hours press 5 To get information about tournaments and special events press 6 If you would like to hear this message again press If you require assistance please stay on the line General I nformation The Day Menu Prompt plays to callers when the VMS Hunt Schedule is set to Always or Day Only and Night Service is off The Day Menu Prompt and the Night Menu Prompt use the same Menu Definition The Day Menu Prompt should contain a welcome and a list of menu options The welcome should introduce the company For example Thank you for calling the Any Travel Agency If the system is set for Bilingual Mode let callers know they can switch the language they hear while on the call For example Para espa ol marque 1 The menu options should contain instructions th
214. ion to be taken for each selector code A separate copy of this form should be made for each Automated Attendant Form 3A Automated Attendant Announcement System Language or Primary Language Shows the announcement number s and the script s used to record the associated announcement s in the System Language for Monolingual Mode or the Primary Language for Bilingual Mode You can record up to two announcements A separate copy of this form should be made for each Automated Attendant Form 3B Automated Attendant Announcement Secondary Language Used only if the system is set for Bilingual Mode Shows the announcement number s and the script s used to record the associated announcement s in the Secondary Language for Bilingual Mode You can record up to two announcements A separate copy of this form should be made for each Automated Attendant Form 4 Day Menu Prompt System Language or Primary Language Shows the script used to record the Day Menu Prompt in the System Language for Monolingual Mode or the Primary Language for Bilingual Mode A separate copy of this form should be made for each Automated Attendant Form 4A Day Menu Prompt Secondary Language Used only if the system is set for Bilingual Mode Shows the script used to record the Day Menu Prompt in the Secondary Language A separate copy of this form should be made for each Automated Attendant Voice Messaging System Programming Form 5 Night Me
215. ions should contain instructions that correspond to the Menu Definition set up on Form 3 If callers can dial extension numbers Direct Extension Transfer the prompt should instruct callers to dial the extension number For example If you know the extension of the person you want to reach dial it now and leave a message If callers can dial a single digit to transfer to an extension or group Selector Code Transfer to a mailbox Mailbox Transfer or to a Centrex number Centrex Transfer the prompt should provide instructions such as To leave a message for Pat press 6 Keep in mind that there are no group mailboxes If Selector Code 9 is left as the default the prompt should instruct callers to press 9 to leave a message with the receptionist Completing this F orm Write the message that you want callers to hear when they call after normal business hours including instructions to the caller for selecting menu options Suggested options include m Dial 9 or remain on the line to leave a message m To hear this menu again dial 4 Recording the N ight M enu Prompt m To record the Night Menu Prompt dial L3 from the Programming Main Menu Glossary Numerics 206 module A system module that contains jacks for connecting up to two outside lines and up to six exten sions 308 module A system module that contains jacks for connecting up to three outside lines and up
216. is option specifies after how many rings the communications system will route calls to the Automated Attendant Service The setting you choose for this feature depends on whether the Automated Attendant Service or your receptionist acts as the primary call handler Refer to Automated Attendant Service Scenarios later in this chapter Voice Messaging Services On PARTNER ACS Release 3 0 or later you can specify the VMS Hunt Delay by the number of rings from O to 6 after which the Automated Attendant Service answers calls You can specify this on a per line basis The greater the number of rings the greater the delay giving the receptionist more time to answer a call before it is routed to the Automated Attendant Service Note that the number of rings you specify for this option will depend on whether you subscribe to Caller ID service from your local telephone company See Chapter dlfor more information You can also specify different settings for day and night operation For all other communications systems you can choose one of the following settings which will be used for both day and night operation a Immediate factory setting The Automated Attendant Service answers outside calls on the second ring default and plays the Day or Night Menu Prompt The receptionist can act as backup Callers using rotary phones or callers requesting assistance can be transferred to the receptionist s extension a Delayed The Auto
217. k of the Selector des to play the recorded nnouncement assigned to the elector Code or to skip w iw SON SHI n gt Gy TO PLAY THE MENU DEFINITION BILINGUAL MODE PRESS PRESS PRESS PRESS PRESS PRESS for Day Menu for playback of the y Menu definition for playback of the Selector des to play the Primary Language nnouncement assigned to the Selector Code or to play the Secondary Language Announcement assigned to the Selector Code or to skip gt a an BSN SRI N TO MODIFY THE NIGHT MENU PROMPT MONOLINGUAL MODE PRESS PRESS PRESS PRESS PRESS for Night Menu 6 to modify to record the Night Menu Prompt after recording to approve TO MODIFY THE NIGHT MENU PROMPT BILINGUAL MODE PRESS PRESS PRESS PRESS PRESS PRESS PRESS PRESS PRESS for Night Menu to modify to record the Night Menu Prompt the Primary Language after recording to approve to record the Night Menu Prompt in Secondary Language after recording to approve to approve all changes NADYAN n y oO amp 6 6 TO REPLAY A MENU PRESS TO RETURN TO A PREVIOUS MENU PRESS Mailboxes REFER to Form 2 PRESS to program Mailboxes TO PLAY A MAILBOX S STATUS ENTER a mailbox number and or PRESS for the first mailbox PRESS to play the next existing mailbox s status TO DELETE A MAILBOX ENTER a mailbox number and PRESS to delete the mai
218. ks in the PARTNER MAIL VS column indicate that the PARTNER MAIL VS module is installed in Slot 1 of the Control Unit The module uses extensions 22 and 23 the last two extensions for that slot in this 2 port configuration Write Transfer Return Ext No 10 in this column indicates that when a call transferred by the PARTNER MAIL VS system is unanswered it goes to extension 10 where the clerk can answer it CS Form B2 Page 1 of 2 Automatic VMS Cover 310 Checks in this column indicate that unanswered calls to extensions 10 through 15 automatically are covered by the Automated Attendant Service Hunt Group Extensions 1 6 505 1 in this column indicates that extensions 16 and 17 make up Hunt Group 1 A call transferred to this group rings three times at the first non busy extension If it is not answered it moves to the next non busy extensions in the group continuing until someone answers or the caller hangs up VMS Only column for extensions 22 and 23 satisfy the requirement that the extensions used by the PARTNER MAIL VS module be assigned to Hunt Group 7 CS Form C3 PARTNER 18 18D Phone The first Form C3 identifies the buttons programmed on the PARTNER 18D phone at extension 10 Night Service Do Not Disturb Voice Mail Messages and Voice Mailbox Transfer The Night Service button allows the user to turn Night Service on and off When Night Service is off the Day Menu prompt plays When Night Service is
219. lbox PRESS 9 to confirm TO CREATE A MAILBOX ENTER the new mailbox number and PRESS to create the new mailbox TO REINITIALIZE A PASSWORD ENTER a mailbox number and PRESS to reset the password to 1234 TO REINITIALIZE A MAILBOX ENTER the mailbox number and PRESS to reinitialize the mailbox PRESS 9 to confirm TO MODIFY MAILBOX MESSAGE LENGTH AND SIZE ENTER the mailbox number and PRESS to administer mailbox message length and size to confirm the message length 2 to 60 minutes and mailbox size 5 to 180 minutes and to accept PRESS ENTER ENTER PRESS TO MODIFY A MAILBOX S LANGUAGE ENTER the mailbox number and PRESS 6 to program Language PRESS 6 to modify ENTER the number of the desired language PRESS 9 to confirm TO RETURN TO THE PROGRAMMING MAIN MENU PRESS TO EXIT PROGRAMMING PRESS o Mailboxes REFER to Form 2 PRESS to program Mailboxes TO ASSIGN REMOVE OUTCALLING FOR A MAILBOX ENTER the mailbox number and PRESS to administer Outcalling PRESS 9 to assign Outcalling or PRESS 6 to remove Outcalling To assign remove Outcalling for another mailbox repeat TO ASSIGN REMOVE RECORD A CALL FOR A MAILBOX ENTER the mailbox number and PRESS to administer Record a Call ENTER a value from 1 to 60 minutes and assign Record a Call or PRESS to remove Record a Call To assign remove Record a Call for another mailbox repeat Line Ownership REFER to Form 6 PRESS
220. ld contact the appropriate electrical inspection authority or electrician as appropriate To prevent overloading the Load Number LN assigned to each terminal device denotes the percentage of the total load to be connected to a telephone loop used by the device The termination on a loop may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the total of the Load Numbers of all the devices does not exceed 100 IC Certification No 230 3756A CSA Certification No LR 60486 Load No 7 FCC Information Renseignements sur la notification du minist re des Communications du Canada et la r paration L tiquette du Minist re des Communications du Canada identifie le mat riel homologu Cette tiquette certifie que le mat riel est conforme a certaines normes de protection d exploitation et de s curit des r seaux de t l communications Le Minist re n assure toutefois pas que le mat riel fonctionnera a la satisfaction de l utilisateur Avant d installer ce mat riel l utilisateur doit s assurer qu il est permis de le raccorder aux installations de l entreprise locale de t l communication Le mat riel doit galement tre install en suivant une m thode accept e de raccordement Dans certains cas les fils int rieurs de l enterprise utilis s pour un service individuel a ligne unique peuvent tre prolong s au moyen d un dispositif homologu de raccordement cordon prolongateur t l phonique i
221. lect the appropriate language Training Co Workers Telephone Security PARTNER ACS Release 3 0 or later You should remind system users with system and standard touch tone telephones to use the Station Lock feature whenever they leave their desks for an extended period of time To lock their telephone users press the Station Lock button that you program for them and enter a four digit code They re enter this code to unlock their telephone A EEN in this chapter Language You should let system users know about the following language options a You can change the language of voice prompts that a subscriber hears when recording a personal greeting retrieving messages and other Voice Mail services This language can be different from the System Language set for Monolingual Mode or the Primary and Secondary Languages set for Bilingual Mode m f the system is set for Bilingual Mode subscribers can record the personal greeting in the Primary Language and in the Secondary Language They should include a sentence early in the greeting that lets callers know that they can switch to the other language by pressing while the greeting is playing 5 3 System Management Outcalling 5 4 You should let system users know that they can turn this feature on or off retrieve their messages from a touch tone phone as well as enter and change their Outcalling number s and schedule Instructions for performing these tasks are provide
222. lers to press 9 to leave a message with the receptionist Completing this F orm Write the message that you want callers to hear when they call after normal business hours including instructions to the caller for selecting menu options Suggested options include m Dial 9 or remain on the line to leave a message m To hear this menu again dial 4 Recording the N ight M enu Prompt m To record the Night Menu Prompt dial L3 from the Programming Main Menu Case Study 2 Case Study 2 About the Customer Software Mexico is a small company that develops PC based software in Tijuana Mexico The company prides itself on personalized service and customer satisfaction The owner Jose Ramirez employs a staff of nine including a receptionist a system administrator five programmers a customer service representative and a bookkeeper Jose and his employees speak both English and Spanish Sixty percent of Software Mexico s customers speak Spanish the O p J her 40 percent speak English Jose has a PARTNER Advanced Communications System Release 3 0 He urchased a PARTNER MAIL VS Release 5 Voice Messaging System because the integrated system can answer outside calls and offer callers the option of listening to prompts and transferring to extensions in either English or Spanish uan one of the employees at Software Mexico is responsible for managing the systems he established these facts
223. line can go immediately to coverage For both types of line coverage voice mail coverage must be on at the user s extension gt NOTE A line can be assigned coverage as described in this section or it can be assigned Automated Attendant Service coverage a single line cannot be assigned both types of coverage 5 60 In some countries the procedure code for Group Call Distribution is 205 Check the Programming and Use guide for the communications system Line Coverage Extension 208 and VMS Cover Rings 117 are not available on all systems Check the Programming and Use guide for the communications system Line Coverage VMS Line Coverage If you specify VMS Line Coverage 206 Option 3 for any system lines you must assign an owner to the covered lines Otherwise the system will transfer callers who call in on those lines to the receptionist s extension This section provides instructions on how to a Use Line Ownership see Figure 5 6 to scan assign modify and delete current assignments for VMS Line Coverage a Use Group Call Distribution to specify new lines for VMS Line Coverage Programming Main Menu ES J Line Ownership Press 6 Scan Line Assign Line Modify Line Delete Line Ownership Ownership Ownership Ownership Press 2 Press 4 Press 6 Press 3 Figure 5 4 Line Ownership Scanning Line Ownership To review the current owners of outside lines 1
224. line number 4 Press until the appropriate value displays 5 To program another line press Next item or Prev item until the appropriate line number displays Then repeat Step 4 D Continue with VMS Hunt Schedule later in this section VMS Hunt Delay All Other PARTNER Systems Check Form A Page 2 VMS Hunt Delay If Delayed is specified follow the procedure below The setting that you specify in this procedure applies to all Automated Attendants Otherwise skip to Automatic Extension Privacy later in this section To change the VMS Hunt Delay setting from Immediate to Delayed as specified on Form A Page 2 1 Press HOOG 2 Press until the appropriate value displays 3 Continue with VMS Hunt Schedule later in this section 4 23 Initial Programming Automatic Extension Privacy Use this procedure to prevent users from accidentally picking up calls sent to the voice messaging system To set Automatic Extension Privacy 304 to Assigned for the PARTNER MAIL VS extensions specified on Form B1 1 2 Press AQA Enter the first PARTNER MAIL VS extension number specified on Form B1 3 Press Next Data until the display reads 1 Assigned Press Next item or Prev item until the next PARTNER MAIL VS extension number specified on Form B1 displays Press Next Data until the display reads 1 Assigned If additional PARTNER MAIL VS extensions are specified
225. ll refer to these forms during programming Communications System Programming When the communications system is installed it uses factory settings that reflect the most common usage of the equipment You can change these settings as required to customize them for the business You can program the communications system from extension 10 Some systems also allow programming from extension 11 Check the Programming and Use guide for the communications system for more information If your system supports programming from both extensions you may find it more convenient to program from extension 11 This capability allows the receptionist to continue handling calls at extension 10 while you program System Programming changes settings for the system as a whole or for individual lines or extensions Refer to the Programming and Use guide for the communications system for more information about System Programming options On some communications systems a password may be required to enter System Programming mode Check the Programming and Use guide for the communications system for more information Understanding Programming Planning Forms 3 2 Refer to the communications system s System Planner when you are changing system settings and be sure to record any changes you make The following forms from the System Planner contain information about the voice messaging system Form A System Configuration Contains basic information
226. lling Cascaded A voice messaging system feature that when assigned to a subscriber allows the subscriber to have the system call a list of up to five pager or telephone numbers according to a predefined schedule whenever a new message is received in the subscriber s voice mailbox Subscribers can define when the system attempts Outcalling how often it does so during a specified time interval as well as how many time the list of Outcalling numbers will be dialed Note that sub scribers must be assigned permission to use this feature P Personal Group List A voice messaging system feature that allows a subscriber to create and maintain up to 10 per sonal group lists each of which can consist of up to 48 mailboxes When prompted to enter a mailbox number to send or forward a message the subscriber can enter a personal group list instead of entering each mailbox number individually Personal Operator A voice mail system feature that allows subscribers to program a personal operator for their mail box if a caller using Call Answer Service presses 0 before during or after leaving a message the system transfers the caller to the programmed personal operator Primary Language In Bilingual Mode the language callers initially hear when they call in to the voice messaging sys tem See also Secondary Language Programmable button A system phone button that does not have a line assigned it can be set up to dial a number or access
227. lls You can establish a different delay schedule for day and night calls For Day Night or Always the ring delay can be set to 0 through 6 rings The default setting is 2 rings To change the delay schedule for the daytime on Form A Addendum under VMS Hunt Delay Day enter the number of daytime rings desired To change the delay schedule for the nighttime on Form A Addendum under VMS Hunt Delay Night enter the number of nighttime rings desired PARTNER ACS Release 2 0 or earlier Follow instructions as indicated above However the designated Hunt Schedule and Hunt Delay will be established system wide Different schedules and delays cannot be established for each line PARTNER ACS Release 2 0 or later only If ASA is checked specify the following Automatic System Answer Delay 110 By default a call rings 2 times before it is answered by the system Write number 0 9 if different from default Automatic System Answer Mode 121 By default ASA calls are put on hold after the greeting plays Check if calls should continue to ring or be disconnected Ring Disconnect ASA Record Playback 891 message of up to 10 seconds that caller hears when the call is answered by the Automatic System Answer feature Write message below and record from extension 10 or 11 Form A System Configuration Required for PARTNER Advanced Communications System For additional instructions see page 4 di ee
228. m Password if required Press AOOM At the Mode prompt enter 7 Day or 2 Night At the Line prompt enter the first line number Press until the appropriate value displays To program another line press Next fem or Prev item until the appropriate line number displays Then repeat Step 6 8 Press Feature O to exit programming NOOR WON VMS Hunt Schedule All Other PARTNER Systems 5 38 Use this communications system procedure to specify when the communications system is to route calls to the voice messaging system Any changes you make apply to all Automated Attendants Update Form A Page 2 of the System Planner for the communications system to show modifications to the VMS Hunt Schedule setting before you begin To change the VMS Hunt Schedule setting 1 Press eature 0 0 System Program System Program Enter the System Password if required 2 3 Press AOOO 4 Press Next Data until the appropriate value displays 5 Press eature 0 to exit programming Modifying Mailboxes Modifying Mailboxes The voice messaging system is shipped with 48 mailboxes already created The characteristics of mailboxes are as follows a Receptionist s Extension Extension 10 has a default storage capacity of 60 minutes which can be administered for up to 180 minutes or 120 messages Each message has a default length of four minutes and a length range of 2 to 60 min
229. m plays Secondary language is LANGUAGE where LANGUAGE is the current language To play Secondary Language press 2 To modify Secondary Language press 6 If finished press 5 13 System Management 7 If the system is operating in Bilingual Mode do one of the following To change the Primary Language go to Step 7 of Modifying the System Primary or Secondary Language To change the Secondary Language go to Step 7 of Modifying the System Primary or Secondary Language Press to return to the Programming Main Menu or hang up to quit Modifying the System Primary or Secondary Language Update Form 1 for the voice messaging system to show the change in the System Language selected for Monolingual Mode or the change in Primary or Secondary Language selected for Bilingual Mode When you change the Language selection the system uses any recorded messages already associated with the new language After changing the Language selection listen to the Automated Attendant Service Day and Night Menu Prompts to make sure they are still relevant and re record them if necessary gt NOTE When you change the Language selection the Mailbox Language for any mailboxes that were left at the factory setting also change to reflect the new Language selection Any mailboxes that were assigned a different language do not change To change the System Primary or Secondary Language 1 Access t
230. mailbox size Press O to deactivate Record a Call The system plays The Record a Call feature is turned off Press DHA to quit 6 To activate deactivate Record a Call for another mailbox repeat steps 3 through 5 7 Press to return to the Programming Main Menu or hang up to quit 5 57 System Management Automatic VMS Cover 5 58 Use this communications system procedure to assign automatic voice mail coverage to the appropriate extensions Remember to use this procedure to assign automatic coverage to newly created guest mailboxes Calls to these extensions are routed immediately to the mailbox the call does not try ringing the extension irst Update Form B2 of the System Planner for the communications system before you begin To assign Automatic VMS Cover to extensions i on Press Feature 0 O System Program System Program 2 Enter the System Password if required 3 4 Enter the number of the extension to be covered by the voice messaging Press AQBMO system Press until the display reads 1 Assigned To program another extension press Next item or Prev item until the extension number shows on the display Then repeat Step 5 Press Feature Q to exit programming mode Modifying Mailboxes VMS Cover Rings PARTNER ACS Release 3 0 or later Use this communications system procedure to change the number of times calls
231. mated Attendant to Forms 3 3A 3B 4 4A 5 and 5A to program Automated Attendant Service Automated Attendant number TO CHANGE SELECTOR CODE ACTION TO ANNOUNCEMENT BILINGUAL MODE PRESS PRESS ENTER PRESS PRESS ENTER PRESS PRESS PRESS PRESS PRESS PRESS PRESS PRESS PRESS PRESS PRESS PRESS PRESS PRESS PRESS for Day Menu to modify Selector Code 1 through 9 to modify for Announcement Announcement number to record the Announcement in e Primary Language after recording to approve to record the Announcement in e Secondary Language after recording to approve the nouncements to continue without ogramming another Selector ode or to program another Selector de repeat to record the Day Menu Prompt the Primary Language after recording to approve to record the Day Menu Prompt the Secondary Language after recording to approve to approve all changes BS We Oe SMFWHSNAES QO fo SAR SNA FB OW TO RETURN TO THE PROGRAMMING MAIN MENU PRESS TO EXIT PROGRAMMING PRESS o Automated Attendant REFER to Forms 3 3A 3B 4 4A 5 and 5A PRESS to program Automated Attendant Service ENTER Automated Attendant number TO SELECTOR CODE ACTION TO SELECTOR CODE TRANSFER BILINGUAL MODE PRESS for Day Menu PRESS 6 to modify ENTER a Selector Code P through 9 PRESS 0 to modify PRESS for Selector Code Transfer ENTER the extension or grou
232. mated Attendant Service answers outside calls after the fourth ring This delay gives the receptionist time to answer the call VMS Hunt Schedule This feature determines when the communications system is to route calls to the Automated Attendant Service On the PARTNER ACS Release 3 0 or later this feature allows you to specify this information for each line For all other communications systems the information you specify applies to all lines receiving Automated Attendant Service VMS Hunt Schedule works in conjunction with the communication system s Night Service feature so that the voice messaging system can play the appropriate menu prompt In other words the menu prompt the caller hears depends on the VMS Hunt Schedule setting you select and the status of the Night Service button at the receptionist s extension You can choose one of the following VMS Hunt Schedule settings a Always factory setting Routes outside calls to Automated Attendant Service for call handling all the time When Night Service is off the Day Menu Prompt plays when Night Service is on the Night Menu Prompt plays a Day Only Routes outside calls to Automated Attendant Service only when Night Service is off The Day Menu Prompt plays a Night Only Routes outside calls to Automated Attendant Service only when Night Service is on The Night Menu Prompt plays Transfer Return Extension For extensions associated with the mail system unit this option spec
233. mmended that you perform the following activities for which corresponding procedures are included in this chapter Verify system operation Genera e a System Configuration Report This report can be directed to a PC running a terminal emulation program Instructi ons for connecting a PC to your PARTNER MAIL VS system are included injChapter 2 Perform Instruct a system backup ions for installing the PC Card that came with your PARTNER MAIL VS system are included in Chapter 2 Instructions for perform ing a system backup are provided later in this chapter 4 5 Initial Programming Initial Communications System Setup You must perform the first two procedures for every installation The procedure for Outgoing Call Restriction is strongly recommended to ensure system security For the following procedures you need to know the extension numbers associated with the PARTNER MAIL VS system module Figure 2 1 in Chapter 2 and the figures in Appendix D show the possible extension numbers for the most common configurations For the extension numbers appropriate to this installation locate Form B1 of the System Planner for the communications system VMS Hunt Group Extensions You must use this procedure to assign the extensions associated with the voice messaging system module to Hunt Group 7 This Hunt Group which is called the VMS Hunt Group is used exclusively for the voice messaging system To as
234. mply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of FCC rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manuals may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will have to correct the interference at his or her own expense gt NOTE References to FCC regulations are not applicable outside of the U S B 1 FCC Information FCC Notification and Repair Information This equipment is registered with the FCC in accordance with Part 68 of its rules In compliance with those rules you are advised of the following Means of Connection Connection to the telephone network shall be through a standard network interface jack USOC RJ11C These USOCs must be ordered from your local telephone company a This equipment may not be used with party lines or coin telephone lines a Notification to the Telephone Companies Before connecting this equipment you or your equipment supplier must notify your local telephone company s business office of the following The telephone number s you will be using with this equipment The appropriate registration numb
235. mpt enter the first PARTNER MAIL VS extension number specified on Form B1 3 At the Data prompt press QO 4 Press Next item or Prev item until the next PARTNER MAIL VS extension number specified on Form B1 displays 5 Atthe Data prompt press QOO 6 If additional PARTNER MAIL VS extensions are specified on Form B1 repeat Steps 4 and 5 for each one 7 Press Feau OO to exit programming 8 Continue with the next section for information about programming the voice messaging system Outgoing Call Restriction Use this procedure to restrict all extensions associated with the voice mail system unit from making outside calls Outgoing call restriction is strongly recommended in particular to protect system security when Outcalling privileges are assigned to subscribers on Form 2B gt NOTE If Outcalling is permitted be sure to create and assign Allowed_and Disallowed Phone Lists as needed for Outcalling numbers See Disallowed Phone Numbers and Allowed Phone Numbers flater in this chapter for instructions 1 Press HOOD 2 Atthe Extension prompt enter the first PARTNER MAIL VS extension number specified on Form B1 3 Press until the display reads 2 Inside Only 4 Press Next item or Prev item until the next PARTNER MAIL VS extension number specified on Form B1 displays 2 In some countries the procedure code for Transfer Return Extension is 309 Check the
236. n Day Menu Prompt and Announcements 5 29 Modifying the Night Menu Prompt 5 33 Group Call Distribution Option 1 5 35 VMS Hunt Delay PARTNER ACS Release 3 0 or later 5 36 VMS Hunt Delay All Other PARTNER Systems 5 36 Automatic Extension Privacy 5 37 VMS Hunt Schedule PARTNER ACS Release 3 0 or later 5 38 Deleting a Mailbox 5 45 Creating a Mailbox 5 46 Reinitializing a Mailbox 5 49 Contents Administering Record a Call for a Mailbox 5 56 Automatic VMS Cover 5 58 VMS Cover Rings PARTNER ACS Release 3 0 or later 5 59 VMS Cover Rings All Other PARTNER Systems 5 59 Do Not Disturb F01 5 69 Record a Call PARTNER ACS Release 3 0 or later F24 5 71 Call Screening PARTNER ACS Release 3 0 or later F25 a Generating a Configuration Report 5 73 mw Performing a System Backup 5 76 m Performing a System Restore 5 78 a Line Coverage 5 60 6 Troubleshooting 6 1 a When You Need Help 6 1 a Automated Attendant Service 6 2 6 2 Outside Callers Hear Ringing but System Does Not Answer Outside Callers Hear Silence Tones or Ringing During Transfer 6 3 System Does Not Answer Immediately 6 4 System Cuts Off Part of Greeting 6 5 System Transfers Call to Receptionist Before Playing the Menu Prompt 6 5 System Does Not Transfer Calls Properly 6 5 System Does Not Respond to Entered Digits 6 6 Unanswered Transferred Calls Ring Continually 6 6 vi Contents a Call Answ
237. n Form 2 followed by Press for Mailbox Language Press amp to modify Mailbox Language Enter the number corresponding to the Mailbox Language specified on Form 2 Press to confirm Repeat Steps 3 through 7 for each mailbox whose language is to be changed Press to return to the Programming Main Menu Continue with the appropriate mailbox administration procedures in the remainder of this section or Line Ownership later in this chapter 4 17 Initial Programming Changing Mailbox Message Length or Size 4 18 You can adjust a subscriber s mailbox message length or storage space by changing the default message length 4 minutes or mailbox size 60 minutes for the receptionist s mailbox and 20 minutes for all others The message length administered by this procedure applies to the message that callers can leave in the subscriber s mailbox the message that the subscriber can create and send and to the comment that a subscriber can add to a forwarded message 1 If necessary access the Programming Main Menu If you are already at the Programming Main Menu skip to Step 2 a Press or the programmed Voice Mail Auto Dial button b Press Q c Enter the password and press d Press The system plays the system programming options 2 Press for Mailboxes 3 Enter the number of a mailbox whose message length and size is to change as indicated on Form 2 followe
238. n Lock button 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program Central Tel Program 2 Enter the number of the extension to be programmed 3 Press a programmable button 4 5 Press Eear AO Program another button for this extension or press eature 0 to exit programming mode Label the button at the user s extension Telephone Button Programming Record a Call PARTNER ACS Release 3 0 or later F24 The Record a Call feature is available only on the PARTNER Advanced Communications System Release 3 0 or later with a 4 port PARTNER MAIL VS Release 5 0 configuration and a system telephone This button allows the subscriber to begin recording a call in progress with one touch of a button If the system detects 15 seconds of silence after recording has begun the system automatically turns off the Record a Call feature and the subscriber must press the programmed feature button to resume recording the conversation The resumed conversation is saved as a separate message The recorded conversation is saved in the subscriber s mailbox The button programmed for this purpose must have lights To program a Record a Call button 1 Press Feature 0 System Program System Program Central Tel Program Enter the number of the extension to be programmed Press a programmable button with lights Press eature 2 Program another button for this extension or pre
239. n Rings 105 By default a transferred call rings 4 times before going to the transfer return extension Write number 0 9 0 no return if different from default Outside Conference Denial 109 By default a conference call can include 2 outside parties Write No if 2 outside parties are not allowed Ring on Transfer 119 By default the caller hears ringing when the call is transferred Write NA if music on hold or silence is desired Toll Call Prefix 402 By default 0 or 1 must be dialed before the area code for a long distance call Write No if O or 1 is not required System Password 403 By default no password is programmed to override dialing restrictions and to turn Night Service on and off Write 4 digits if password is desired tg Star Code Dial 410 By default the system inserts a 0 second delay after a valid Central Office star code when it autodials Write number 1 5 of seconds if a longer delay is desired or NO if this feature should not be active Music on Hold 602 By default the Music on Hold jack on the processor module isactive Write No if the jack is deactivated Automatic Daylight Standard Time 126 Release 3 0 or later By default the system automatically calculates Daylight Savings Time Write No to turn off this feature 10 Line Coverage Complete items based on Line Coverage selection on Form A Item 8 DXD PARTNER ACS Release 2 0 or later only l
240. n module In other words the voice messaging system module resembles a 200 206 or 400 module to the communications system even though the voice messaging system itself does not have any physical line jacks Therefore the shaded modules in the following illustrations represent either the voice messaging system module or one of the other 6 extension modules Note that the bottom two for 2 port configurations or four extensions for 4 port configurations of the voice messaging system module will be assigned to Hunt Group 7 as indicated in the tables corresponding to each illustration For example in Figure D 1 when the voice messaging system module is stalled in slot 4 extensions 38 and 39 are assigned to Hunt Group 7 for a 2 port ystem In this same figure when the voice messaging system module is stalled in slot 5 extensions 44 and 45 that is the bottom two of the six xtensions on the voice messaging system module are assigned to Hunt Group when a 6 extension module that is a 200 206 or 400 module represented by e shaded module is installed in slot 4 If an 8 extension 308 module were stalled in slot 4 instead and the voice messaging system were installed in slot extensions 46 and 47 would be assigned to Hunt Group 7 as shown in FNOZ 0 5 ay Dial Plans 5 Slot Carrier
241. n or remove Record a Call privileges for a mailbox 1 Access the Programming Main Menu a Press or the programmed Voice Mail Auto Dial button b Press MQW c Enter the password and press d Press The system plays the system programming options Modifying Mailboxes 2 Press to program mailboxes The system tells you how many mailboxes exist and how many are allowed then Pleas nter the mailbox number followed by or press for the next mailbox 3 Enter the number of the mailbox for which you want to activate deactivate Record a Call privileges followed by The system plays Mailbox XX exists To administer the message length and mailbox size press 2 To reinitialize the password press 3 To reinitialize the mailbox press 4 To administer Outcalling press 5 To program the Mailbox Language press 6 To administer Record a Call press 7 To delete the mailbox press 3 If finished with this mailbox press or for the next mailbox press 4 Press to administer Record a Call The system plays Enter the Record a Call message length in minutes from 1 to 60 followed by To turn this feature off enter O If finished press 5 Either Enter a value from 1 to 60 followed by to activate Record a Call The system repeats the Record a Call message length you specified The Record a Call message length must be less than or equal to the
242. naging the PARTNER MAIL VS Voice Messaging Sys ramming em on the PARTNER Plus PARTNER II PARTNER Endeavor or PARTNER Advanced Communications System ACS It is intended for the technician who installs the hardware and programs the initial system settings and for the the person who is responsible for managing the system on an System Manager on going basis xi About This Guide Terminology This guide uses the following terms a Voice messaging system VMS The PARTNER MAIL VS Voice Messaging System a Subscribers Users who have a mailbox on the voice messaging system Communications system CS in most countries Release 3 1 or later of the PARTNER Plus and PARTNER II systems Release 1 0 of the PARTNER Endeavor and Release 1 0 or later of the PARTNER Advanced Communications Systems In the U K Release 2 0 or later of the PARTNER Plus system Some VMS features are not available on all communications systems a System phones the telephones specifically designed to work with the communications system including where available the PARTNER 34D PARTNER 18D PARTNER 18 PARTNER 6 PARTNER Endeavor 34D PARTNER Endeavor 18D PARTNER Endeavor 18 PARTNER Endeavor 6 MLS 34D MLS 18D MLS 12D MLS 12 MLS 6 MDC 9000 and MDW 9000LC 6 MDC 9000 MDW 9000 MDW 9010 and MDW 9030P xii How to Use This Guide How to Use This Guide If you are the technician re
243. nce Drop F 06 Drop Contact Closure 1 F 41 2 CC1 Contact Closure 2 F 42 2 CC2 Direct Line Pickup Active Line 68 DLPA Direct Line Pickup lIdle Line I 8 DLPI Exclusive Hold F 02 ExHold Fax Management I XX 2 FAX XX Group Calling Ring Page I 7 G or 7 G GCall g Group Hunt Ring Signal 177 G or 77 G Hunt g Group Pickup 66 G P U Grp g Intercom Autodial I XX or XX 2 Ext XX Last Number Redial F 05 LNR Loudspeaker Paging I 70 Loudspk Manual Signaling F 13 XX or F 13 XX 2 MS XX Message Light Off F 10 XX 5 MsgOff XX Message Light On F 09 XX 5 MsgOn XX Recall F 03 Recall Save Number Redial F 04 SNR Simultaneous Paging I 70 SPage Station Lock F 21 2 Lock Touch Tone Enable F 08 TT EN Voice Mail Messages I 777 VMMsgs 777 V Voice Mailbox Transfer F 14 VMBox paiinbey qaq 1 Requires Auto Dial button for each extension 2 Button with lights is recommended but not required 3 Extension number can be programmed as Auto Dial button 4 You can program the origination extension only or both the origination and destination extension 5 You can program the extension number 6 Available with ACS R2 0 or later only 7 Available with ACS R3 0 or later F Feature button G Group I Left Intercom button XX Extension Lucent Technologies Bell Labs In
244. ned to a subscriber s mailbox Mailbox Password A code of up to four digits that subscribers enter to log in to the voice messaging system A pass word is used to keep messages confidential Mailbox Transfer A Selector Code Action that directs the Automated Attendant to transfer calls to a specified mail box number when a caller presses the digit that is Selector Code associated with this action Menu Definition A voice messaging system feature that lets you customize the Automated Attendant Service transfer options available to outside callers Menu Prompt The customized day or night message that an outside caller hears after the Automated Attendant Service answers the call Message Creation A voice messaging system feature that allows a subscriber to record a voice message and send it to one or more voice mailboxes in the system Monolingual Mode A Language Mode setting that allows messages and prompts to be played in one of several avail able languages See a so Bilingual Mode Music On Hold system Equipment that lets you play recorded music or messages to callers who are placed on hold A music on hold audio source must be connected to the processor module in the control unit N Night Service A communications system feature that is used in conjunction with Automated Attendant Service to activate the Night Menu Prompt GL 5 Glossary O One touch Intercom Calling button See Auto Dial button Outca
245. nes Pools Not Assigned on Form B2 9 Also write Transfer Return Ext No 306 on this form 8 Check corresponding alert extensions in next column To prevent outside calls at the doorphone remove all 10 Extensions 78 and 79 should be assigned to the two voice ports on PARTNER Voice Messaging Extensions 78 and 79 must be assigned to Hunt Group 7 and any previous assignments for Hunt Group 7 should be erased Lucent Technologies Bell Labs Innovations Form B2 Customized Extension Settings PAGE Required if you want to change extension settings from defaults For additional instructions see pages 7 and 8 Identify Extension Settings Identify Line Ringing CTP Option Identify Restrictions Permissions Identify if Different than Default If Different than Default If Different than Defaults Group Assignments q laz l _ lo 8 g 2185 8 a ae ll g Ql EA oO g Write line numbers or pool access codes Write line numbers or pool access codes 2 el S al e g lt IR o l S 3 2 in each column to show desired for Line Access Restriction 302 or 5 gt i SIZ S By a S 2 o gt S l so e e ey ina Ringi inti zg 2 Sje SfPoR o S SIS Ele Slola s7 g z g 2 Line Ringing options Pool Access Restriction 315 amp Sl Zl eeleclacleol los Poleet O aa 2 a
246. ng is 2 rings For PARTNER ACS Release 3 0 or later this can be specified on an 10 Write group number 1 4 If a loudspeaker is connected and Simultaneous Paging desired NA Not Assigned or individual extension basis put appropriate extensions in Calling Group 1 Also see Form C Simultaneous Paging Not Active 4 Specify number of rings 1 9 desired before an incoming call is sent to a user s voice mailbox The 11 Write group number 1 6 R No Restriction default setting is 3 rings For PARTNER ACS Release 3 0 or later this can be specified on an individual 12 Check off the same PARTNER MAIL or PARTNER MAIL VS extensions indicated on Form B1 Pooled extension basis For the PARTNER Voice Messaging PC Card extensions 78 and 79 must be assigned to CTP Centralized Telephone 5 In Key mode use Line Assignment 301 to remove lines from or assign lines to extensions In Hybrid Hunt Group 7 7 Prodrarimin p mode use Pool Extension Assignment 314 to remove pools from or assign pools to extensions Pooling available only for ACS R2 0 or later ogramming 6 Write IN for Inside Only or LOC for Local Only to indicate restrictions for all outgoing calls on all lines Form C1 PARTNER 34D Phone Check Desired Button Features write in extension or group number Lucent Technologies Bell Labs Innovations
247. ng system features including how to listen to voice mail messages record a personal greeting program a personal operator create group lists and program Outcalling numbers and schedule a PARTNER MAIL VS Voice Messaging System Planning Forms 585 322 533 contains the forms that the System Manager must complete before programming the voice messaging system To order these materials call the Lucent Technologies BCS Publications Fulfillment Center at 1 800 457 1235 in the continental U S or at 1 317 361 5353 Some of these materials also are available in other languages For more information about these materials or about communications system materials contact the BCS Publications Fulfillment Center your Lucent Technologies Representative or local Authorized Dealer Identifying Your Communications System Not all voice messaging system features are available on all PARTNER communications systems To determine which PARTNER Advanced Communications System you are using press Feature S 9 at a display phone The system displays the communications system and its release number XV Overview The PARTNER MAIL VS Voice Messaging System is designed to work with the communications system to automate the call handling needs of the business The voice messaging system a Expands easily from a 2 port to a 4 port configuration to accommodate growth and ensure optimal performance Both configurations include a maxim
248. nge the current System Language used in Monolingual Mode or the current Primary and or Secondary Language used in Bilingual Mode use Modifying the System Primary or Secondary Language Modifying the Language Mode Update Form 1 for the voice messaging system to show the change in Language Mode When you change the Language Mode the system continues to use any recorded messages associated with the selected language For example if you change from Monolingual to Bilingual Mode and the System Language in Monolingual Mode was Latin American Spanish callers will hear Latin American Spanish as the Primary Language Also when you change the mode listen to the Automated Attendant Service Day and Night Menu Prompts to make sure they are still relevant and re record them if necessary To change the Language Mode Ai Access the Programming Main Menu a Press or the programmed Voice Mail Auto Dial button b Press QOQA c Enter the password and press d Press The system plays the system programming options Press for Language The system plays To program Language Mode press 1 To program System Language press 2 If finished press Press for Language Mode The system plays the current Language Mode then For Monolingual Mode press 1 For Bilingual Mode press 2 If finished press 5 11 System Management 4 Either 5 At this Press Q for Monolingual Mode T
249. ngual Mode press to check the Night Menu Prompt in the Secondary Language You should also hear any recorded Announcement Line Assignment ile 2 3 4 36 Call in on each line assigned to Automated Attendant 1 Verify that the correct Automated Attendant Menu plays Repeat Steps 1 and 2 for each Automated Attendant Verifying System Operation Call Answer Service VMS Extension Coverage 1 4 Press the Do Not Disturb button at the appropriate destination extensions to quickly route your test calls to Call Answer Service For extensions that do not have Automatic VMS Cover turn on coverage by pressing the VMS Cover button at those extensions Call the first extension that has VMS coverage either automatic or manual f Do Not Disturb is on at the extension Call Answer Service should answer the call after one ring and you should hear the default greeting for that mailbox If Do Not Disturb is not on the call rings at the extension before Call Answer Service answers it Repeat this procedure for every extension that has voice mail coverage VMS Line Coverage 1 2 Call in on the first line that is programmed for VMS Line Cover Call Answer Service should answer the call on the fifth ring and the factory set greeting should prompt you to leave a message in that line owner s mailbox Repeat this procedure for every line that has VMS Line Cover Line Coverage Extension 1 2 Make sure VM
250. novations Make as many copies as you need Use template and or checklist For additional instructions see pages 9 through 14 Template Instructions e If desired write in line number pool access code dial code feature or auto dial number e If desired write in Line Ringing Imm Del or No from Form B2 e If desired write in Line Access Restriction or Pool Access Restrictiont Out In or No from Form B2 t Available with ACS R2 0 or later only Form C3 PARTNER 18 18D Phone PAGE 3 of 8 Check Desired Button Features write in extension or group number SAMPLE Automatic System Answer 111 6 ASA Direct Extension Dial 113 6 DXD Night Service 503 NightSvc Outgoing Call Restriction 114 1 OCR 04 DEL Wake Up Service 115 Wake Call Screening F 25 7 SCREEN luo OL 1X9 L O O ri O O Eoy O O O O oan VMS O O O DND Auto Dial VM Box IMM mT z 2 05 L 06 L O _ n IMM IMM L IMM O IMM 01 U2 Lo O oq Intercom g Intercom Ext O gt IN Caller ID Call Log F 23 Calls Caller ID Inspect F 17 ID Inspect PARTNER 18D only In Hybrid mode only if pool 880 is assigned these two buttons are as
251. ns system 4 35 Initial Programming Night Menu After the prompt choose an option from the day menu Make sure your call is transferred to the appropriate extension or group or the correct Announcement is played Repeat Steps 2 through 6 for each option on the day menu If the system is set for Bilingual Mode press to check the Day Menu Prompt in the Secondary Language You should also hear any recorded Announcement Repeat Steps 2 through 4 for each line that has Automated Attendant Service coverage If the VMS Hunt Schedule is set for Always continue with Night Menu below Make sure the Night Service button at extension 10 is on Callin on a line answered by the Automated Attendant Service when Night Service is in effect If the system is set for Immediate Automated Attendant Service should answer the call on the second ring Delayed Automated Attendant Service should answer the call after the fourth ring gt NOTE For PARTNER Advanced Communications System Release 3 0 or later this setting is specified in number of rings Listen for the Night Menu Prompt 5 If you already tested the Day Menu go to Step 8 Otherwise after the prompt choose an option from the night menu Make sure your call is transferred to the appropriate extension or group or the correct announcement is played Repeat Steps 2 through 6 for each option on the night menu If the system is set for Bili
252. ns system Line Coverage Refer to Form A Page 1 Line Coverage If either check marks or extension numbers appear in the VMS Mail column use Line Coverage below to program personal lines for Call Answer Service If nothing is specified in the VMS Mail column of Form A refer to Form B2 to see if Automatic VMS Cover is assigned to any extensions If it is refer to Automatic VMS Cover Jand VMS Cover Rings later in this chapter If neither VMS Mail for personal lines or Automatic VMS Cover is specified skip to Telephone Button Programming Refer to Form A Page 1 Line Coverage VMS Mail If check marks appear for any lines in this column use the procedure in VMS Line Coverage below If extension numbers are specified for any lines in this column use the procedure in Line Coverage Extension below VMS Line Coverage Option 3 To assign VMS Mail lines checked on Form A Page 1 Line Coverage to Hunt Group 7 As D Press AAMG 2 Atthe Group prompt press 3 Atthe Line prompt enter the first line checked in the VMS Mail column 4 5 Press until the display reads 3 VMS Line Cover To program another line press Next item or Prev Item until the appropriate line number displays Press until the display reads 3 VMS Line Cover Repeat Steps 5 and 6 for each VMS Mail line checked on Form A If extension numbers are specified for any lines in this column use the
253. nsion Line Coverage After assigning Extension Line Coverage make sure VMS coverage is on for the extension See Automatic VMS Cover Jearlier in this chapter or VMS Cover later in this chapter Use this procedure to modify the assignment of outside lines for Extension Line Coverage To assign VMS MAIL lines specified on Form A Page 1 Line Coverage to specific extensions 1 Press eature 0 0 System Program System Program 2 Enter System Password if required 3 Press MOOE 4 Atthe Line prompt enter the first VMS MAIL line to be programmed as indicated by the extension number in the Line Coverage column of Form A Page 1 5 Atthe Data prompt enter the number of the extension in the VMS MAIL column 6 To program another line press Next item or Prev Item until the appropriate line number displays Then repeat Step 5 7 Press Feature O to exit programming 5 67 System Management Telephone Button Programming Update Form C of the System Planner for the communications system if you change button programming for a subscriber s extension It is recommended that the following features be programmed on buttons on each subscriber s system phone VMS Cover allows the subscriber to manually turn on and off voice mail coverage Do Not Disturb allows the subscriber to send callers to his or her mailbox immediately without first ringing the subscriber s extension
254. nt to Forms 3 3A 3B 4 4A 5 and 5A to program Automated Attendant Service Automated Attendant number TO CHANGE SELECTOR CODE ACTION TO DIRECT EXTENSION TRANSFER BILINGUAL MODE PRESS for Day Menu PRESS to modify ENTER a Selector Code 1 through 9 PRESS to modify PRESS for Direct Extension Transfer To program another Selector Code for rect Extension Transfer repeat to approve to record the Day Menu Prompt the Primary Language after recording to approve to record the Day Menu Prompt the Secondary Language after recording to approve to approve all changes w HBHOMRFTNARFAHAS3 oe Ob PRESS PRESS PRESS PRESS PRESS PRESS PRESS PRESS TO CHANGE SELECTOR CODE ACTION TO CENTREX TRANSFER BILINGUAL MODE PRESS PRESS ENTER PRESS PRESS ENTER for Day Menu to modify Selector Code 1 through 9 to modify for Centrex Transfer Centrex number and wait for stem to time out to continue to approve to confirm another Selector Code for ntrex Transfer repeat to approve to record the Day Menu Prompt the Primary Language after recording to approve to record the Day Menu Prompt the Primary Language after recording to approve to approve all changes ee NEO OH PRESS PRESS PRESS To progra OWE 93 PRESS PRESS PRESS PRESS PRESS PRESS PRESS PRESS 6 E O FN H S FY TO REPLAY A MENU PRESS TO RETURN TO A PREVIOUS MENU PRESS Auto
255. nterne L abonn ne doit pas oublier qu il est possible que la conformit aux conditions nonc es ci dessus n emp chent pas la d gradation du service dans certaines situations Actuellement les entreprises de t l communication ne permettent pas que l on raccorde leur mat riel des jacks d abonn sauf dans les cas pr cis pr vus pas les tarifs particuliers de ces entreprises Les r parations de mat riel homologu doivent tre effectu es par un centre d entretien canadien autoris d sign par le foumisseur La compagnie de t l communications peut demander l utilisateur de d brancher un appareil la suite de r parations ou de modifications effectu es par l utilisateur ou cause de mauvais fonctionnement Pour sa propre protection l utilisateur doit s assurer que tous les fils de mise la terre de la source d nergie lectrique des lignes t l phoniques et des canalisations d eau m talliques s il y en a sont raccord s ensemble Cette pr caution est particuli rement importante dans les r gions rurales AVERTISSEMENT L utilisateur ne doit pas tenter de faire ces raccordements lui m me il doit avoir racours un service d inspection des installations lectriques ou un lectricien selon le cas L indice de charge IC assign chaque dispositif terminal indique pour viter toute surcharge le pourcentage de la charge totale qui peut tre raccord e a un circuit t l phonique bo
256. nu Prompt System Language or Primary Language Shows the script used to record the Night Menu Prompt in the System Language for Monolingual Mode or the Primary Language for Bilingual Mode A separate copy of this form should be made for each Automated Attendant Form 5A Night Menu Prompt Secondary Language Used only if the system is set for Bilingual Mode Shows the script used to record the Night Menu Prompt in the Secondary Language A separate copy of this form should be made for each Automated Attendant Form 6 Line Ownership Identifies the lines assigned VMS Line Coverage Also shows for each owned line the associated telephone number the name of the subscriber who owns the line and the owner s mailbox number 3 7 Understanding Programming Using the Forms The following table shows which voice mail system forms should be completed according to your voice mail system feature selection Use VMS From Programming Form Main Menu press Select Language Mode System Administration Prompt Language System Language Primary and Secondary Language Assign Mailboxes to subscribers identify Mailbox Language and Outcalling and Record a Call privileg es administer Mailbox Message Length and Size Identify lines assigned to an Automated Attendant Dial 0 Timeout Extension Menu Definition i e Direct Extension Transfer Selector Code Transfer Centrex Transfer Mailbox Transfer and Announcements Ext or Group
257. nu or hang up to quit Automated Attendant Service Modifying the Menu Definition Day Menu Prompt and Announcements For each Automated Attendant update Forms 3 and 4 for the voice messaging system to show modifications to the Menu Definition and or Day Menu Prompt for systems operating in Monolingual Mode Forms 3B and 4A for systems operating in Bilingual Mode update Forms 3 and 3A for the voice messaging system to show modifications to the Announcements if any for systems operating in Monolingual Mode Form 3B for systems operating in Bilingual Mode You can use the following procedure to do the following a Modify the Automated Attendant Menu Definition including Selector codes and the Dial0 Timeout Extension m Re record an Automated Attendant Announcement a Re record the Automated Attendant Menu Prompt A CAUTION It is important to understand that you must approve each element that is the Menu Definition the Day Menu Prompt and any Announcements as well as save all of these entries in Step 27 If you exit at any point before saving your approved entries your entries will be lost This procedure is designed to ensure that callers do not hear the incomplete menu while you are in the process of modifying it To change the Menu Definition Day Menu Prompt and or Announcements 1 Access the Programming Main Menu a Press or the programmed Voice Mail Auto Dial button b Press OQA c Enter the p
258. number specified in Column D of Form 3 and wait for the system to time out c Press Q to continue d Press to approve e Press 8 to confirm f Go to Step 15 Return to Step 7 for the next Selector Code you want to modify When you have finished programming Selector Codes go to Step 16 Press to approve your entries and finish modifying the Menu Definition The system plays To record a new prompt for this menu press 1 To use the existing prompt and save any Menu Definition changes press 5 31 System Management 19 20 ai 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 5 32 If you do not want to record a new Day Menu Prompt or Announcement press and go to Step 28 otherwise continue with Step 18 To record anew Day Menu Prompt or Announcement lift the handset press C and record after the beep The prompt or Announcement can be up to four minutes long factory set length Press Q when you are finished recording Choose an option or skip this step Press o immediately re record the Day Menu Prompt or Announcement Begin recording immediately after the beep press after recording Repeat if desired Press o play back the Day Menu Prompt or Announcement Repeat if necessary Press o delete the Day Menu Prompt or Announcement and return to Step 18 to be prompted for re recording Do one of the following For systems operating in Monolingual Mode pr
259. ny extension that begins with a 1 extensions 10 19 b Go to Step 14 12 For Mailbox Transfer a Press b Enter the mailbox number specified in Column D of Form 3 c Goto Step 14 13 For Centrex Transfer a Press b Enter the Centrex number specified in Column D of Form 3 and wait for the system to time out c Press Q to continue d Press to approve e Press 8 to confirm f Go to Step 14 14 Return to Step 6 for the next Selector Code for which there is information in Column C When you are finished programming all Selector Codes go to Step 15 15 Press to approve your entries and finish modifying the Menu Definition 16 At this point do one of the following If you do not want to record a Day Menu Prompt or Announcement press to approve the Menu Definition and go to Step 26 If you want to record the Day Menu Prompt in the Primary Language continue with Step 17 lf you want to record the Day Menu Prompt or Announcement in the Secondary Language go to Step 22 17 Lift the handset press and record the Menu Prompt from Form 4 18 Press after recording 4 13 Initial Programming 19 Choose an option or skip this step Press to immediately re record this Menu Prompt Begin recording immediately after the beep press after recording Repeat if desired Press to play back this Menu Prompt Press to delete this Menu Prompt and retu
260. o extensions 10 through 57 gt NOTE To protect system security the System Manager should delete any unused mailboxes Guest Mailboxes 1 14 The System Manager can use any of the 48 mailboxes that come with the voice messaging system as guest mailboxes for users who do not have their own phone but still require mailboxes If this is the case either the Automated Attendant Service or system users can transfer a caller directly to the guest mailbox where the caller can leave a message Guests can call the voice messaging system from any touch tone phone to retrieve their messages For more information on guest mailboxes see Guest Mailboxes in Chapter 5 Security Security The System Manager is responsible for the security of the system It is important Under rick a hat you fully understand and appropriately administer this product to reduce your risk of incurring charges that result from unauthorized use of the system the law you the customer are responsible for paying part or all of those unauthorized calls Be aware that criminals called hackers may attempt to gain unauthorized access o your communications system and your voice mail system Hackers often try to company s employees into providing them with access to an outside line or an outside operator They may also concentrate their activities in two areas related to the mail system They try to dial into a mailbox then execute a transfer
261. ocal Telephone Company Subscription Services e g Repeat Call Group write no 206 955 4568 955 4569 553 4570 333 4571 3393 4572 1 Check if desired Also see Form B1 AA Extension 607 column 2 Check if desired Also see Form A Item 10 DXD and Form C Direct Extension Dial Button 113 3 Check if desired Also see Form A Item 10 VMS AA and Form B1 PARTNER MAIL PARTNER MAIL VS or PARTNER Voice Messaging column For PARTNER MAIL VS 5 0 or PARTNER MAIL 3 0 specify which of the multiple Automated Attendants should be used For previous releases which support only one Automated Attendant just check the box 4 Check if desired Also see Form A Item 10 ASA and Form C Automatic System Answer Button 111 ij if Write group number 1 6 covering this line Also see Form B2 Hunt Group Extensions 505 1 6 Check desired line far 206 Also see Form B1 PARTNER MAIL PARTNER MAIL VS or PARTNER Voice Messaging PC CARD column Write extension number of line owner eligible for Line Coverage could include VMS coverage Also write line owner s name in next column Available with PARTNER ACS R2 0 or later only N Oo Lucent Technologies Bell Labs Innovations Form A System Configuration Required for PARTNER Advanced Communications System For additional instructions see pages 3 and 4 PAGE 2of3 9 System
262. of times the message has been forwarded Possible Cause 3 An Outcalling number is incorrectly programmed forwarding Outcalling notification to an internal telephone associated with this mailbox Each time a new message is received while Outcalling is in effect the system will send the notification to this mailbox according to the specified number of Outcalling cycles and intervals What to do Verify that Outcalling numbers are correctly entered Subscribers Hear Busy Signal When Calling In to Voice Mail 6 10 Possible Cause 1 This is normal when the PARTNER MAIL VS extensions are busy What to do There are a number of ways to reduce the amount of time a PARTNER MAIL VS extension is busy For example you can recommend that users access the Tutor Service feature during non peak calling hours you can reduce the number options in the Automated Attendant Service menu you can reduce the use if any of the Record a Call feature or you can reduce the length of the Automated Attendant Service menu prompt If you have a 2 port system you may want to consider upgrading to a 4 port system Voice Mail Service Possible Cause 2 The PARTNER MAIL VS module may not be installed correctly What to do Check the PARTNER MAIL VS module to make sure it is securely mounted in the control unit Also check the module s LEDs the Power LED should be steady green and the Status LED should not be lit If the Power LED is lit perform t
263. old 602 in the Programming and Use guide for the communications system 6 3 Troubleshooting System Does Not Answer Immediately 6 4 Possible Cause 1 Automated Attendant Service is programmed for Delayed call handling What to do If you do not want Delayed call handling program the communications system s VMS Hunt Delay feature for Immediate call handling On PARTNER Advanced Communications System Release 3 0 or later this problem may indicate that the VMS Hunt Delay feature needs to be reset to two or fewer rings Possible Cause 2 The PARTNER MAIL VS extensions may be busy What to do There are a number of ways to reduce the amount of time a PARTNER MAIL VS extension is busy For example you can recommend that users access the Tutor Service feature during non peak calling hours you can reduce the number of options in the Automated Attendant Service menu or you can reduce the length of the Automated Attendant Service menu prompt You can also limit the use if any of the Record a Call feature to reduce the amount of time a PARTNER MAIL VS extension is busy If you have a 2 port PARTNER MAIL VS configuration you may consider upgrading to the 4 port configuration to correct this problem Possible Cause 3 The PARTNER MAIL VS system is a 4 port configuration but only two voice messaging system extensions have been identified in Hunt Group 7 What to do Verify that the extensions are correctly assigned to Hunt Gro
264. on the Night Menu Prompt plays Subscribers can use the Do Not Disturb button to send callers to their mailbox without ringing their extension first The Voice Mail Auto Dial button allows the user to call Voice Mail Service with one touch The Voice Mailbox Transfer VMBox button allows the user to transfer callers directly to another subscriber s mailbox without ringing the extension first E 5 Case Studies The second Form C3 indicates the buttons programmed on the PARTNER 18 phones at extensions 11 12 13 14 and 15 Do Not Disturb Voice Mail Messages and Voice Mailbox Transfer as well as a Record a Call RAC button on Sally s phone and a Call Screening button on Stan s CS Form C7 MLS 12 Phone VMS Form 1 VMS Form 2 Form C7 indicates that a Voice Mailbox Transfer button is programmed on the MLS 12 phones at extensions 16 and 17 Note that unused mailboxes are crossed off The default settings for Language Mode Monolingual and System Language U S English are used B Subscriber Name In this column the names assigned to mailboxes 10 though 15 indicate that the clerk Sally Stan and the coaches have mailboxes Mailboxes 16 through 57 are marked for deletion For system security itis advisable to delete unused mailboxes D Outcalling Assigned Yes in this column indicates that Outcalling privileges are assigned to Sally and Stan E RAC Assigned The recording time in minutes
265. on Form B1 repeat Steps 4 and 5 for each one Continue with VMS Hunt Schedule below VMS Hunt Schedule PARTNER ACS Release 3 0 or later Check Form A Page 2 VMS Hunt Schedule If Day Only or Night Only is selected follow the procedure below which allows you to specify the VMS Hunt Schedule for each line Otherwise skip to the next section To change the VMS Hunt Schedule setting from Always to Day Only or Night Only as specified on Form A Page 2 1 on 4 24 Press MOOM 2 Atthe Line prompt enter the first line number 3 4 To program another line press Next item or Prev item until the appropriate Press until the appropriate value displays line number displays Press until the appropriate value displays Repeat Steps 4 and 5 as necessary Continue with Night Service later in this section Communications System Programming VMS Hunt Schedule All Other PARTNER Systems Check Form A Page 2 VMS Hunt Schedule If Day Only or Night Only is selected follow the procedure below The setting that you specify in this procedure applies to all Automated Attendants Otherwise skip to the next section Night Service To change the VMS Hunt Schedule setting from Always to Day Only or Night Only as specified on Form A Page 2 1 Press AOO 2 Press until the appropriate value displays 3 Continue with Night Service Button later in this section Night Service
266. on Programming Do Not Disturb F01 Used in conjunction with either automatic or manual extension coverage this button lets subscribers send callers immediately to their voice mailbox To program a Do Not Disturb button 1 oe ON Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program Central Tel Program Enter the number of the extension to be programmed Press a programmable button with lights Press eature Q Program another button for this extension or press Geature Q to exit programming mode Label the button at the user s extension Voice Mailbox Transfer F14 A Voice Mailbox Transfer button lets any system user transfer calls directly to another subscriber s mailbox including a Guest Mailbox without ringing the extension If for example a caller wants to talk to a subscriber who is on vacation the receptionist can transfer the call directly to the subscriber s mailbox by pressing this button and entering the subscriber s extension number or pressing an Auto Dial button The voice messaging system answers the call the caller hears the subscriber s personal greeting if recorded and the caller can then leave a message for the subscriber To program a Voice Mailbox Transfer button als Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program Central Tel Program 2 Enter the number of the extension to be programmed 3 Press a programmable button 4 Press Featur
267. ontinue with the next section Teleohone Button Programming VMS Cover Rings All Other PARTNER Systems Check Form A Page 2 to see if VMS Cover Rings 117 is different from the factory setting of 3 If it is follow the procedure below beginning with Step 1 to specify the VMS Cover Rings for the system If not skip to Step 3 of the procedure below To change the number of times calls ring before they are sent to the voice messaging system as indicated on Form A Page 2 VMS Cover Rings 1 Press MOM 2 Enter the VMS Cover Rings setting specified on Form A 3 Press Featured O to exit programming mode 4 Continue with the next section Teleohone Button Programming 4 30 VMS Cover Rings 117 is not available on all systems Check the Programming and Use guide for the communications system Communications System Programming Telephone Button Programming Before you begin locate Form C of the System Planner for the communications system Be sure you have a version of the form for each subscriber s phone Use this section to program buttons on subscribers phones including the receptionist s phone This section uses Centralized Telephone Programming When you are finished programming be sure to label all buttons on subscribers phones VMS Cover F15 This button allows the subscriber to turn voice mail coverage on and off To program a VMS Cover button as specified on Form
268. or the programming prompts Even if the System Language changes the language that you specify for the System Administration Prompt Language will remain the same To change the default System Administration Prompt Language 1 Press intercom 7 7 or the programmed Voice Mail Auto Dial button Press QOQA Enter the existing password for example 1234 and press Press f to change the System Administration Prompt Language Select the appropriate language 2a FR WD Press 4 to return to the Main Menu or hang up to quit 4 8 Voice Messaging System Programming Changing the System Language To change the System Language as specified on Form 1 Ali 10 11 If necessary access the Programming Main Menu If you are already at the Programming Main Menu skip to Step 2 a Press or the programmed Voice Mail Auto Dial button b Press QOQA c Enter the password and press d Press Press or Language Do one of the following a For Monolingual Mode default go to Step 4 a For Bilingual Mode press to select Language Mode Then press to specify Bilingual Mode Press for System Language Do one of the following a For Monolingual Mode default go to Step 6 For Primary Language press For Secondary Language press Press to modify System Language Enter the number corresponding to the System Language specified on Form 1
269. ox creating 5 46 CS deleting 4 16 5 45 _ S O dial plan for 5 42 _ o message length Outcalling permission l4 20_ ___ o o O Record a Call permission 4 20 reinitializing Mailbox Language changing mailbox message length changing 5 50 mailbox password reinitializing 5 48 __ o mailbox size changing 5 50 CC C CS S SC r ailbox Transfer _4 13 5 20 5 31 Cid ailboxes Manual VMS Cover 0 12 _ U O enu definition description overview 5 20 enu Map Lxiii enuprompt 5 20 SSS y YO IN 2 message length changing Record a Call Music On Hold 1 10 14 26 N Night Menu Prompt 4 14 5 33 description L1 6 factory set prompt 1 8 Night Service overview 9 Night Service button 4 25 O Outcalling assigning 4 19 guidelines 5 4 verfying operation 5 5 Outcalling permission changing L5 54 Outgoing call restriction 4 7 P PARTNER MAIL VS connection to PC L2 6 supported configurations 4 2 upgrading 4 2 Password for subscribers 1 13 r Personal greeting xv 1 13 o o oo S O personal operator xv Planning forms communications system 3 2 Problems sovinglet oS E Programming communications system 81 _ Programming Main Menu accessing the 3 10 i O Index R receptionist responsibilities Record a Call assigning Record a Call button Record a Call_permission changing
270. p number To program another Selector Code for Selector Code Transfer repeat to approve to record the Day Menu Prompt the Primary Language after recording to approve to record the Day Menu Prompt the Secondary Language after recording to approve to approve all changes PRESS PRESS PRESS PRESS PRESS PRESS PRESS PRESS 6 8 S F N H S AY TO CHANGE SELECTOR CODE ACTION TO MAILBOX TRANSFER BILINGUAL MODE PRESS for Day Menu PRESS 6 to modify ENTER a Selector Code 1 through 9 PRESS 9 to modify PRESS for Mailbox Transfer ENTER a mailbox number and To program another Selector Code for Mailbox Transfer repeat to approve to record the Day Menu Prompt the Primary Language after recording to approve to record the Day Menu Prompt the Secondary Language after recording to approve to approve all changes PRESS PRESS PRESS PRESS PRESS PRESS PRESS PRESS 6 E B FN H S AY A PARTNER MAIL VS System Programming Reference TO START PROGRAMMING PRESS PRESS ENTER PRESS and your Password factory setting is 1234 and 9 to access the Programming Main Menu Automated Attendant to Forms 3 3A 3B 4 4A 5 and 5A to program Automated Attendant Service Automated Attendant number TO PLAY THE MENU DEFINITION MONOLINGUAL MODE PRESS PRESS PRESS PRESS PRESS for Day Menu for playback of the y Menu definition for playbac
271. period Additionally there are no restrictions on the Outcalling numbers entered by subscribers Therefore it is strongly recommended that you limit the number of subscribers who have the Outcalling privilege And call restrictions should be used for the communications system See Ouigoing Call Restriction earlier in this chapter for details To enable the Outcalling feature for a mailbox as specified on Form 2 1 If necessary access the Programming Main Menu If you are already at the Programming Main Menu skip to Step 2 a Press or the programmed Voice Mail Auto Dial button b Press QOQA c Enter the password and press d Press The system plays the system programming options 2 Press for Mailboxes 3 Enter the number of a mailbox whose Outcalling permission is to change as indicated on Form 2 followed by 4 Press for Outcalling Administration 5 Press to turn on the Outcalling feature 6 Repeat Steps 3 through 5 for each mailbox whose Outcalling permission is to be changed 7 Press to return to the Programming Main Menu 4 19 Initial Programming 8 Continue with the appropriate mailbox administration procedures in the remainder of this section or Line Ownership later in this chapter gt NOTE Although you have assigned Outcalling for a specific mailbox the subscriber must specify at least one Outcalling number up to five telephone or pager numbers alone or
272. phone that allows a subscriber to turn voice mail coverage on and off man ually at that extension See a so Automatic VMS Cover VMS Hunt Delay A communications system feature that lets you set the Automated Attendant to handle calls using either Immediate Call Handling or Delayed Call Handling or by specifying a particular number of rings on the PARTNER ACS R3 0 or later See a a a a VMS Hunt Group Hunt Group 7 reserved by the communications system to identify extensions associated with the voice messaging system hardware See also VMS Hunt Delay and VMS Hunt Schedule Volume Control A voice messaging system feature that allows subscribers to adjust the playback volume while they are listening to messages GL 8 Index lowed Phone Number List nnouncement 4 12 5 21 5 31 _ O nnouncements l 1 6 o o ooo O uto Dial button 4 33 _ o ooo ooo O utomated Attendant deleting lines line asianmen utomated Attendant T Deiintion 4 11 5 29 utomated Attendant Service Announcements 1 6 communications system options factory set messages 1 7 Music On Hold 1 10 overview Automatic Extension Privac Automatic VMS A ET DPPP gt gt B backup card 4 41 5 78 S O buttons programming 4 31 5 68 CS C Call Answer Service communications system options factory set message overview d 11 S Call handling delayed H 9 o ooo immediate 1 9 o CallScreening 5 6 ss o o
273. plains how the planning forms for the communications system and voice messaging system were filled out You can use these case studies to determine how customer requirements were matched to PARTNER MAIL VS system features E 1 Case Studies Case Study 1 About the Customer Tennis Land is a sports center that offers tennis enthusiasts six tennis courts and a large well stocked shop for purchasing a variety of tennis paraphernalia including racquets and tennis wear In addition Tennis Land offers lessons and clinics from staff coaches When the coaches are not giving lessons or clinics hosting tournaments or traveling with the Tennis Land team in exhibition matches they help the sales people in the shop Stan Williams the owner Sally Parker the manager and the coaches all have private offices Stan purchased a PARTNER Advanced Communications System Release 3 0 and a PARTNER MAIL VS Release 5 Voice Messaging System He believes that the systems features will help his employees provide better service to customers Sally is responsible for managing the systems she established these facts a The system will have two Automated Attendants six outside lines two outside lines are assigned to Automated Attendant 1 and three outside lines are assigned to Automated Attendant 2 one personal line that is one outside line that is not assigned to an Automated Attendant and eight extensions One Automated Attendant will
274. play the Announcement corded for the Selector Code Announcement number to rerecord the Announcement after recording to move up a menu level to continue without ogramming Selector Codes to approve all changes AB amp kg ENTER PRESS PRESS PRESS PRESS eS a 6 2 6 6 S PRESS PRESS TO EXIT PROGRAMMING PRESS o Automated Attendant REFER to Forms 3 3A 4 4A 5 and 5A PRESS to program Automated Attendant Service ENTER Automated Attendant number TO MODIFY DIAL 0 TIMEOUT EXTENSION MONOLINGUAL MODE PRESS for Day Menu PRESS to modify PRESS for Dial 0 Timeout PRESS to modify ENTER extension number and PRESS to approve PRESS to record the Day Menu Prompt PRESS after recording PRESS to approve all changes WHEWS SSA TO CHANGE SELECTOR CODE ACTION TO DIRECT EXTENSION TRANSFER MONOLINGUAL MODE PRESS for Day Menu PRESS to modify ENTER a Selector Code 1 through 9 PRESS to modify PRESS for Direct Extension Transfer To program another Selector Code for rect Extension Transfer repeat to approve to record the Day Menu Prompt after recording to approve all changes OE PRESS PRESS PRESS PRESS w WHREWS3 oe TO CHANGE SELECTOR CODE ACTION TO MAILBOX TRANSFER MONOLINGUAL MODE PRESS for Day Menu PRESS 6 to modify ENTER a Selector Code 1 through 9 PRESS 9 to modify PRESS 6 for Mailbox Transfer ENTER a mailbox number To pro
275. prompt should provide instructions such as To speak to someone in sales press 6 lf callers can can choose an Announcement include that information For example For directions to our office press 4 Completing this F orm Write the message that you want callers to hear when they call during normal business hours including the instructions to the caller for selecting menu options Suggested options include m Remain on the line for assistance m Dial 0 for assistance m To hear this menu again dial 4 Recording the D ay Menu Prompt m Torecord the Day Menu Prompt dial L3 from the Programming Main Menu Automated Attendant V1 02 03 114 Form 5 Night Menu Prompt System L anguage or Primary L anguage Copy this form for each Automated Attendant Save the original blank form for future use Check a number to indicate for which Automated Attendant this form is used R equired if VMS H unt Schedule is set to N ight Only or Always Gracias por llamar a Software M xico For English press star one now Nuestro horario de oficina es de 9 00 a 14 30 horas y de 16 00 a 18 00 horas Si usted tiene tel fono de tonos y conoce el numero de la extension a la que desea llamar marquelo ahora De lo contrario espere y deje un mensaje General I nformation m The Night Menu Prompt plays to callers when the VMS Hunt If Selector Code 9 is left as the
276. q Intercom g Intercom Ext O gt IN Caller ID Call Log F 23 Calls Caller ID Inspect F 17 ID Inspect PARTNER 18D only In Hybrid mode only if pool 880 is assigned these two buttons are associated with this pool ACS R2 0 or later only Specify Automatic Line Selection Identify extensions programmed as shown 1 1 Caller ID Name Display F 16 ID Name v Do Not Disturb F 01 DND Privacy F 07 Priv v Record a Call F 24 7 RAC VMS Cover F 15 VMSCover Voice Interrupt on Busy Talk Back F 18 VIOB Account Code Entry F 12 2 ACE Background Music F 19 2 Music Call Coverage F 20 XX XX 2 4 6 Cover XX XX Call Forwarding Call Follow Me F 11 XX XX 24 CF XXXX Call Park XX 3 Park Call Pickup I 6 XX Pickup XX Conference Drop F 06 Drop Contact Closure 1 F 41 2 CC1 Contact Closure 2 F 42 2 CC2 Direct Line Pickup Active Line 68 DLPA Direct Line Pickup lIdle Line I 8 DLPI Exclusive Hold F 02 ExHold Fax Management I XX 2 FAX XX Group Calling Ring Page I 7 G or 7 G GCall g Group Hunt Ring Signal 177 G or 77 G Hunt g Group Pickup 66 G P U Grp g Intercom Autodial I XX or XX 2 Ext XX Last Number Redial F 05 LNR Loudspeaker Paging I 70 Loudspk Manual Signaling F 13 XX or F 13 XX 2 MS XX Message Light Off F 10 XX 5 Msg
277. r For example If you know the extension of the person you want to reach dial it now and leave a message Main Menu If callers can dial a single digit to transfer to an extension or group Selector Code Transfer to a mailbox Mailbox Transfer or to a Centrex number Centrex Transfer the prompt should provide instructions such as To leave a message for Pat press 6 Keep in mind that there are no group mailboxes Automated Attendant 1 42 3 4 Form 3 Menu Definition Copy this form for each Automated Attendant Save the original blank form for future use Check a number to indicate for which Automated Attendant this form is used Selector Code Action Key 1 Selector Code Transfer Announcement Direct Extension Transfer Mailbox Transfer Centrex Transfer General I nformation m Factory defaults are identified by the Y symbol m This Menu Definition applies to both the Day and Night Menu prompts m The Lines Assigned area is reserved for you to specify the lines assigned to this Automated Attendant m The Selector Code is the first digit dialed by the caller in response to menu prompts m In Direct Extension Transfer Selector Codes 1 5 and 7 represent the first digit for a range of extensions see table These Selector Codes let callers dial extension numbers directly m In Selector Code Transfer Selector Codes 1 9 represent a specif
278. r Service feature during non peak calling hours you can reduce the number of options in the Automated Attendant Service menu or you can reduce the length of the Automated Attendant Service menu prompt You can also limit the use if any of the Record a Call feature to reduce the amount of time a PARTNER MAIL VS extension is busy If you have a 2 port PARTNER MAIL VS configuration you may consider upgrading to the 4 port configuration to correct this problem Possible Cause 2 The PARTNER MAIL VS module may not be installed correctly What to do Check the PARTNER MAIL VS module to make sure it is securely mounted in the control unit Also check the module s LEDs the Power LED should be steady green and the Status LED should not be lit If the Power LED is lit perform the System Save Reset All procedure by entering 989 RESET 989 73738 after you log in as the System Manager If the Power LED is not lit power down the control unit reseat the PARTNER MAIL VS module and power up the control unit m If the module is working properly after one minute the problem is solved a If the module still does not work properly it is damaged Automated Attendant Service Possible Cause 3 The PARTNER MAIL VS may not be programmed correctly What to do Verify that lines are correctly assigned to each Automated Attendant and that lines and extensions are correctly assigned to Hunt Group 7 Refer to VMS Planning Form 3 Menu Def
279. ral mailbox for the Pro Shop on Automated Attendant 2 E 8 Lucent Technologies Bell Labs Innovations 1 Customer Billing Name Tennis Cand Form A System Configuration PAGE 1of3 Required for PARTNER Advanced Communications System For additional instructions see pages 2 and 3 6 Administer system for Hybrid Mode PARTNER ACS Release 2 0 or later only 2 Installation Address 4 Clay Court Anytown NJ NoM Yes 0 If yes call local telephone company MF Mode and FCC AS5 USA 21312 MF E 3 Contact Name Sally Parker 4 Person to be Trained Phone Alternate Trainee s Name aly Parker 708 555 4567 Lucent Technologies Sales Force 8 System Lines 5 Sold by Salesperson s Name Marisol Colon Dealer Only DXD 2 VMS AA 607 205 206 Only one of these types per system Write the Telephone AA Numbers in order customer desires list personal and dedicated lines last 5533 4567 Write auxiliary pool 881 882 883 or No Pool 207 Hybrid Mode Line Coverage Y ou can select one per line 4 Phone 7 Features customer is most interested in most important first Phone ee PARTNER MAIL VS 708 555 1718 Write Ext No for Call Cover 208 Write User s Name for Check Personal or Owned Line if or Identify Equipment for Caller Dedicated Line ID Service Identify other L
280. re upgrading from two to four ports and you had already assig extensions 20 and 21 to the VMS Hunt Group you would now add ext and 19 to the VMS Hunt Group You must perform this task to ensure ned ensions 18 hat the system functions properly See Initial System Setup earlier in this chapter for specific instructions on how to assign the additional VMS Hunt Group Extensions Initial Programming Checklist Initial Programming Checklist Communications System Programming Checklist You must perform the following for every installation a VMS Hunt Group Extensions 505 You must program this feature first before programming any other feature Assign the PARTNER MAIL VS system s extensions to the PARTNER communications system Hunt Group 7 505 Refer to Figure 2 1 and to the figures in Appendix D to determine which voice messaging system extensions should be assigned to Hunt Group 7 m Transfer Return Extension 306 For each of the voice messaging system extensions assign an extension as the destination for Transfer Return calls If the voice messaging system transfers a call to an extension that has no voice mail coverage and the call is not answered the communications system transfers the call to the Transfer Return Extension If you want calls returned to the receptionist s extension for example assign that extension as the Transfer Return Extension The call will ring at this extension until it i
281. ress 6 To administer Record a Call press 7 To delete the mailbox press 3 If finished with this mailbox press or for the next mailbox press Press The system plays To play Mailbox Language press 2 To modify Mailbox Language press 6 If finished press Press The system plays the current Mailbox Language then prompts you to enter the number corresponding to the desired language 5 53 System Management 6 Enter the number corresponding to the language you want to use for this mailbox The system plays For LANGUAGE where LANGUAGE is the current language press 9 to confirm or 6 to cancel 7 Either Press 9 to confirm The system plays Mailbox Language has been changed Press 6 to cancel The system plays Mailbox Language has not been changed 8 Press to return to the Programming Main Menu or hang up to quit Administering Outcalling for a Mailbox 5 54 The Outcalling feature dials a telephone or pager number or a series of up to five numbers to notify a subscriber that a new message has arrived in the subscriber s voice mailbox With this feature subscribers can be alerted to the arrival of new messages whether they re at their desks on the road or at an alternate work location Subscribers have the option to determine the schedule for when Outcalling begins and ends how many Outcalling attempts are made per cycle and how much time will
282. ress 9 to confirm or 6 to cancel If the line is not already assigned to another Automated Attendant the system plays the line number and its assignment to this Automated Attendant Press to confirm that you want to modify the line assignment The system plays the line number and its reassignment to the Automated Attendant you specified in Step 3 Press to return to the Programming Main Menu Repeat Steps 2 through 8 for each additional Automated Attendant or hang up to quit Automated Attendant Service Deleting Assigned Lines You can delete a line from a specific Automated Attendant using this procedure If you do not want a line to receive any Automated Attendant service you must reprogram the communications system using the Group Call Distribution feature 206 Option 1 to delete the line from the VMS Hunt Group To delete lines assigned to an Automated Attendant ali If necessary access the Programming Main Menu If you are already at the Programming Main Menu skip to Step 2 a Press or the programmed Voice Mail Auto Dial button b Press QOQA c Enter the password and press d Press The system plays the system programming options Press for Automated Attendant The system prompts you to specify the Automated Attendant Enter the Automated Attendant number from 1 to 4 Press for line assignment The system plays To review line assignments press 1 To adda lin
283. ress 9 to transfer to Sally s mailbox mailbox 11 a Dial 0 Timeout Extension This is the extension to which calls are transferred if callers press O or do not choose a menu option VMS Form 3 for Automated Attendant 2 Lines assigned The lines assigned to Automated Attendant 2 are indicated in this area Description In this column Direct Extension Transfer for Selector Code 1 and 5 in the Selector Code Action column indicate that when callers get the Automated Attendant Service they can transfer to any extension 10 to 19 by entering the extension number a Announcement in the Description column and the numbers 1 and 2 in the Number Range of Numbers column indicate that when callers get the Automated Attendant Service they can choose to hear one of two Announcements a Transfer to clerk s mailbox in the Description column for Selector Code 9 indicates when callers get the Automated Attendant Service they can press 9 to transfer to the clerk s mailbox mailbox 10 Dial 0 Timeout Extension This is the extension to which calls are transferred if the caller presses 0 or does not choose a menu option VMS Form 3A for Automated Attendant 1 a When an unanswered call goes to the Automated Attendant Service and the caller chooses to hear an Announcement the caller hears one of the Announcements on Form 3A VMS Form 3A for Automated Attendant 2 a When an unanswered call goes
284. riber that the new message has arrived Subscribers can treat a saved conversation as they would any other message in the mailbox gt NOTE If the system detects 15 seconds of silence after recording has begun the system automatically turns off the Record a Call feature and the subscriber must press the programmed feature button to resume recording the conversation The resumed conversation is saved as another message Before subscribers can use the feature you must assign Record a Call privileges for their mailboxes by specifying a value of 1 to 60 minutes as the maximum Record a Call message length You must also program a telephone button to activate this feature according to the instructions in the Programming and Use guide for the communications system You may also remove these privileges by following the instructions below Be sure to update Form 2 to indicate the current status of Record a Call privileges for each mailbox A CAUTION Keep in mind that Record a Call messages count toward the maximum capacity size of a mailbox When the system storage limit is reached even if storage space is still available in an individual mailbox the system will not accept any new voice mail messages or recorded conversations Therefore it is strongly recommended that you limit the number of subscribers who have this privilege and that you remind them to delete unnecessary messages from their mailboxes on a regular basis To assig
285. ring before they are sent to the line owner s mailbox VMS Line Cover As an alternative to Line Coverage Extension you can program VMS Line Cover 206 Option 3 Calls are routed directly to the voice mailbox of a specific user after four rings when you program VMS Line Cover for the lines assigned to Hunt Group 7 and assign a line owner in the voice messaging system VMS Cover Rings 117 is not available on all systems Check the Programming and Use guide for the communications system 1 12 Voice Messaging Services Voice Mailbox Transfer A Voice Mailbox Transfer F14 button can be programmed on a user s phone to transfer callers directly to a subscriber s mailbox without ringing the extension first This feature is useful when a user is handling calls for a subscriber who is not at his or her desk or when transferring calls to a guest mailbox Voice Mail Service This service allows subscribers to manage their own mailboxes With it a subscriber can Create and send messages to other system mailboxes m Listen to messages then save or delete them Forward messages with comment to another subscriber s mailbox a Record a personal greeting in Bilingual Mode the user may record his or her personal greeting in both the Primary and Secondary Languages Create and maintain Personal Group Lists a Change the default password for his or her mailbox to ensure that messages are kept confidential a List
286. rn to Step 17 to be prompted for re recording 20 Press to approve this Day Menu Prompt 21 If you want to record the Day Menu Prompt or Announcement in the Secondary Language continue with Step 22 otherwise skip to Step 24 22 Press and record the Menu Prompt from Form 4A or Announcement from Form 3B 23 Press C after recording 24 Choose an option or skip this step Press to immediately re record this Menu Prompt or Announcement Begin recording immediately after the beep press after recording Repeat if desired Press to play back this Menu Prompt or Announcement Press to delete this Menu Prompt or Announcement and return to Step 22 to be prompted for re recording 25 Press to approve this Day Menu Prompt or Announcement 26 Press to approve and save all entries The Menu Definition Day Menu Prompts and Announcements if any now take effect 27 Press to return to the Programming Main Menu 28 Continue with Night Menu Prompt or go to the section Night Menu Prompt To record the Night Menu Prompt specified on Form 5 for systems operating in Monolingual Mode or in the Primary and Secondary Language specified on Forms 5 and 5A for systems operating in Bilingual Mode a 4 14 If necessary access the Programming Main Menu If you are already at the Programming Main Menu skip to Step 2 a Press or the programmed Voice Mail Auto Dial button b Press OQA c Enter the password and pre
287. rogramming Overview This chapter identifies the 2 and 4 port voice messaging system configurations It tells you how to perform initial programming of the voice messaging and communications systems The first two procedures allow you to access and program the voice messaging system you must perform these procedures first for every installation The next set of procedures covers voice messaging system programming The last section covers how to program the communications system The order of the procedures in this chapter enables you to assign lines to multiple Automated Attendants to program the Menu Definition and to record the Day and or Night Prompts and Automated Attendant Announcements for each Automated Attendant before the voice messaging system begins to handle calls this order is recommended for voice messaging systems that are being added to existing communications systems If this is a new installation however you can program the communications system first then the voice messaging system if you prefer When you have completed programming the voice messaging system it is recommended that you generate a Configuration Report according to the instructions provided in this chapter to keep a record of all current voice messaging system settings gt NOTE When you have completed programming the voice messaging system for the first time it is recommended that you perform a system backup see Performing a System
288. rwise skip to Allowed Phone Numbers To create a list of Disallowed Phone Numbers 1 Press AOA At the List Number prompt enter the list number 1 4 At the Entry prompt select a list entry 01 10 At the Data prompt enter the first number To save the number in memory you must press Enter oa fF wh At this point To change the number you just entered press and repeat Steps 4 and 5 To delete the number you just entered press Remove To enter other numbers in this list press and repeat Steps 4 and 5 Assigning the Disallowed Phone Number List The Disallowed Phone Number List that was created for Outcalling should be assigned to all voice messaging system extensions To assign a Disallowed Phone Number List to the extensions 1 Press AAG Enter the number of the extension to be programmed Enter the list number 1 4 2 3 4 To assign the list press until the display reads 1 Assigned 5 To program another extension press Next Procedure Prev Procedure and repeat from Step 2 Communications System Programming Allowed Phone Numbers If Outcalling is permitted an Allowed Phone Number List 407 can be created to identify numbers to which Outcalling is allowed Creating an Allowed Phone Number List Check communications system Planning Form D to see if an Allowed Phone Number List is needed for Outcalling If so continue with the procedures in this section
289. s to cancel your selection Go to Step 10 The system plays System Language has not been changed Press 9 to confirm your selection Go to Step 10 The system plays System Language has been changed If the system is operating in Bilingual Mode either Press to modify the Primary Language The system plays the current Primary Language then prompts you to enter the number corresponding to the desired language Go to Step 8 Press to modify the Secondary Language The system plays the current Secondary Language then prompts you to enter the number corresponding to the desired language Go to Step 8 5 15 System Management 8 If the system is operating in Bilingual Mode press the number for the language you want to use Go to Step 9 The system plays For LANGUAGE where LANGUAGE is the current language press 9 to confirm or 6 to cancel 9 If the system is operating in Bilingual Mode either Press to cancel your selection Go to Step 10 The system plays Primary Secondary Language has not been changed Press 9 to confirm your selection Go to Step 10 The system plays Primary Secondary Language has been changed 10 Press to return to the Programming Main Menu or hang up to quit 5 16 Automated Attendant Service Automated Attendant Service PARTNER MAIL VS Release 5 0 provides up to four Automated Attendants each of which answers dif
290. s DOMOS no lt PRESS PRESS PRESS To progra ESS os PRESS PRESS PRESS PRESS WRHRBwWS TO REPLAY A MENU PRESS TO RETURN TO A PREVIOUS MENU PRESS Automated Attendant to Forms 3 3A 3B 4 4A 5 and 5A to program Automated Attendant Service Automated Attendant number TO CHANGE SELECTOR CODE ACTION TO SELECTOR CODE TRANSFER MONOLINGUAL MODE PRESS for Day Menu PRESS 6 to modify ENTER a Selector Code through 9 PRESS 9 to modify PRESS for Selector Code Transfer ENTER the extension or group number To program another Selector Code for Selector Code Transfer repeat PRESS to approve PRESS to record the Day Menu Prompt PRESS after recording PRESS to approve all changes TO MODIFY THE MENU DEFINITION AND DAY MENU PROMPT BILINGUAL MODE PRESS for Day Menu PRESS 6 to modify ENTER a Selector Code through 9 PRESS 9 to modify PRESS for Selector Code Transfer ENTER an extension Hunt Group Calling Group mailbox or Centrex number and To program another Selector Code for Selector Code Transfer repeat to approve to record the Day Menu Prompt the Primary Language after recording to approve to record the Day Menu Prompt the Secondary Language after recording to approve to approve all changes PRESS PRESS PRESS PRESS PRESS PRESS PRESS PRESS 1 E O FN AS FTAA TO RETURN TO THE PROGRAMMING MAIN MENU PRESS TO EXIT PROGRAMMI
291. s the Menu Definition may be programmed incorrectly What to do Follow the steps for Verifying System Operation in Chapter 4 to test Automated Attendant Service a f outside calls are not transferred to the correct extension or group follow the instructions for Menu Definition and Day Menu Prompt Jas appropriate for Monolingual or Bilingual Mode in Chapter 4 to reprogram the Menu Definition a f outside calls are transferred to the correct extension or group go to Possible Cause 2 Possible Cause 2 A valid destination was not entered by the caller What to do Make sure a valid destination was entered Check the Programming and Use guide for your communications system to determine valid extension and group numbers 6 5 Troubleshooting System Does Not Respond to Entered Digits Possible Cause 1 System is not receiving touchtones What to do The voice messaging system may not be able to interpret touchtones while a greeting plays Wait until the greeting finishes before entering the touchtones If you are using a speakerphone turn off the microphone Possible Cause 2 If this occurs when the Automated Attendant Service answers calls the Menu Definition may be programmed incorrectly What to do Follow the steps for Verifying System Operation in Chapter 4 to test Automated Attendant Service a f outside calls are not transferred to the correct extension or group follow the instructions for
292. s answered a Outgoing Call Restriction 401 This feature which is strongly recommended when Outcalling privileges are assigned to subscribers restricts all extensions associated with the mail system unit from making outside calls In addition be sure to create and assign Allowed and Disallowed Phone Lists as needed for Outcalling numbers You may also need to program the following a Automated Attendant Service Group Call Distribution 206 Option 1 VMS Hunt Delay 506 Automatic Extension Privacy 304 VMS Hunt Schedule 507 Night Service 503 Music On Hold 602 D isallowed Phone Numbers 404 405 if Outcalling is permitted Allowed Phone Numbers 407 408 if Outcalling is permitted m Call Answer Service Line Coverage Extension 208 Automatic VMS Cover 310 4 3 Initial Programming VMS Cover Rings 117 321 on PARTNER ACS Release 3 0 or later Telephone Button Programming Manual VMS Cover F15 Do Not Disturb F01 Voice Mailbox Transfer F14 Voice Mail Auto Dial Station Lock F21 Record A Call F24 Call Screening F25 Voice Messaging System Programming Checklist 4 4 Perform the following procedures before you begin programming the voice messaging system At the System Manager s login 99 Change the System Manager s factory set password Option 5 Before you begin programming the voice messaging system
293. s assistance program representative Other Options 5 22 Automated Attendant Service provides the following built in options no programming required for use in your menu prompt a Another type of transfer option which is always available to outside and inside callers may be useful in certain situations With this type of transfer when callers press amp the system prompts them to enter an extension number Using the example above if you assigned Selector Code Transfer to Selector Codes 1 and 2 rather than starting the assignment from 3 you could request callers to press amp 8 to allow them to transfer to extensions 10 to 29 m As shown in the sample Day Menu Prompt you can also instruct a caller to stay on the line for assistance If so the voice messaging system automatically transfers the call to the receptionist s extension or to the specified Dial 0 Timeout extension This option is especially important for callers who have rotary phones As shown in the sample Day Menu Prompt callers can press at any time to transfer automatically to the receptionist s extension or to the specified Dial 0 Timeout extension for assistance a f the system is set for Bilingual Mode callers can press to switch between the Primary and Secondary Languages In this case you must record two messages for the Day and Night Menu Prompts and Automated Attendant Announcements one each in the Primary and Secondary Langu
294. s for the extensions used by the PARTNER MAIL VS module indicate that Automatic Extension Privacy is assigned to these extensions This feature prevents subscribers from accidentally picking up calls that are being answered by the voice mail system VMS Only In this column on Page 1 the check mark indicates that extension 30 is reserved for the voice messaging system On Page 2 the check mark in this column indicates that extension 31 is reserved for the voice messaging system CS Form C1 PARTNER 34D Phone The first Form C1 identifies the buttons programmed on the PARTNER 34D phone at extension 10 Night Service Do Not Disturb Voice Mail Messages and Voice Mailbox Transfer The Night Service button allows Vera to turn Night Service on and off When Night Service is off the Day Menu Prompt plays When Night Service is on the Night Menu Prompt plays Vera can use the Do Not Disturb button to send callers to the general mailbox without ringing the extension first E 31 Case Studies The Voice Mail Auto Dial button allows Vera to call Voice Mail Service with one touch The Voice Mailbox Transfer VMBox button allows Vera to transfer callers directly to another subscriber s mailbox without ringing the extension first The second Form C1 indicates the buttons programmed on the phones at extensions 11 and 12 Do Not Disturb Voice Mail Messages and Voice Mailbox Transfer In addition both forms indicate that Vera
295. s with all Announcements recorded at up to four minutes the system restore can take approximately 20 minutes to complete To restore the system 1 Be sure the PC Card is installed see the area labeled Slot for PC Card in 2 If necessary access the Programming Main Menu If you are already at the Programming Main Menu skip to Step 3 a Press or the programmed Voice Mail Auto Dial button b Press QOQA c Enter the password and press d Press The system plays the system programming options 3 Press 8 for Reports and Backup Restore 4 Press to restore the system The system plays the backup date saved in the PC Card and prompts Warning This may erase current settings Do you want to continue Press 9 to confirm or 6 to cancel 5 Press to confirm that you want to restore the system Do not hang up until you hear the restore confirmation prompt When the system is restored the system prompts Restore Successful The system restarts automatically and the new configuration takes effect gt NOTE If the system prompts that the restore has failed call the Technical Service Center at 1 800 628 2888 or call your Lucent Technologies Representative or local Authorized Dealer and report the error code that accompanied the failure prompt 4 43 System Management This chapter provides the programming procedures you can use to make changes to the voice messaging system to reflect chan
296. should review the messages each morning and distribute them to the appropriate people Group Calling Tips It is important to note that voice mail coverage is not provided for group calls If your system is set up for group transfer be sure that the receptionist is aware of the following items If the Automated Attendant Service transfers a call to a Hunt Group or Calling Group and all members in the group are busy members are either on the phone or have Do Not Disturb on the call is transferred to the receptionist s extension When callers transfer to a busy group they hear Music On Hold tones ringing or silence depending on how the communications system is set up until the receptionist answers If the Automated Attendant Service transfers a call to a Calling Group and the call is not answered the call is transferred to the receptionist s extension after the programmed number of transfer return rings The call will not be sent to the voice mailbox If the Automated Attendant Service transfers a call to a Hunt Group that has only one available member and that member does not answer the call the call is transferred to the receptionist s extension after the programmed number of transfer return rings The call will not be sent to the voice mailbox il Calling Groups are not available on all systems Check the Programming and Use guide for the communications system System Management Language You can choose the Languag
297. sign the PARTNER MAIL VS extensions specified on Form B1 to Hunt Group 7 1 At extension 101 press Feature 0 System Program System Program 2 Enter the System Password if required 3 Press HOG 4 At the Group prompt press C 5 Atthe Extension prompt enter the first PARTNER MAIL VS extension number specified on Form B1 D Press Next Data until the display reads 1 Assigned 7 Press Next item or Prev item until the next PARTNER MAIL VS extension number specified on Form B1 displays 8 Press Next Data until the display reads 1 Assigned 9 If additional PARTNER MAIL VS extensions are shown on Form B1 repeat Steps 7 and 8 for each one 10 Continue with Transfer Return Extensions on the next page 1 Some systems also allow programming from extension 11 Check the Programming and Use guide for the communications system 4 6 Initial Communications System Setup Transfer Return Extensions For extensions associated with the voice mail system unit use the following procedure If the voice mail system transfers a call to an extension that does not answer the communications system transfers the call to the designated Transfer Return Extension The call rings at this extension until it is answered To assign extension 10 as the transfer return extension for the PARTNER MAIL VS extensions specified on Form B1 1 Press AOO 2 Atthe Extension pro
298. sing the PARTNER MAIL VS Voice Messaging System In addition you should provide users with the following information a A subscriber can only record a conversation while active on a call at an internal telephone and only when you have assigned the subscriber permission to use this feature m Ifthe system detects 15 seconds of silence after recording has begun the system automatically turns off the Record a Call feature and the subscriber must press the programmed feature button to resume recording the conversation The resumed recording is saved as another message a After acall has been recorded it is saved in the subscriber s mailbox This recorded conversation can be forwarded to another subscriber a Subscribers should delete saved conversations on a regular basis to avoid depleting mailbox and system storage space Call Screening PARTNER ACS Release 3 0 or later This feature allows subscribers to listen while a caller is leaving a message in their mailbox Let subscribers know when you have programmed a button on their telephone allowing them to use this feature Instructions for using this feature are included in Using the PARTNER MAIL VS Voice Messaging System Using the Tutor Feature 5 6 Tutor is an on line help feature that allows all system users not just voice messaging system subscribers to easily access and listen to information on commonly used communications system features You should let syst
299. sociated with this pool ACS R2 0 or later only Specify Automatic Line Selection Identify extensions programmed as shown 13 14 15 Caller ID Name Display F 16 ID Name Do Not Disturb F 01 DND Privacy F 07 Priv Record a Call F 24 7 RAC VMS Cover F 15 VMSCover Voice Interrupt on Busy Talk Back F 18 VIOB Account Code Entry F 12 2 ACE Background Music F 19 2 Music Call Coverage F 20 XX XX 2 4 6 Cover XX XX Call Forwarding Call Follow Me F 11 XX XX 24 CF XXXX Call Park XX 3 Park Call Pickup I 6 XX Pickup XX Conference Drop F 06 Drop Contact Closure 1 F 41 2 CC1 Contact Closure 2 F 42 2 CC2 Direct Line Pickup Active Line 68 DLPA Direct Line Pickup lIdle Line I 8 DLPI Exclusive Hold F 02 ExHold Fax Management I XX 2 FAX XX Group Calling Ring Page I 7 G or 7 G GCall g Group Hunt Ring Signal 177 G or 77 G Hunt g Group Pickup 66 G P U Grp g Intercom Autodial I XX or XX 2 Ext XX Last Number Redial F 05 LNR Loudspeaker Paging I 70 Loudspk Manual Signaling F 13 XX or F 13 XX 2 MS XX Message Light Off F 10 XX 5 MsgOff XX Message Light On F 09 XX 5 MsgOn XX Recall F 03 Recall Save Number Redial F 04 SNR Simultaneous Paging I 70 SPage Station Lock F 21 2 Lock Touch Tone Enable F 08 TT EN Voice Mail
300. ss d Press The system plays the system programming options Voice Messaging System Programming O a A Q 15 16 Press for Automated Attendant The system prompts you to specify the Automated Attendant Enter the Automated Attendant number from 1 to 4 Press for Night Menu Press to modify the Night Menu Prompt At this point do one of the following f your system is operating in Monolingual Mode continue with Step 7 If you want to record the Night Menu Prompt in the Primary Language continue with Step 7 To record the Night Menu Prompt in the Secondary Language skip to Step 12 Lift the handset press G and record the Menu Prompt from Form 5 Press after recording Choose an option or skip this step Press to immediately re record this Menu Prompt Begin recording immediately after the beep press after recording Repeat if desired Press to play back this Menu Prompt Press to delete this Menu Prompt and return to Step 7 to be prompted for re recording Press to approve this Night Menu Prompt If you want to record the Night Menu Prompt in the Secondary Language continue with Step 12 otherwise skip to Step 15 Press and record the Menu Prompt from Form 5A Press C after recording Choose an option or skip this step Press to immediately re record this Menu Prompt Begin recording immediately after the
301. ss Feature Q Q to exit programming mode OT ses G9 AID 6 Label the button at the user s extension Call Screening PARTNER ACS Release 3 0 or later F25 The Call Screening feature is available only on the PARTNER Advanced Communications System Release 3 0 or later and a system telephone This feature allows a subscriber to listen to a caller leaving a message in the subscriber s mailbox The subscriber can turn this feature on or off by pressing the call screening button The button programmed for this purpose must have lights For information about this feature and how it interacts with other communications system features see PARTNER Advanced Communications System Programming and Use To program a Call Screening button 1 Press Feature 0 System Program System Program Central Tel Program 2 Enter the number of the extension to be programmed 3 Press a programmable button with lights 4 Press eature 2 6 5 71 System Management 5 Program another button for this extension or press Feature O to exit programming mode 6 Label the button at the user s extension 5 72 Generating a Configuration Report Generating a Configuration Report When you have verified the system s operation you can generate a Configuration Report as a convenient reference This report can be directed to a PC running a terminal emulation program see Chapter 2 for instructions on how
302. ss ntercom 7 7 Z or the programmed Voice Mail Auto Dial button b Press QOQA c Enter the password and press d Press The system plays the system programming options Press to program mailboxes The system tells you how many mailboxes currently exist and how many are allowed then Pleas nter the mailbox number followed by or press for the next mailbox Enter the number of the mailbox that you want to check followed by or simply press The system responds as follows If you entered a mailbox number followed by the system tells you if the mailbox exists lf you entered the system tells you the number of the first existing mailbox Press repeatedly to hear the next existing mailbox number Press to return to the Programming Main Menu or hang up to quit Modifying Mailboxes Deleting a Mailbox Update Form 2 for the voice messaging system to show mailboxes to be deleted then use the updated form while performing the following procedure Review the following notes before you delete a mailbox The receptionist s mailbox at extension 10 cannot be deleted Any messages in the mailbox are lost when a mailbox is deleted The message light is turned off The personal greeting is lost If you delete a mailbox from an extension that has VMS Cover assigned unassign Automatic VMS Cover or remove the VMS Cover button This action prevents unanswered intercom and transferre
303. ssword Press Press Press ODOO he number corresponding to the desired language 9 If the system prompts you that an operation such as system backup or system restore has failed this prompt will include an error code Be sure to record the error code When you call 1 800 628 2888 for help or contact your Lucent Technologies Representative or Authorized Dealer report the error code 6 15 Specifications Capacities Mailboxes Default Mailbox Capacity Ext 10 60 minutes 120 messages subscriber 20 minutes 120 messages NMailbox Size Range 5 to 180 minutes Default Message Length 4 minutes Message Length Range 2 to 60 minutes Personal Greeting Length 1 second to 4 minutes Record A Call Default Setting 0 minutes Off Record A Call Range 1 minute to 60 minutes Messages can be forwarded a maximum of 13 times Automated Attendant Default All lines assigned to Automated Attendant 1 Default Setting for Selector Codes 1 to 8 Direct Extension Transfer Default Setting for Selector Code 9 Mailbox Transfer to receptionist s Ext 10 Receptionist s Extension Dial 0 Extension 10 Dial 0 Timeout Action day and night Transfer to receptionist Menu Levels 1 Menu Options 9 allowed 5 recommended Specifications System Capacities With 2 Port PC Card 2 voice channels ports 48 mailboxes 100 hours of vo
304. suppliers shall not be liable for any incidental special reliance consequential or indirect loss or damage incurred in connection with the equipment As used in this paragraph consequential damages include but are not limited to the following lost profits lost revenues and losses arising out of unauthorized use or charges for such use of common carrier telecommunications services or facilities accessed through or connected to the equipment For personal injury caused by Lucent Technologies negligence Lucent Technologies liability shall be limited to proven damages to person No action or proceeding against Lucent Technologies or its affiliates or suppliers may be commenced more than twelve 12 months after the cause of action accrues THIS PARAGRAPH SHALL SURVIVE FAILURE OF AN EXCLUSIVE REMEDY Dial Plans This appendix contains a series of figures that illustrate the most common dialing plans when PARTNER MAIL VS 2 port or 4 port module is installed with a PARTNER Advanced Communications System PARTNER Endeavor PARTNER II or PARTNER Plus system These figures also indicate which PARTNER MAIL VS extensions should be assigned to Hunt Group 7 of the communications system In addition eaae n Chapter 2 for an illustration of the dial plan for a PARTNER ACS with three 308 modules and a voice messaging system module Note that the communications system recognizes the voice messaging system module as a 6 extensio
305. swers calls at night 1 Use Group Call Distribution 206 Setting 1 to identify the lines to be answered by Automated Attendant Service 2 Set VMS Hunt Schedule 507 to Night Only 3 Set VMS Hunt Delay 506 to Immediate Music On Hold 1 10 If you use Automated Attendant Service you also may want to use the communications system s Music On Hold feature When Music On Hold is Active and an audio source is connected to the system callers waiting to be transferred hear music or recorded material If Music On Hold is Not Active callers hear tones ringing or silence depending on how the communications system is set up while they are being transferred For more information see Music On Hold and Ring on Transfer in the Programming and Use guide for the communications system Voice Messaging Services Call Answer Service This service offers callers the following options when they reach an extension that is unable to answer their call If the system is in Bilingual Mode press while listening to the personal greeting to switch between the Primary and Secondary Languages Leave a detailed confidential message in the called party s mailbox Press to transfer to the receptionist s extension for assistance or to the extension or Guest Mailbox administered as the Personal Operator Press to transfer to another system extension Callers can press or before during or after leaving a message gt NOTE
306. tative indicates that they have Outcalling privileges so that they can be notified of new voice mail while they are away from their offices Case Study 2 VMS Form 3 VMS Form 4 VMS Form 4A VMS Form 5 VMS Form 5A Description In this column Direct Extension Transfer for Selector Code 1 and 2 indicates that when callers get the Automated Attendant Service they can transfer to any extension 10 to 29 by entering the extension number Customer Service in the Description column and 18 in the Number Range of Numbers column for Selector Code 4 indicate that when callers get the Automated Attendant Service they can press 4 to transfer to extension 18 the Customer Service representative The 1 in the Selector Code Action column indicates that this action is a Selector Code Transfer Customer Service in the Description column and 19 in the Number Range of Numbers column for Selector Code 5 indicate that when callers get the Automated Attendant Service they can press 5 to transfer to extension 19 the Bookkeeper The 1 in the Selector Code Action column indicates that this action is a Selector Code Transfer Transfer to Vera s mailbox in the Description column for Selector Code 9 indicates when callers get the Automated Attendant Service they can press 9 to transfer to Vera s mailbox mailbox 10 When Night Service is off and a call goes to the Automated Attendant Servic
307. te RAM 1MB FLASH ROM Voice Encoding Method Regular Pulse Excitation Long Term Prediciton RPE LTP Linear Predictive Coder Digital Signal Processor DSP 16 bit 1 Call connect time is an average for all calls to the PARTNER MAIL VS system including Tutor Automated Attendant Service Call Answer Service and Voice Mail Service This information assumes a 2 probability of system blockage Environmental Requirements Control Unit Mount on a wall at least 2 feet 0 6 meters from the floor wall mounting required Locate within 5 feet 1 5 meters of the network interface jacks and a properly grounded electrical outlet not controlled by a switch using supplied 7 foot 2 1 meter cords Operating temperature 32 to 104 F 0 to 40 C not in direct sunlight Humidity 15 90 noncondensing For proper ventilation and easy replacement of modules provide the following minimum clearance around the control unit 5 Slot carrier 1 foot 0 3 meter clearance at the top and sides and 2 feet 0 6 meter at the front and bottom 2 Slot carrier or Standalone ACS processor module 1 foot 0 3 meter clearance at the front top and right side and 2 feet 0 6 meter at the bottom and left side Locate in an area free of excess moisture corrosive gases dust and chemicals Electrical Requirements Control Unit U S and Canada 90 130 VAC 50 60 Hz 3 prong outlet separate ground separately fused at 15 Amps
308. tem language selection of 12 or 24 hour format In the example above the subscriber would enter the start time of 7 30 p m as 1930 and 8 00 a m as 0800 If a message arrives at a subscriber s mailbox after the specified Outcalling time interval Outcalling notification for that message is not initiated at the next Outcalling time interval Subscribers can specify the number of Outcalling cycles that is the number of times the system attempts to outcall when a message is received By default the system attempts to outcall three times within a specified time interval The subscriber may choose a value from one through nine to specify the number of outcall attempts per cycle General Information m Subscribers can specify the minimum time interval between Outcalling attempts By default the system attempts to outcall within a minimum time interval of 15 minutes between attempts However during heavy message traffic periods the time interval may be longer Subscribers may specify an interval from five to 99 minutes a For apager beeper number Subscribers can program a callback number as part of the Outcalling number Subscribers are advised to enter several pauses where each pause is represented by a after the Outcalling number before entering their PIN and or callback number to allow the paging system sufficient time to answer Subscribers should experiment to determine the correct number of pauses needed a
309. tendant Service pick up unanswered calls during business hours and after hours VMS Hunt Delay 506 The company will accept the default setting that has the Automated Attendant Service answers outside calls immediately that is after two rings Case Study 2 CS Form B1 Page 1 of 4 Write Name Description In this column the names listed for extensions 10 through 19 and 22 and 23 identify the extension assignments Identify Telephone Attached to this Extension Checks in these columns specify the type of telephone each person or location has CS Form B1 Page 2 of 4 VMS in the Write Name Description column and checks in the PARTNER MAIL VS column indicate that the PARTNER MAIL VS module is installed in Slot 4 of the Control Unit The module uses extensions 30 and 31 the last two extensions for that slot 10 in the Write Transfer Return Ext No column indicates that when a call transferred by the PARTNER MAIL VS system is unanswered it goes to extension 10 where Vera can answer it CS Form B2 Page 1 of 2 Automatic VMS Cover Checks in this column indicate that unanswered calls to extensions 10 through 19 automatically are covered by the Call Answer Service Hunt Group Extensions VMS Only In this column check marks for extensions 30 and 31 satisfy the requirement that the extensions used by the PARTNER MAIL VS module be assigned to Hunt Group 7 Automatic Extension Privacy In this column check mark
310. tension Form 1 L anguage Q L anguage M ode 1M onolingual Bilingual OU S English V O Latin American Spanish O C anadian French Monolingual M ode System L anguage OU S English V Latin A merican Spanish O C anadian French U S English O Latin American Spanish O C anadian French Bilingual M ode Primary L anguage ge M ode Secondary L anguage General I nformation m Factory defaults are identified by the Y symbol m Ifthe system is set for Bilingual Mode make sure you record the Automated Attendant Day Menu Prompts and Night Menu Prompts and Announcements if any in both the Primary and Secondary Languages Also subscribers can record two personal greetings one in the Primary Language and another in the Secondary Language m Subscribers can have a Mailbox Language different from the languages selected here Mailbox Language is specified on Form 2 m You can specify a language for programming prompts that is different from the system language specified in or above If you change the System Administration Language that is the language in which ee prompts are played specify the language here Eng IS s C ompleting this F orm Language Mode Check Bilingual if the Language Mode should be set to Bilingual If you check Bilingual also see below if not see Monolingual Mode System Language Check the Primary language
311. tension This arrangement allows callers to leave personal messages when the employee is unable to answer a Call E 29 Case Studies Filling Out the Planning Forms This section explains how the System Planner for the PARTNER ACS Release 3 0 and the forms for the PARTNER MAIL VS Release 5 Voice Messaging System are filled out based on the facts in the Software Mexico case For brevity CS refers to the System Planner forms for the communications system and VMS refers to the forms for the voice messaging system CS Form A Page 1 of 3 Write the Telephone Numbers in order customer desires Telephone numbers in this column represent Software Mexico s four lines VMS AA In this column checks for Lines 01 02 03 and 04 indicate that unanswered calls on those lines go to the Automated Attendant Service that is Automated Attendant 1 of the PARTNER MAIL VS system CS Form A Page 2 of 3 E 30 System Settings Receptionist answers calls during business hours No on this line indicates that Vera will backup the voice messaging system Ring on Transfer 119 NA written in the space provided indicates that music or recorded messages will be played while calls are being transferred Music on Hold 602 The blank line indicates that a Music on Hold device is installed Line Coverage VMS Hunt Schedule 507 The company will accept the default setting that is Always that has the Automated At
312. ter 10 49 71 74 or 771 776 II Plus 10 57 71 74 or 771 776 Automated Attendant 1 V2 3 4 Form 3A Automated Attendant A nnouncement System L anguage or Primary L anguage Copy this form for each Automated Attendant Save the original blank form for future use Check a number to indicate for which Automated Attendant this form is used Se N E Required if Selector C ode Transfer is set to A nnouncement Announcement 2 Welcome to Tennis Land s Pro Shop This month all tennis skirts in stock are on sale at 20 off Hurry in for the best selection And ask about special rates on racket restringing For more information press O now General I nformation C ompleting this F orm m An Announcement can be up to four minutes long Write the Announcement and its number in the space provided m Inthe Announcement you can offer callers the option of pressing 4 to repeat this Announcement 7 to return to the Main Menu Recording the A nnouncement s 8 to transfer to an extension or 0 to transfer to the programmed Dial 0 Timeout Extension After playing the Announcement the system waits five seconds to allow the caller to press one of these digit If the caller does not press a digit the system hangs up m To record the Announcement dial 3 from the Programming Main Menu m f the system is set for Bilingual Mode let callers know they can switch the language they hear while
313. the conversation The recorded conversation is saved in the subscriber s mailbox The button programmed for this purpose must have lights To program a Record a Call button 1 Press Feature 0 System Program System Program Central Tel Program 2 Enter the number of the extension to be programmed 3 Press a programmable button with lights 4 Press eature Q 5 Program another button for this extension or press Feature Q to exit programming mode 6 Label the button at the user s extension Call Screening PARTNER ACS Release 3 0 or later F25 4 34 The Call Screening feature is available only on the PARTNER Advanced Communications System Release 3 0 or later and a system telephone This feature allows a subscriber to listen to a caller leaving a message in his or her mailbox A subscriber can turn this feature on or off by pressing the programmed button The button programmed for this purpose must have lights To program a Call Screening button 1 Press Feature 0 System Program System Program Central Tel Program 2 Enter the number of the extension to be programmed 3 Press a programmable button with lights 4 Press Feature 2 6 5 Program another button for this extension or press eature 0 to exit programming mode 6 Label the button at the user s extension Verifying System Operation Verifying System Operation After you finis
314. ther in the Secondary Language m Subscribers can have a Mailbox Language different from the languages selected here Mailbox Language is specified on Form 2 m You can specify a language for programming prompts that is different from the system language specified in or above If you change the System Administration Language that is the language in which programming prompts are played specify the language here Completing this F orm Language Mode Check Bilingual if the Language Mode should be set to Bilingual If you check Bilingual also see below if not see Monolingual Mode System Language Check the Primary language desired if different from the default Bilingual Mode Primary Language Check the Primary Language desired if different from the default Bilingual Mode Secondary Language Check the Secondary Language desired if different from the default Programming L anguage m To program the Language Mode as well as the System Language in Monolingual Mode or the Primary and Secondary Languages in Bilingual Mode dial LJ from the Programming Main Menu m To program the System Administration Language call the Voice Mail Service and enter the login and password Then dial 0 Form 2 Mailbox Assignments Copy this form for each Automated Attendant Save the original blank form for future use Check a number to indicate for which Automated Attendant this form is used
315. ther than touchtone service pauses may need to be included after every digit in the Outcalling number Possible Cause 3 A line may not be available to place a call What to do f all lines are in use when the system attempts to outcall the outcall does not go through The system counts the attempt toward the total number of attempts to be made during the specified time interval If the subscriber s Outcalling Schedule end time occurs before the remaining attempts these attempts will not be made by the system You may need to obtain more lines if the problem occurs frequently Voice Mail Service Possible Cause 4 The message was received outside the hours programmed in the subscriber s Outcalling Schedule or the Outcalling period was ended What to do This is standard operation Outcalling is performed only during the hours specified by the subscriber s Outcalling Schedule Outcalling will be done only for messages received during the Outcalling period Possible Cause 5 Outcalling may not be turned on What to do Have the mailbox owner verify that Outcalling is turned on The System Manager should also verify that the Outcalling privilege is assigned Possible Cause 6 The number may be on the Disallowed Number List What to do Check call restrictions and Allowed and Disallowed Number Lists Outcalling to a Telephone Is Not Working Possible Cause 1 The Outcalling number is not properly programmed What to do Che
316. tions that should always be followed when using the system 1 10 Read and understand all instructions Follow all warnings and instructions marked on the product Unplug all telephone connections before cleaning DO NOT use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners Use a damp cloth for cleaning This product should be serviced by or taken to a qualified repair center when service or repair work is required DO NOT use this product near water for example in a wet basement location DO NOT place this product on an unstable cart stand or table Never push objects of any kind into slots or openings as they may touch dangerous voltage points or short out parts that could result in a risk of fire or electric shock Never spill liquid of any kind on the product Avoid using this product during an electrical storm There may be a remote risk of electric shock from lightning DO NOT use the telephone to report a gas leak in the vicinity of the leak The product is provided with a three wire grounding type plug This is a safety feature DO NOT defeat the safety purpose of the grounding type plug DO NOT staple or otherwise attach the AC power supply cord to building surfaces A CAUTION DO NOT block or cover the ventilation slots and openings They prevent the product from overheating DO NOT place the product in a separate enclosure unless proper ventilation is provided SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS Contents About This
317. tiont Out In or No from Form B2 t Available with ACS R2 0 or later only Form C3 PARTNER 18 18D Phone PAGE 3 of 8 Check Desired Button Features write in extension or group number SAMPLE Automatic System Answer 111 6 ASA Direct Extension Dial 113 6 DXD Night Service 503 NightSvc Outgoing Call Restriction 114 1 OCR 04 DEL Wake Up Service 115 Wake Call Screening F 25 7 SCREEN luo OL 1X9 L O O ri O O Eoy O O O O Night VMS O O O SVC DND Auto Dial VM Box IMM CMM z 5 05 L 06 L O _ n IMM IMM L IMM O IMM 01 U2 Lo O oq Intercom g Intercom Ext O gt IN Caller ID Call Log F 23 Calls Caller ID Inspect F 17 ID Inspect PARTNER 18D only In Hybrid mode only if pool 880 is assigned these two buttons are associated with this pool ACS R2 0 or later only Specify Automatic Line Selection Identify extensions programmed as shown 10 Caller ID Name Display F 16 ID Name Do Not Disturb F 01 DND Privacy F 07 Priv Record a Call F 24 7 RAC VMS Cover F 15 VMSCover Voice Interrupt on Busy Talk Back F 18 VIOB Account Code Entry F 1
318. to connect a PC to your PARTNER MAIL VS system When you generate a Configuration Report in the PARTNER MAIL VS system and send it to your PC it is saved in a text file that you can open and print The procedures in this section explain how to set up HyperTerminal the terminal emulation program and how to run the report The Configuration Report shows the current settings for a System Language Mode and Primary and Secondary Language choices a System Administration Prompt Language a For each Automated Attendant All Menu Definitions including Dial 0 Timeout Extension and Selector Code assignments All Automated Attendant line assignments a Line Ownership mw For each mailbox Mailbox extension number Maximum message length and mailbox size parameter Mailbox language parameter Outcalling permission Record a Call message length Personal Operator Outcalling information including numbers schedule cycles and interval Personal Group Lists 5 73 System Management Setting Up HyperTerminal 5 74 To generate the report you will use the HyperTerminal application which is provided with Windows 95 Windows NT 4 0 or later and Windows 98 To set up HyperTerminal 1 From the Start menu choose Programs gt Accessories gt Hyperlerminal The HyperTerminal window appears Click on Hyper Terminal The Connect Description dialog box appears n the Name box t
319. to delete this Night Menu Prompt If the system is operating in Monolingual Mode the system plays Deleted To record a new prompt for this menu press 1 To use the existing prompt press Return to Step 6 If the system is operating in Bilingual Mode the system plays Deleted To record Primary Language prompt press 1 To record Secondary Language prompt press 2 To save any recordings press Return to Step 6 Do one of the following For systems operating in Monolingual Mode press to approve this Night Menu Prompt This system confirms that the Night Menu Prompt is approved and you have now finished this procedure For systems operating in Bilingual Mode press and continue with Step 11 To record the Night Menu Prompt in the other language repeat Steps 6 through 10 Otherwise go to Step 12 Press to approve all changes The new Night Menu Prompt s now takes effect Press to return to the Programming Main Menu or hang up to quit Automated Attendant Service Group Call Distribution Option 1 Use this communications system procedure to specify a new outside line on which you want Automated Attendant Service Update Line Coverage on Form A Page 1 of the System Planner for the communications system to show modifications to VMS AA lines before you begin To assign VMS AA lines to Hunt Group 7 1 Press Feature 0 O System Program System Program
320. to eight extensions A Announcement An informative message that provides frequently requested information It is recorded by the Sys tem Manager and plays to callers who select it from an Automated Attendant s Menu Auto Dial button A programmable button on a system phone that lets the user dial a series of digits simply by pressing that button An Auto Dial button can be used to dial the voice messaging system with one touch See a so Programmable button Automated Attendant Dial 0 Timeout Extension The specified extension to which calls are routed by the Automated Attendant when the caller presses 0 or does not choose a menu option within five seconds of playing an announcement Automated Attendant Service A component of the voice messaging system that consists of a menu definition and prompt It pro vides outside callers with options enabling them to reach an extension a Hunt Group or for PARTNER II systems a Calling Group by pressing a single digit or by dialing an extension or group number Auxiliary equipment Telecommunications equipment other than system phones that can be connected to the control unit Auxiliary equipment includes industry standard devices that can connect directly to the pub lic telephone network such as doorphones or fax machines as well as devices that require the interface provided by the control unit Such as a loudspeaker paging system Automatic VMS Cover A communications system f
321. ttons on the phone at extension 10 or 11 if available change For example left becomes System Program which is the button used to enter programming mode To identify these buttons while programming place the appropriate programming overlay provided with the system over the diaload of the phone at extension 10 or 11 Use the following special buttons while programming Next Procedure and Prev Procedure cycle forward and backward through the programming procedures Next item and Prev item cycle forward and backward through a procedure s parameters A parameter is typically an outside line an extension or a elephone list entry Next Data and Prev Data cycle forward and backward through the valid list entries These buttons work only for fixed data such as a line or extension number They do not work for variable data such as date time password elephone numbers or doorphone assignments Remove returns the current setting to the factory setting Communications System Programming Enter ends an entry of variable length such as a telephone number in an Allowed Phone Number List Sysiem Program starts the System Programming process n starts the Centralized Telephone Programming process that s customizing individual telephones from extension 10 or 11 if available Feature when followed by enters or exits programming mode Programming Mode To enter programming mo
322. uci utilis par ce dispositif La terminaison du circuit boucl peut tre constitu e de n importe quelle combinaison de dispositifs pourvu que la somme des indices de charge de l ensemble des dispositifs ne d passe pas 100 No d homolagation 230 3756A No de certification CSA LR 60486 L indice de charge 7 Warranty Information Repair Information Outside the continental U S contact your Lucent Technologies Representative or local Authorized Dealer for warranty and repair information applicable to your system In Warranty Repairs If you purchased or leased your system directly from Lucent Technologies Lucent Technologies will repair it free of charge during the one year warranty period Simply call the Lucent Technologies Technical Service Center and ask for service Business Day service is standard during the warranty period for both the control unit and system phones Business Day service is performed during normal business hours However if you need 24 hour service protection during the warranty period on the control unit in case there is a major system failure you can purchase an Around the Clock service contract from your local Lucent Technologies sales office Around the Clock service is not available for phones If you purchased or leased your system through a Lucent Technologies Authorized Dealer contact your dealer for repairs C 1 Warranty Information Post Warranty Repairs C 2 If you p
323. um of 48 mailboxes a Handles up to two calls in the 2 port configuration or four calls in the 4 port configuration simultaneously and provides service for a predetermined number of subscribers You can program your voice messaging system to answer outside calls play a customized message prompting the caller to press digits for the party with whom the caller wants to speak and efficiently route the call to the appropriate party all without the aid of a receptionist PARTNER MAIL VS provides four Automated Attendants each of which answers different lines You can create up to two Automated Attendant Announcements in each language selected for the system for each Automated Attendant For example you can offer callers a choice of a standard business hours location announcement or a frequently updated announcement featuring special offers for your sales department and two other announcement choices for your service department When a called party does not answer or is busy on another call the voice messaging system allows callers to leave a private message or to transfer to another system extension or the receptionist s extension for assistance Overview Subscribers that is your employees who have been assigned voice mailboxes can use the voice messaging system to retrieve messag es from any touch tone phone on the premises or from a remote location to create a Personal Greeting for their mailbox to forward mess
324. up 7 Refer to Figure 2 1 in Chapter 2 and the figures in Appendix D to determine the extension numbers that are associated with the PARTNER MAIL VS module Then use Hunt Group Extensions 505 to verify that the VMS extensions are assigned to Hunt Group 7 If Hunt Group 7 does not have the correct VMS extensions assign the correct extension numbers If Hunt Group 7 has the correct VMS extensions call 1 800 628 2888 for help or call your Lucent Technologies Representative or Authorized Dealer Automated Attendant Service System Cuts Off Part of Greeting Possible Cause 1 Youmay have begun recording the greeting too soon What to do Re record the greeting After the prompt to record the greeting pause a moment before speaking Possible Cause 2 A touch tone signal may have been recorded accidentally with the greeting What to do Re record the greeting System Transfers Call to Receptionist Before Playing the Menu Prompt Possible Cause The extensions associated with the PARTNER MAIL VS module were not assigned to Hunt Group 7 What to do Refer to Figure 2 1 in Chapter 2 and the figures in Appendix D to determine the extension numbers that are associated with the PARTNER MAIL VS module Then use Hunt Group Extensions 505 to verify that the VMS extensions are assigned to Hunt Group 7 System Does Not Transfer Calls Properly Possible Cause 1 If this occurs when the Automated Attendant Service answers call
325. urchased your system from Lucent Technologies and you have a post warranty service contact Lucent Technologies service is provided under the terms of that contract To significantly reduce unexpected repair costs after the warranty period you can purchase a post warranty service contract from Lucent Technologies If you do not have a contract Lucent Technologies service is provided ona time and materials basis by calling the Lucent Technologies Technical Service Center A contract provides you within the applicable coverage period and response times service calls with no charge for parts and labor on covered repairs Both Business Day and Around the Clock coverages of varying lengths are available To order a post warranty service contract call 1 800 247 7000 in the continental U S only If you leased your system from Lucent Technologies Business Day service is included in your lease To upgrade to Around the Clock service call 1 800 247 7000 in the continental U S only If you purchased or leased your system through a Lucent Technologies Authorized Dealer contact your dealer for repairs Lucent Technologies Warranty and Limitation of Liability Lucent Technologies Warranty and Limitation of Liability Lucent Technologies warrant you the customer that your system will be in good working order on the date Lucent Technologies or its authorized reseller delivers or installs the system whichever is later Warranty Date
326. utes a All Other Extensions Other extensions each have a default storage capacity of 20 minutes which can be administered for up to 180 minutes or 120 messages 5 39 System Management 5 40 Programming Main Menu ace 9p Mailboxes Press 4 Mailbox Number Enter Number Mailbox Number Exists Yes Administer Message Length amp Mailbox Size Press 2 Reinitialize Password Press 3 Reinitialize Mailbox Press 4 Administer Outcalling Press 5 Program Mailbox Language Press 6 Administer Record A Call Press 7 Delete Mailbox Press 3 Create Mailbox Press 4 Figure 5 3 Modifying Mailboxes Modifying Mailboxes If you need to change current mailbox programming you can use the instructions presented in this section For example If an employee leaves the company you can set up the previously assigned mailbox number for a new employee To do so use Reinitializing a Mailbox which returns the mailbox to its factory settings and deletes any messages that were in the mailbox If you want to keep the maximum number of mailboxes available for subscribers usel Delsing a Mailbox ho delete mailboxes from extensions to which you connect auxiliary equipment such as doorphones and fax mach
327. utton b Press QOQA c Enter the password and press d Press The system plays the system programming options Press for Line Ownership Press 4 to assign Line Ownership Enter a line number specified in Column A of Form 6 followed by Enter the line owner s mailbox number specified in Column D of Form 6 followed by Repeat Steps 4 and 5 for each owned line Hang up to exit voice messaging system programming Refer to the next section to program the communications system 4 21 Initial Programming Communications System Programming Automated Attendant Service Before you begin locate Forms A B1 and C of the System Planner for the communications system Refer to Form A Page 1 Line Coverage to see if any lines are checked for VMS AA If so use this section to program Automated Attendant Service for each Automated Attendant otherwise skip to Call Answer Service Group Call Distribution Option 1 Use this procedure to specify the outside lines on which Automated Attendant Service is required To assign VMS AA lines specified on Form A Page 1 Line Coverage to Hunt Group 7 1 D At extension 10 press Feature 0 System Program System Program Enter the System Password if required 2 3 Press MOOO 4 5 At the Group prompt press Atthe Line prompt enter the first VMS AA line specified in the Line Cover
328. w many mailboxes exist and how many are allowed then Pleas nter the mailbox number followed by or press for the next mailbox 3 Enter the number of the mailbox whose password you want to reinitialize ollowed by The system plays Mailbox XX exists To administer the message length and mailbox size press 2 To reinitialize the password press 3 To reinitialize the mailbox press 4 To administer Outcalling press 5 To program the Mailbox Language press 6 To administer Record a Call press 7 To delete the mailbox press 3 If finished with this mailbox press or for the next mailbox press 4 Press The system plays The password has been reinitialized 5 Press to return to the Programming Main Menu or hang up to quit Modifying Mailboxes Reinitializing a Mailbox To prepare a previously used mailbox for a new subscriber you can reinitialize the mailbox This procedure deletes any messages left in the mailbox and turns off the phone s message light if lit erases the personal greeting if recorded changes the password back to the factory setting 1234 and changes the Mailbox Language back to either the System Language Monolingual Mode or the Primary Language Bilingual Mode To reinitialize a mailbox 1 Access the Programming Main Menu a Press or the programmed Voice Mail Auto Dial button b Press QOQA c Enter the password and press d Pr
329. xtension 37 or the order processing operators assigned to Hunt Group 774 Selector N umber R ange C ode Action of N umbers Dial 0 T imeout E xtension A Specify the extension to which calls are transferred if the caller dials 0 or does not enter a Selector Code If you use the Centrex Transfer option all lines assigned to this Automated Attendant must be Centrex lines If you use the Mailbox Transfer option Selector Codes 1 9 represent a mailbox number that you specify to which the call is transferred The Selector Code 9 factory setting lets callers transfer directly to mailbox 10 receptionist s mailbox where they can leave a message The Description and Selector Code number from this form will be used to complete the Day and Night Menu Prompts Forms 4 4A 5 and 5A Announcement entries in Description Selector Code and Number Range of Numbers of this form will be used to complete Forms 3A and 3B PARTNER System Range of Extensions Advanced R1 0 1 1 10 41 71 74 or 771 776 Advanced R3 0 or later 10 49 71 74 or 771 776 Endeavor R1 0 or later 10 49 71 74 or 771 776 II Plus 10 57 71 74 or 771 776 Automated Attendant 1 012 03 014 Form 3A Automated Attendant A nnouncement System L anguage or Primary L anguage Copy this form for each Automated Attendant Save the original blank form for future use Check a number to indicate for which Automated Atten
330. xtension number Maximum message length and mailbox size parameter Mailbox language parameter Outcalling permission Record a Call message length Performing a System Backup Personal Operator Personal Group List Outcalling information including numbers schedule cycles and interval gt NOTE Personal greetings and messages are not saved To perform system backup 1 Be sure the PC Card is installed see the area labeled Slot for PC Card in If necessary access the Programming Main Menu If you are already at the Programming Main Menu skip to Step 3 a Press or the programmed Voice Mail Auto Dial button b Press OQA c Enter the password and press d Press The system plays the system programming options Press for Reports and Backup Restore Press 8 to perform a system backup The system prompts Please wait for backup confirmation This may take up to three minutes Do you want to continue Press 9 to confirm or 6 to cancel Press Q to confirm that you want to perform the system backup Do not hang up until you hear the backup confirmation prompt When the backup is complete the system prompts Backup Successful The system returns you to the Programming Main Menu gt NOTE If the system prompts that the backup has failed call the Technical Service Center at 1 800 628 2888 or call your Lucent Technologies Representative or local
331. y Green ON Steady Red Test Failed If the LED lights steady red that is the test failed do the following Power down the voice messaging system Re install the PC Card Power up the control unit again If the LED lights steady red again contact your local Authorized Dealer or the Lucent Technologies Technical Service Center at 1 800 628 2888 7 Atthis point do one of the following a To determine which voice messaging system and communications system planning forms must be completed before you begin programming see Chapter 3 a TO review system programming guidelines see Chapter 3 a To review the programming required for your PARTNER Voice Messaging System refer to the Initial Programming Checklist in Chapter 4 and complete the appropriate procedures included in that chapter a To update PARTNER Voice Messaging System programming refer to Chapter 5jor to the System Programming Reference pages at the end of this guide 2 5 Installation Connecting a PC to the PARTNER MAIL VS You can generate a Configuration Report in the PARTNER MAIL VS system and send it to your PC where it is saved in a text file that you can open and print See the instructions for generating a Configuration Report in chapters 4Jand 5 To connect a PC to the PARTNER MAIL VS you need the following equipment a aPC with an available serial COM port and running Windows 95 Windows NT 4 0 or later or Windows 98 a
332. ype Direct 2400 and then choose the OK button The Phone Number dialog box appears In the Connect using box choose the COM port on your PC that is connected to the PMVS serial port for example if you are using COM1 choose Direct to Com1 Choose the OK button The COM Properties dialog box appears In the Bits per second box choose 2400 n the Data bits box choose 8 n the Parity box choose None n the Stop bits box choose 1 In the Flow control box choose Xon Xoff Choose the OK button to close the COM Properties dialog box From the File menu choose Exit to close HyperTerminal A confirmation dialog box appears Choose the Yes button to save the HyperTerminal session you just created HyperTerminal closes and an icon for Direct 2400 is displayed The Direct 2400 file contains the settings required to capture the report on the PC To run the report go to Running the Configuration Report Generating a Configuration Report Running the Configuration Report To generate a Configuration Report A 10 11 From the Start menu on your PC choose Programs gt Accessories gt Hyperlerminal The HyperTerminal window appears Click on the Direct 2400 icon that was created when you performed the procedure in Setting Up HyperTerminal The HyperTerminal window appears From the Transfer menu choose Capture Text T

PARTNER MAIL VS Voice Messaging System

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents